Definium-5000 Generator Manual

Technical
Publications
5192971--100
Revision 4
Definium 5000TM
Generator Manual
GE Healthcare Definium 5000 Generator Manual
REV 4 5192971--100
This page intentionally left blank.
2
REV 4 5192971--100
LEGAL NOTES
TRADEMARKS
Definiumt 5000 is a trademark of GE Healthcare. All other products and their name brands are the
(registered) trademarks of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
All Material, Copyright E 2007 by General Electric Company, Inc. All rights reserved. The material presented
and contained herein may not be reproduced in any form or manner, without the written permission of General
Electric Company, Inc.
3
REV 4 5192971--100
IMPORTANT PRECAUTIONS
LANGUAGE
4
REV 4 5192971--100
5
REV 4 5192971--100
6
REV 4 5192971--100
7
REV 4 5192971--100
8
REV 4 5192971--100
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage
in shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a
General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST
be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the
contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for
damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
To file a report:
G Call 1--800--548--3366 and use option 8.
G Fill out a report on http://us44hdd21/sctq/InstallFulfill/InstalFulfillment.htm
G Contact your local service coordinator for more information on this process.
Rev. Jan. 5, 2005
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power
Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel. The
products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated, and special
engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own
specially trained field engineers. All of GE‘s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements
of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE‘s field engineers, personnel of
third--party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing
on the equipment.
IMPORTANT...X--RAY PROTECTION
X--ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should
be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this
equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Healthcare Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate
in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x--radiation other than the useful
beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel
the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing
themselves or others to radiation.
It is important that anyone having anything to do with x--radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with
the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in
NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda,
Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to
protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Healthcare Group, its
agents, and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use
of the equipment.
Various protective materials and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.
9
REV 4 5192971--100
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service representatives.
GE personnel, please use the GEHC iTrak (issue tracking) process to report all omissions, errors, and defects
in this publication.
ENVIRONMENTAL STATEMENT
ON THE LIFE CYCLE OF THE EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM
This equipment or system contains environmentally dangerous components and materials (such as PCB‘s,
electronic components, used dielectric oil, lead, batteries etc.) which, once the life-cycle of the equipment or
system comes to an end, becomes dangerous and need to be considered as harmful waste according to the
international, domestic and local regulations.
The manufacturer recommends to contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer or an authorized
waste management company once the life-cycle of the equipment or system comes to an end to remove this
equipment or system.
--- MEDICAL EQUIPMENT ---
WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRIC SHOCK,
FIRE AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS
ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH
UL 60601 ---1, CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.601.1 <14NN>
10
REV 4 5192971--100
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE
1 AUG 14, 2007 Initial Release.
2 SEP 10, 2007 Updated error codes and Job Cards; justified cross--references
3 JAN 25, 2008 Updated error codes and new schematic revisions
4 AUG 13, 2008 General Update
This Document is the English original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer.
ADVISORY SYMBOLS
The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual.
DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT,

IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED, WILL CAUSE SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
WARNINGS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT,

IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED, COULD CAUSE SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF
EQUIPMENT OR DATA.
Cautions advise of conditions or situations that, if not heeded

or avoided, could cause personal injury or damage to
equipment or data.
Note . Notes alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes

represent information that is important to know but which do not
necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.
xi
REV 4 5192971--100
SAFETY SYMBOLS
The following safety symbols will be used in the equipment.
Attention, consult accompanying documents.
Ionizing radiation.
Type B equipment.
Dangerous voltage.
Ground.
This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and

electronic equipment must not be disposed as unsorted
municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please
contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer or
an authorized waste management company for information
concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.
xii
REV 4 5192971--100
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
CHAPTER 1 -- SAFETY AND SERVICE
1 LOCK-OUT / TAG-OUT (LOTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1 System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2 LOTO Procedure for System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2 CONTROL SWITCHES AND BUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
2.1 Power ON / OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
2.2 System Movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

2.2.1 Emergency Stop (E--Stop) for Movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
2.2.2 CRIB Console Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
2.2.3 Control Panel, Detector Handle, and Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
3 APPLYING SYSTEM POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
3.1 System Preparation for Energizing Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
3.2 Energizing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
4 DE-ENERGIZING THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
5 EQUIPMENT SAFETY -- ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
5.1 Generating Static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
5.2 Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
5.3 Grounding the Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
5.4 Recommended Materials and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
13
REV 4 5192971--100
Section Page
CHAPTER 2 -- PLANNED MAINTENANCE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2 PLANNED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1 Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2 General Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3 General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.3.1 External Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.3.2 Internal Cabinet Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.4 Cable Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2.4.1 Ground Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4.2 AC Power Supply in X-ray Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.5 HV Transformer Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.6 X-ray Tube Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.7 Radiographic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2.7.1 X--Ray Tube Warm--Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.7.2 Previous Steps for Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.7.3 Test for kV Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.7.4 Test for Digital mA Loop Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.7.5 Test for Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.8 AEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
CHAPTER 3 -- TROUBLESHOOTING
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
1.1 Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
1.2 General Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
2 GENERAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
2.1 Low DC Voltage Power Supply Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
2.2 Microprocessors and General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
4 DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143
14
REV 4 5192971--100
Section Page
CHAPTER 4 -- CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
1.1 Tools And Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
1.2 Generator Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

1.2.1 Minimum Current Time Product (mAs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
1.2.2 Exposure Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
1.2.3 HV Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
1.2.4 Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
2 CONFIGURATION AND TEST SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
2.1 3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
2.5 3000SW2 - HT Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
2.6 Basic Configuration of Generator Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
3 GENERATOR SERVICE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
3.1 Starting the Generator Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
3.2 Exiting the Generator Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
3.3 Generator Service Mode Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
3.4 Exposure Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
3.5 Workstations Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4 EXTENDED MEMORY SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.1 Extended Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.2 How to Enter and Store Data in the Extended Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.3 Limit of Maximum kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
15
REV 4 5192971--100
Section Page
5 X-RAY TUBE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
5.1 X-ray Tube Insert Protection Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
5.2 LV-DRAC (High Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

5.2.1 Dipswitch Configuration on Control DRAC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
5.2.2 Programming of Starter Type and RAD Filament Setting Time . . . . . . 4-30
5.3 Anode Rotation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
5.4 Focal Spots Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
6 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
6.1 Filament Stand-by Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
6.2 Exposure Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
6.3 kV Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
6.4 Digital mA Loop Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
6.5 Digital mA Loop Open (X-ray Tube Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

6.5.1 Auto-calibration of Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
6.5.2 Manual Calibration of digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
6.6 Final Checks after Generator Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
6.7 AEC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
APPENDIX A DATA BOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
CHAPTER 5 -- RENEWAL PARTS
CHAPTER 6 -- SCHEMATICS
16
REV 4 5192971--100
CHAPTER 1
SAFETY AND SERVICE
1-1
REV 4 5192971--100
1-2
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 1 LOCK-OUT / TAG-OUT (LOTO)
1.1 SYSTEM POWER
Name Of Equipment: Definium 5000 System (Workstation, System Cabinet,

Positioner U-arm).
Number Of Locks: One (1) per person, working on the system.
Title(s) of Employees Authorized to Perform LOTO: Those trained in

Lock-out / Tag-out (LOTO).
Title(s) of Affected Employees and How to Notify: Hospital Personnel;

notified by verbal communication.
Energy Source Yes No Location of Energy Isolating Means Magnitude of Energy
Electrical X System’s Main “A1” Power Disconnect 320 -- 480VAC, 3 Phase
Pneumatic X
Hydraulic X
Gas/Water/Steam X
Chemical X
Mechanical Motion X
Gravity X
Springs X
Thermal X
Stored Energy X
Air Under Pressure X
Oil Under Pressure X
Water Under Pressure X
Gas Under Pressure X
Steam X
Other X
Type(s) of Equipment and/or Method(s) Selected to Dissipate or Isolate

Stored Energy: Allow three (3) minutes for stored energy to dissipate.
Type(s) of Equipment and/or Method(s) Used to Ensure Disconnection’s:

One Lock & Tag for Main “A1” Disconnect.
1-3
REV 4 5192971--100
1.2 LOTO PROCEDURE FOR SYSTEM POWER
Name of Equipment: Definium 5000 System (Workstation, System Cabinet,

Positioner U--arm)
1. Prepare for shutdown of equipment by notifying affected personnel

working in the area that Lock Out / Tag Out is being performed.
2. Bring the system software down (refer to Section 4, “De--Energizing the

System”).
3. Locate the main power supply (Service) disconnect feeding the system
cabinet.
4. Lock Out / Tag Out the main power disconnect.
5. Using an insulated voltmeter, measure the incoming power connection

to the system cabinet at the main line power fuses F3, F4, and F5.
6. If no voltage is present at the system cabinet’s main line power fuses,

check that the high voltage inverter’s capacitors have bled off their
residual charge by observing that the LEDs on the Charge/Discharge
Monitor Boards are extinguished. This will take approximately three (3)
minutes after the power is shut off.
7. If the LEDs on the Charge/Discharge Monitor Boards are not lit, proceed
to service the equipment as required.
8. After service has been performed, notify affected personnel that

equipment will be re-energized and LOTO devices are being removed.
9. Assure the safety of the area and that all safety devices and guards have
been replaced.
10. Return system functions to a preset state.
11. Remove Lock-Out / Tag-Out equipment from the main disconnect.
12. Locate the main power supply (Service) disconnect feeding the system
cabinet and re--apply power.
13. Perform the system start-up (refer to Section 3.2, “Energizing the
System”).
1-4
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 2 CONTROL SWITCHES AND BUTTONS
2.1 POWER ON / OFF
The Generator is powered by the same Room Electrical Cabinet where the
X--ray Positioner is connected, that is, the whole system will be turned ON/OFF
from the same Electrical Cabinet.
To turn the system ON, press the POWER ON (I) button located at the CRIB
Console. The Emergency OFF button at the CRIB Console must be depressed.
To turn the System OFF, press the POWER OFF (O) button located at the CRIB
Console.
IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY FORCIBLY PRESS

EITHER OF THE “EMERGENCY STOP” (E--STOP) SWITCHES
(RED, MUSHROOM--SHAPED SWITCHES) AT THE ROOM
ELECTRICAL CABINET OR AT THE CRIB CONSOLE.
BEFORE POWERING THE UNIT ON CHECK THAT THERE IS

NOTHING ON THE DETECTOR SURFACE OR ON THE
SWIVEL ARM.
IN THE EVENT OF A STRONG BUMP ON THE DETECTOR OR

ON THE SWIVEL ARM, PLACE THE UNIT IN THORAX
POSITION, TURN THE UNIT OFF, WAIT ONE (1) MINUTE, AND
TURN IT ON.
Illustration 1
CRIB Console
System POWER OFF (O)
CRIB Emergency Stop

(System)
X--ray Handswitch
System POWER ON (I)
1-5
REV 4 5192971--100
2.2 SYSTEM MOVEMENTS
MONITOR THE SYSTEM MOVEMENTS WITH SPECIAL CARE.

AVOID ANY IMPACT OF THE SYSTEM ON THE FLOOR,
CEILING, OR OTHER ELEMENTS IN THE ROOM. IT MAY
CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.
WITH SPECIAL CARE MONITOR THE PATIENT’S POSITION

(HANDS, FEET, FINGERS, ETC.) TO AVOID INJURY TO THE
PATIENT CAUSED BY UNIT MOVEMENTS. PATIENT HANDS
MUST BE KEPT AWAY FROM MOBILE COMPONENTS OF THE
UNIT.
INTRAVENOUS TUBING, CATHETERS, AND OTHER PATIENT

CONNECTED LINES SHOULD BE ROUTED AWAY FROM
MOVING EQUIPMENT.
2.2.1 EMERGENCY STOP (E--STOP) FOR MOVEMENTS
The unit includes two (2) Emergency Stops (E--Stops) located at the detector
handle and at the control box door that disable all movements of the swivel arm
in case of emergency. Press the red mushroom--shaped switch to block
movements. To restore the swivel arm movements, wait one (1) minute before
pulling the red mushroom--shaped switch again.
Illustration 2
Emergency Stop for Movements
Detector
Assembly
Emergency
Stop Switch
1-6
REV 4 5192971--100
2.2.2 CRIB CONSOLE CONTROLS
Illustration 3
CRIB CONSOLE
1
6 8 10 12
3
4
2 7
9 11 13
5
1. OFF
2. ON
3. X--ray Indicator
4. Tube Overheat / HU Indicator
5. Expose Hold Indicator
6. Safety Lock (Active Green LED)
7. Move Button
8. Slow ---- Fast (Active Green LED)
9. Thorax & Undertable Positions
10. Vertical Movements
11. Swivel Arm Rotation
12. Detector Rotation
13. SID
1-7
REV 4 5192971--100
2.2.3 CONTROL PANEL, DETECTOR HANDLE, AND REMOTE CONTROL
CONTROL PANEL
1
3 4
5 5
10 10
11 2
12
6 8 9
7 2
7 6
10
8 3
4
3 5
10
REMOTE CONTROL
10 1. Touch Screen Console
2. Automatic Positioning Button
9 3. Motorized Vertical Movement of Swivel Arm
4. Motorized SID Adjustment
5. Motorized Rotation Movement of Swivel Arm
6. Automatic Undertable Positioning
DETECTOR HANDLE 7. Automatic Thorax Positioning
8. Safety Lock
9. High / Low Speed
10. Motorized Rotation Movement of Image Receptor
11. Remote Control Sensor
12. Collimator Control Button (At Remote Control)
1-8
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 3 APPLYING SYSTEM POWER
3.1 SYSTEM PREPARATION FOR ENERGIZING POWER
POTENTIAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK. PERFORM LOTO

BEFORE PERFORMING SERVICE OF ANY KIND (REFER TO
SECTION 1, “LOCK--OUT / TAG--OUT (LOTO)”).
Follow the steps below to ensure that your system powers up safely, properly,
and reliably.
Note . Potential for Equipment Damage. PDU tap settings must match
input voltage else there is potential for equipment damage.
1. Refer to the Pre-Installation Manual -- Direction 5192967--100, Section

4.5, “Safety Devices,” for information on the proper tap settings.
2. Disengage all facility (i. e., hospital) E-Stops.
3. Disengage the detector and CRIB E--Stop buttons. Turn them 1/4 turn
clockwise to release button. They will pop out.
CRIB E-Stop
Detector E-Stop
Warning Label
1-9
REV 4 5192971--100
3.2 ENERGIZING THE SYSTEM
System power--up is controlled by both hardware and software. When power

is applied, power is switched ON to each of the subsystems through the
hardware. Software in the subsystems boot and begin loading their operating
systems and applications. Complete system start-up takes approximately five
(5) minutes.
1. Prepare the system for energizing, if required. (Refer to Section 3.1,

“System Preparation for Energizing Power.”)
2. Remove the lock and tag from the facility power. (Refer to Section 1.2,
“LOTO Procedure for System Power.”)
3. Press the POWER ON (I) button on the CRIB to initiate system start-up.
POWER ON
4. System start-up is complete when the applications log--in screen

displays on the workstation computer.
1-10
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 4 DE-ENERGIZING THE SYSTEM
Shut down is controlled by both software and hardware. When a shutdown is

initiated, the application and the operating software execution is terminated.
While this takes place, signals are sent to the PDU to shut--off the system
hardware. Complete shutdown takes approximately two (2) minutes.
1. From the application interface, use the mouse to click on the tools icon.
This selects the Service User Interface (SUIF).
2. Now click on the Shut Down button.
3. Now lock out and tag out the facility power to the system, if you wish to
perform service. (Refer to Section 1.2, “LOTO Procedure for System
Power.”)
1-11
REV 4 5192971--100
1-12
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 5 EQUIPMENT SAFETY -- ELECTROSTATIC

DISCHARGE (ESD)
A sudden discharge of static electricity from your finger or other conductor can
destroy static-sensitive devices or microcircuitry. Often the spark is neither felt
nor heard but damage occurs. An electronic device exposed to electrostatic
discharge (ESD) might not appear to be affected at all and can work perfectly
throughout a normal cycle. While the device can function normally for a while
it has been degraded in the internal layers and its life expectancy reduced.
Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in
many cases the discharge contains enough power to alter device parameters
or melt silicon junctions.
5.1 GENERATING STATIC
The following table shows that:
• Different activities generate different amounts of static electricity.
• Static electricity increases as humidity decreases.
Relative Humidity
Event 55% 40% 10%
Walking across carpet 7,500 V 15,000 V 35,000 V
Motions of bench worker 400 V 800 V 6,000 V
Removing bubble pack from PCB 7,000 V 20,000 V 26,500 V
Packing PCBs in foam--lined box 5,000 V 11,000 V 21,000 V
Many electronic components are sensitive to ESD. Circuitry design and

structure determine the degree of sensitivity. The following packaging and
grounding precautions are necessary to prevent damage to electric
components and accessories.
• Transport products in static-safe containers, such as tubes, bags, or

boxes to avoid hand contact.
• Protect all electrostatic parts and assemblies with conductive or

approved containers or packaging.
• Keep electrostatic sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at

static-free stations.
1-13
REV 4 5192971--100
• Place items on a grounded surface before removing them from their

container.
• When handling or touching a sensitive component or assembly, ground

yourself by touching the chassis.
• Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
• Place reusable electrostatic-sensitive parts from assemblies in

protective packaging or conductive foam.
5.2 PERSONAL GROUNDING METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
Use the following equipment to prevent static electricity damage to equipment:
• Wrist straps are flexible straps with a maximum of one--megohm ±10%

resistance in the ground cords. To provide a proper ground, wear the
strap against bare skin. The ground cord must be connected and fit
snugly into the banana plug connector on the grounding mat or
workstation.
• Heel straps, toe straps, and boot straps can be used at standing
workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On
conductive floors or dissipative floor mats, use them on both feet with a
maximum of one-megohm ±10% resistance between the operator and
ground.
Static Shielding Protection Levels
Method Voltage
Antistatic plastic 1,500
Carbon--loaded plastic 7,500
Metallized laminate 15,000
1-14
REV 4 5192971--100
5.3 GROUNDING THE WORK AREA
To prevent static damage of components and parts in the work area:
• Cover the work surface with approved static--dissipative material.

Provide a wrist strap connected to the work surface and properly
grounded tools and equipment.
• Use static-dissipative mats, foot straps, or air ionizers to give added

protection.
• Handle electrostatic sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by the

case or PCB laminate.
• Handle components only at static--free work areas.
• Turn off power and input signals before inserting and removing
connectors or test equipment.
• Use fixtures made of static-safe materials when fixtures must directly

contact dissipative surfaces.
• Keep work area free of non-conductive materials, such as ordinary

plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam.
5.4 RECOMMENDED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Materials and equipment that are recommended for use in preventing static
electricity include:
• Antistatic tape, smocks, aprons, or sleeve protectors.
• Conductive bins, foam, tabletop workstations with ground cord of

one--megohm ±10% resistance, and other assembly or soldering aids.
• Static--dissipative table or floor mats with hard tie to ground.
• ESD Field service kits.
• Static awareness labels.
• Wrist straps and footwear straps providing one-megohm ±10%

resistance.
• Material handling packages:
G Conductive plastic bags, plastic tubes, and tote boxes.
G Opaque shielding bags.
G Transparent metallized shielding bags and shielding tubes.
1-15
REV 4 5192971--100
1-16
REV 4 5192971--100
CHAPTER 2
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
2-1
REV 4 5192971--100
2-2
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this Planned Maintenance is to assure continued safe

performance of the X-ray generator, increase serviceability, reduce costs due
to down time, repairs, etc.; and to assure safety by reducing risks to persons.
The following checks and maintenance procedures, together with the

suggested intervals, are the manufacturer’s recommendation for the most
effective Planned Maintenance schedule for this generator.
Service tasks herein described must be performed exclusively by service

personnel specifically trained in servicing the Definium 5000 X--ray generator.
Planned Maintenance should be performed annually with a new system’s first

planned maintenance scheduled to occur thirteen (13) months after installation.
Note . Record all the configuration settings and calibration data in the
Data Book. (Refer to Appendix A, “Data Book,” at the end of
Chapter 4, “Configuration and Calibration.”)
2-3
REV 4 5192971--100
2-4
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 2 PLANNED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Whenever the HV transformer, X-ray tube, ATP Console CPU

Board, HT Controller Board, or Filament Driver Board is
replaced in the generator, the respective Configuration and
Calibration procedures must be performed. Refer to
Chapter 4, “Configuration and Calibration,” for the relevant
procedures for each part.
Before starting the planned maintenance procedures, it is recommended to

make a test exposure using the same operating factors and conditions as a
typical exposure.
Perform an X-ray tube warm-up procedure if the tube has not been in use for
approximately one (1) hour. Refer to Section 2.7.1, “X--Ray Tube Warm--up,” in
this chapter for the warm--up procedure.
2.1 TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
The following hand tools and products are required:
• Standard service engineer’s tool kit.
• Alcohol cleaning agent.
• Calculator.
• Digital Multimeter.
• Non-invasive kVp Meter (Kiethley model 35080A, GE part number:

2109730 or equivalent).
• Digital mAs Meter (GE part number 46--194427P435 or equivalent).
• Flat Field Phantom (GE part number 2281087 or equivalent) (used for
Digital Detector Calibration and AEC Calibration).
• Dose Probe Holder (GE part number 5198282 or equivalent) (used for
AEC Calibration).
• ESD Vacuum Cleaner (GE Part Number 46--194427P392 or equivalent)
2-5
REV 4 5192971--100
2.2 GENERAL CAUTIONS
MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN STORAGE CAPACITORS OF

THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY
RESIDUAL CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING
DIODES (LEDS) ON THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR
BOARDS ARE OFF (APPROXIMATELY THREE (3) MINUTES
AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF).
THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE

POWER LINE AND POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY
SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET
(MAIN DISCONNECT) IS OFF. WHEN THE GENERATOR IS
POWERED THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE
TRANSFORMER 6T2 (GENERATOR CABINET) IS ON.
INTERNAL PARTS OF THE GENERATOR (ALL FUSES, LINE

CONTACTOR (6K5), INPUT TRANSFORMER (6T2), ON/OFF
RELAY (3K3), AND LV-DRAC MODULE) ARE PERMANENTLY
POWERED ON THROUGH THE POWER LINE EVEN THOUGH
THE CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. BE SURE THAT THE
SAFETY SWITCH IS OFF BEFORE HANDLING ANY
INTERNAL PART OF THE EQUIPMENT (LOCK-OUT /
TAG-OUT). REFER TO CHAPTER 1, “SAFETY AND SERVICE,”
SECTION 1, “LOCK- OUT / TAG- OUT (LOTO)” FOR
INFORMATION ON LOTO.
DO NOT SUPPLY THE MAIN POWER FROM THE ELECTRICAL

ROOM CABINET (MAIN DISCONNECT) OR TURN ON THE
SYSTEM UNTIL SPECIFICALLY INSTRUCTED IN THIS
DOCUMENT.
ALWAYS HAVE THE “IPM DRIVER BOARD” CONNECTED IN

THE GENERATOR PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER. IF THE “IPM
DRIVER BOARD” IS NOT CONNECTED, PERMANENT
DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO THE IGBTS.
2-6
REV 4 5192971--100
2.3 GENERAL CLEANING
NEVER ATTEMPT TO CLEAN OR HANDLE ANY PART OF THE

X-RAY GENERATOR WHEN IT IS TURNED ON. THE SYSTEM
AND THE ROOM MAIN DISCONNECT MUST BE SWITCHED
OFF BEFORE CLEANING OR INSPECTING. REFER TO
CHAPTER 1, “SAFETY AND SERVICE,” SECTION 1,
“LOCK--OUT / TAG--OUT (LOTO)” FOR INFORMATION ON
LOTO.
2.3.1 EXTERNAL SURFACES
Clean external covers and surfaces frequently (particularly if corrosive

chemicals are present and especially parts in contact with the patient). Use a
cloth moistened in warm water with a mild soap solution. Wipe with a cloth
moistened in clean water. Do not use cleaners or solvents of any kind.
Check painted surfaces for scratching and touch up as required.
2.3.2 INTERNAL CABINET CLEANING
Use proper ESD procedures to prevent damage to the unit.

Refer to Section 5, “Equipment Safety - Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD),” in Chapter 1, “Safety and Service,” for
proper ESD handling.
Remove the external access cover from the generator cabinet and generator
support. The door of the control box provides enough access to it.
Visually inspect all major components for dust or foreign items. Search carefully
to detect objects which might cause short circuits and loose connections.
If excessive dust is present, clean the inside of the system cabinet with an ESD
vacuum cleaner (GE part number 46--194427P392, or equivalent). Make sure
that the fans operate properly and the ventilation holes of the cabinet are not
obstructed.
2-7
REV 4 5192971--100
2.4 CABLE CHECKS
CAREFULLY HANDLE ALL INTERNAL PARTS OF THE UNIT.

RELAY (3K3), AND LV-DRAC MODULE) ARE PERMANENTLY
TAG-OUT). REFER TO CHAPTER 1, “SAFETY AND SERVICE,”
SECTION 1, “LOCK- OUT / TAG- OUT (LOTO)” FOR
INFORMATION ON LOTO.
Check that all electrical connections are firm and secure and that all cable
clamps and strain reliefs are in place. Connectors should not have exposed
wire-veins. Check cable sheaths (cable cover) for wear and fraying.
Check that all cables are correctly routed.
2.4.1 GROUND CABLE CONNECTIONS
The central reference ground of the system is located at the generator support.
Check the ground lead interconnection continuity using a multimeter at its

lowest ohms range.
2-8
REV 4 5192971--100
2.4.2 AC POWER SUPPLY IN X-RAY ROOM
To perform this task, turn the Room Electrical Cabinet (Main

Disconnect) ON, but do not turn the system ON. Refer to
Chapter 1, “Safety and Service,” Section 1, “Lock- Out /
Tag- Out (LOTO)” for information on LOTO.
Measure the AC power supply in the fuse holders of F3, F4, and F5 (the right
side of the generator cabinet) and the ground in the ground bar located at the
generator support. (Refer to the illustrations below.)
L1 Input Line
L2 Input Line
L3 Input Line
Ground Bar located at the Generator Support
Check that these values comply with the Power Line requirements:
400 VAC, 480 VAC,

Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz
Power Line
Line voltage automatic compensation: ±10%.
Maximum line regulation for maximum kVA demand: 5%.
After this task, turn the Room Electrical Cabinet (Main Disconnect) OFF.
2-9
REV 4 5192971--100
2.5 HV TRANSFORMER CONDITION

The HV Transformer contains “Shell Diala AX” oil. Check that there is no oil
leakage.
Make sure that:
• The HV grease in the HV Cable terminals is clean and shows no evidence

of arcing.
• The HV cable terminal rings are tight.
2.6 X-RAY TUBE CONDITION

Make sure that:
• All parts are mechanically secure with no oil leaks.
• The HV grease on the HV cable terminals is clean and shows no

evidence of arcing.
• The HV cable terminal rings are tight.
2-10
REV 4 5192971--100
2.7 RADIOGRAPHIC PARAMETERS
2.7.1 X-RAY TUBE WARM--UP
Before beginning X-ray exposures be sure that the tube is

properly warmed-up.
Perform the X-ray tube warm-up as follows:
• Turn the generator ON.
• Close the collimator blades fully.
• Select 70 kV, 100 mAs, 200 mA, and 500 ms exposure.
• Be sure that no one will be exposed.
• Make a total of three (3) exposures, 15 seconds apart.
• Turn the generator OFF and wait three (3) minutes.
2.7.2 PREVIOUS STEPS FOR TESTING

With the generator power OFF connect:
G A non-invasive kVp Meter (Kiethley model 35080A, GE part

number: 2109730 or equivalent), to measure the kVp.
G A mAs Meter (GE part number: 46--194427P435 or equivalent)

plugged to the banana connections on the HV Transformer, to
measure mA or mAs (Digital mA Loops).
2-11
REV 4 5192971--100
Note . Test points on the HT Controller Board can also be used to monitor
the kVp and mA readings but should not be used to calibrate the
unit. These test points must be checked with scope:
- mA test point is TP-5 and the scale factor is:

- from 10 to 80 mA, 1 volt = 10 mA
- from 100 mA, 1 volt = 100 mA
- kVp test point is TP-7 and the scale factor is 1 volt = 33.3 kVp
(0.3 volt = 10 kVp)
Perform the following tests.
2.7.3 TEST FOR kV LOOP
1. Verify that DIP switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board is in the

OFF position (enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).
2. Turn the system ON. Refer to Chapter 1, “Safety and Service,” Section
3, “Applying System Power.”
3. Start an exam and select 80 kVp, 200 mA (or the first mA station for Large
Focus), 100 ms. Make an exposure and note the kVp displayed on the
non--invasive kVp meter at the end of the exposure.
4. Verify that the reading is 80 kVp (±1 kVp).
If the kVp value does not meet this specification, perform the applicable
calibration procedure. (Refer to Section 6.3, “kV Loop,” in Chapter 4,
“Configuration and Calibration,” of this Service Manual.)
5. Remove the non-invasive kVp Meter.
2.7.4 TEST FOR DIGITAL mA LOOP CLOSED
1. At the console start an exam. Select the following parameters, make an

exposure, and note the mAs values on the mAs Meter.
G 80 kV, 100 ms, 50 mA.
G 80 kV, 100 ms, 200 mA.
2. Check that the mAs values read on the mAs Meter are the same as those
displayed on the Console (±4% mAs).
2-12
REV 4 5192971--100
3. Verify that the meter reading is within ±4% of the mAs value indicated
by the console.
If the mAs values do not meet this specification, perform the applicable
calibration procedure. (Refer to Section 6.4, “Digital mA Loop Closed,”
in Chapter 4, “Configuration and Calibration,” of this Service Manual.)
4. Turn the system OFF. Refer to Chapter 1, “Safety and Service,” Section
1, “Lock--Out / Tag--Out (LOTO)” for information on LOTO.
2.7.5 TEST FOR DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN
1. Set the DIP switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board to the ON

position (Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant).
3, “De--Energizing System.”
3. Start the Generator Service Mode (GSM) application as described in

Section 3, “Generator Service Mode,” in Chapter 4, “Configuration and
Calibration,” of this Service Manual.
4. Start the calibration mode by pressing the Manual Calibration button on

the GSM application.
5. Select the Workstation for Service (WS2) using the Up and Down
buttons, then press the OK button to enter the calibration mode.
6. Select 80 kV and the following mA stations. Make an exposure and note

the mAs values read on the mAs Meter.
G Minimum mA for Small Focal Spot (10 mA).
G Maximum mA for Small Focal Spot (factory set at 160 mA).
G Minimum mA for Large Focal Spot (factory set at 200 mA).
G Maximum mA for Large Focal Spot (650 mA).
7. Ensure that mAs values read on the mAs Meter are the same as those
displayed on the U--arm touchscreen withing ±6% mAs.
If the mAs values do not meet this specification, perform the applicable
calibration procedure. (Refer to Section 6.5, “Digital mA Loop Open,” in
Chapter 4, “Configuration and Calibration,” of this Service Manual.)
8. Exit from the Manual Calibration and from the Generator Service Mode
application.
3, “De--Energizing System.”
2-13
REV 4 5192971--100
10. Disconnect the mAs Meter from the banana plug connections.
11. Re-install the link between the banana plug connections on the HV
Transformer.
12. Set DIP switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board to the OFF
position (Digital mA Loop Closed).
2.8 AEC
Perform the complete AEC calibration procedure as indicated in Section 6.7,

“AEC Calibration,” of Chapter 4, “Configuration and Calibration,” in this Service
Manual.
2-14
REV 4 5192971--100
CHAPTER 3
TROUBLESHOOTING
3-1
REV 4 5192971--100
3-2
REV 4 5192971--100
The generator contains many self-diagnostic routines which greatly facilitate

troubleshooting. Self-diagnostic functions require that all microprocessors
function correctly. Each microprocessor contains LEDs that indicate its correct
operation.
As a general rule, the first step in any troubleshooting procedure is to verify

correct power supply voltages and perform a visual inspection of all boards and
cable connections.
On arrival in the X-ray room, the service engineer should carry out the following
operations:
• If the generator cannot be powered up, run the troubleshooting for Error
Code E01.
• If the generator can be powered up:
G Check which Error Code is displayed on the console and run the
troubleshooting routines for the last Error Code displayed.
G If it is not, try to reproduce the failure in the conditions reported by

the operator. It is possible that the Error Code displayed is different
from that indicated by the operator. In all cases, run the
troubleshooting routines for the last Error Code displayed.
Whenever the HV Transformer, X-ray Tube, ATP Console CPU

Board, HT Controller Board, or Filament Control Board is
replaced in the Generator, the respective Configuration and
Calibration procedures must be performed. Refer to
Section 4, “Disassembly / Reassembly,” in this chapter for
replacement procedures (Job Cards) of each part.
3-3
REV 4 5192971--100
The following hand tools and products are required for the Troubleshooting:
• Standard service engineer’s tool kit, including a reversible ratchet with

socket set.
• Silicone Insulating Grease (proofing compound) (included in the X-ray

tube package).
• HV Oil (included in the HV Cables package).
• Alcohol cleaning agent.
The following test equipment is required for some Configuration and Calibration
procedures carried out during Troubleshooting:
• Calculator.
• Anti-static Kit.
• Non-invasive kVp Meter (Kiethley model 35080A, GE part number

2109730 or equivalent).
• Digital mAs Meter (GE part number 46--194427P435 or equivalent).
• Flat Field Phantom (GE part number 2281087 or equivalent) (used for
Digital Detector Calibration and AEC Calibration).
• Dose Probe Holder (GE part number 5198282 or equivalent) (used for
AEC Calibration).
• Oscilloscope (Tektronics 486 or similar).
• ESD Vacuum Cleaner (GE Part Number 46--194427P392 or equivalent)
3-4
REV 4 5192971--100
1.2 GENERAL CAUTIONS

BOARDS ARE OFF (APPROXIMATELY THREE (3) MINUTES
AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF).
THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE

POWER LINE, AND POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY
SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET
(MAIN DISCONNECT) IS OFF. WHEN THE GENERATOR IS
POWERED, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE
TRANSFORMER 6T2 (GENERATOR CABINET) IS ON.

RELAY (3K3) AND LV-DRAC MODULE) ARE PERMANENTLY
TAG-OUT).

DOCUMENT.
ALWAYS HAVE THE “IPM DRIVER BOARD” CONNECTED IN

THE GENERATOR PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER. IF THE “IPM
DRIVER BOARD” IS NOT CONNECTED, PERMANENT
DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO THE IGBTS.
3-5
REV 4 5192971--100
3-6
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 2 GENERAL PROCEDURES
2.1 LOW DC VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY TEST
The generator operates from a low DC voltage power supply located in the front
panel (MOD. 3) of the generator cabinet. (Refer to Illustration 2-1.)
Turn the generator ON and with a Digital Multimeter measure between:
1. P2-3 (+) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage at
this point is +5 (±0.2 VDC). If required, adjust the voltage with the
+5 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power Supply Board.
2. P2-2 (+) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage at
this point is +12 (±0.1) VDC. If required, adjust the voltage with the
+12 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power Supply Board.
3. P2-1 (--) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage at
this point is --12 (±0.1 VDC). If required, adjust the voltage with the
--12 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power Supply Board.
Illustration 2-1
Power Supply and HT Controller Board in the Front Panel
HT CONTROLLER BOARD
+12V adjust --12V adjust +5V adjust
POWER SUPPLY
3-7
REV 4 5192971--100
The ATP Console CPU Board is located in the back panel (MOD. 4) of the
generator cabinet. (Refer to Illustration 2-2).
The ATP Console CPU Board operates from a 12 VDC Unregulated Supply
located in the generator cabinet that supplies to a 5 VDC switching regulator
located in the ATP Console CPU Board.
Turn the generator ON and with a Digital Multimeter measure between:
1. TP9 (+12 V Unregulated) and TP11 (GND Unregulated) on the ATP

Console CPU Board. Check that the voltage at this point is between
+12 VDC and +15 VDC. If not, check the 12 VDC Unregulated Supply of
the generator, that is, between terminals 11 and 12 of the Input
Transformer 6T2 there is 11 VAC, Fuse 3F7 (3A, 250 V), Contactor 3K3,
Rectifier 3BR4, and Capacitor 3C7. (Refer to schematic 54302010 in
Chapter 6, “Schematics.”)
2. TP1 GND and TP3 +5 V on the ATP Console CPU Board. Check that the
voltage at this point is +5 (±0.2 VDC). If not, replace the ATP Console
CPU Board. (Refer to Section 4 -- Job Card DR--4, “Replacement of the
ATP Console CPU Board.”)
Illustration 2-2
ATP Console CPU Board in the Back Panel
ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD
TP1, TP3, TP9, TP11
3-8
REV 4 5192971--100
2.2 MICROPROCESSORS AND GENERAL OPERATION
The following LEDs indicate the proper operation of each Microprocessor in the
generator:
• The LED DS1 located on the HT Controller Board blinks fast during
power up, then slows to a steady blink of about two (2) per second,
indicating that the Microprocessor U5 is operating normally.
• The LED DS2 located on the ATP Console CPU Board normally blinks
at the same rate as LED DS1 on the HT Controller Board, indicating that
communication between both Boards is correct.
Also observe the following LEDs to facilitate general troubleshooting:
• When LED DS1 located on the Interface Control Board is ON (lit), it

indicates that the generator is ON.
• The LED DS1 located on the ATP Console CPU Board is normally ON
(lit), indicating that the Watch-Dog Timer of the Console is operating and
insuring the correct timing of data communications with the HT Controller
Board.
3-9
REV 4 5192971--100
3-10
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 3 ERROR CODES
ERROR CODE LIST

ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION
“ -- -- -- -- -- -- ” System failure.
Failure in power up routine.

E01
No communication link between HT Controller Board and ATP Console CPU Board.
Failure in power up routine. RAD Generator configured as R&F Generator.

E02
No communication link between ATP Console CPU Board and Fluoro CPU Board.
E03 Failure in power up routine. Workstations are not configured.
E04 “Prep” signal received without Console order.
E06 “Prep” and/or “Exposure” orders activated during power-up routine.
E08 Wrong data for X-ray Tube-1.
E09 Generator overload. Arcing or IGBT fault.
EEPROM corrupted or not initialized on ATP Console CPU Board or on HT Controller Board.
E10
Wrong data calibration.
E11 No voltage in the Main Storage Capacitors of the Generator (Inverter Module).
E12 No mA during exposure or mA out of tolerance. Wrong filament current.
No kVp during exposure, kVp out of tolerance (±33%) or insufficient time parameters during AEC operation.
E13
For Capacitor Assisted Generators, this can also be due to an incorrect Generator configuration.
E14 Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command.
E15 Filament Driver Circuit Open, No current on Filament. Wrong selection of Focal Spot detected during “Prep”.
E16 Invalid value of : kVp, mA or kW.
E17 Communication error among ATP Console, CPU Board and HT Controller Board.
E18 Rotor error or Rotor running without order (only with Low Speed Starter).
E19 mA detected without “Exp” command.
E20 kVp detected without “Exp” command.
E21 Wrong Tube-1 selection.
E23 Calibration data not stored
E24 Bucky Movement Signal has not been detected.
E27 Failure in EPROM U24 of the ATP Console CPU Board. Bad checksum.
E33 No communication link between the Generator and the Serial Console or PC Unit.
E34 Technique error.
3-11
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE LIST

Door Open.
E35 For Generators with HV Transformer equipped with a Security Pressure Switch, the HV Transformer
surpasses the maximum internal pressure capacity.
E36 Safety Thermostat Open. Overheating.
E37 Tube Overload.
E41 Dosimeter failure. Communication failure between Tube-1 Dosimeter and Generator.
E42 Dosimeter failure. Autotest error on Tube-1 Dosimeter.
E43 Dosimeter failure. Tube-1 DAP Ion Chamber status check error.
E50 Interrupted Exposure.
E51 LV-DRAC: Checksum failure or Microcontroller U17 corrupted in Control DRAC Board.
E52 LV-DRAC: Microcontroller RAM failure.
E53 LV--DRAC: Insufficient DC BUS voltage at low level voltage (220 VAC).
E54 LV--DRAC: Insufficient DC BUS voltage at high level voltage (400 / 480 VAC).
E55 LV--DRAC: Excessive DC BUS voltage at 480 VAC.
E58 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
E59 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
E60 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
E61 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
E62 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM
E63 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM
E64 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM
E65 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM
E66 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the main winding running at 3300 RPM
E67 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM
E68 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM
E69 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the main winding running at 3300 RPM
E70 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the main winding running at 10000 RPM
E71 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM
E72 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM
E73 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the main winding running at 10000 RPM
E74 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the main winding braking at 3300 RPM
E75 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM
3-12
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE LIST

E76 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM
E77 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the main winding braking at 3300 RPM
E78 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the main winding braking at 10000 RPM
E79 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM
E80 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM
E81 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the main winding braking at 10000 RPM
E83 LV--DRAC: Excessive current in DC Brake.
E87 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
E88 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in common wire running at 3300 RPM.
E89 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.
E90 LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in common wire running at 10000 RPM.
E91 LV--DRAC: Incorrect signal measure in IPRINC (CH2).
E92 LV--DRAC: Incorrect signal measure in IAUX (CH3).
E93 LV--DRAC: Incorrect signal measure in ICOM (CH4).
E98 DIP Switch 3024SW2-3 on ATP Console Board set for Configuration and Calibration Mode Active.
3-13
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : “-- -- -- -- -- --” -- SYSTEM FAILURE / FATAL ERROR
DESCRIPTION : System failure.

ERROR TYPE : Fatal error. Generator must be switched off.
APPLICABLE TO : All Generators
APPEARS WHEN : This indication may appear at any time together with another Error Code on the Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : This Error Code needs to turn the Generator OFF/ON to be fixed.
1. Turn the Generator OFF, wait a few seconds, and turn it ON.
ERROR CODE : E01 -- FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE
DESCRIPTION : Failure in power up routine.

No communication link between the HT Controller Board and the ATP Console CPU Board.
ERROR TYPE : Fatal error. Generator can not continue with power up.
APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase. If it appears during normal functioning of equipment, it means
that a problem has caused a power off in the Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : This Error Code needs to turn the generator OFF/ON to be fixed.
It has not been possible to establish a correct communication link between the ATP Console CPU
Board and the HT Controller Board during power ON and the Generator is not able to make
Exposures.
If LED 1 of the HT Controller remains lit, it means that HT Controller Board has not been started.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Generator has been suddenly switched OFF by the operator or by a loss of the main power.
The Microprocessor U5 on the HT Controller Board has not started-up.
The communication link between the ATP Console Board and the HT Controller Board is not reliable.
1. Check VDC supplies. (Refer to Section 2, “General Procedures.”)

2. Check continuity between terminals 2, 3, 5, and 6 on J3 of ATP Console CPU Board and P1-4,
P1-11, P1-15, and P1-10 of the HT Controller Board. Check with special care connector 6J3
of the Generator.
3. Switch the Generator OFF, wait a few seconds, and switch ON again to reset the Error Code.
4. If not fixed after the previous steps, check LED DS1 on HT Controller Board when powering
the equipment. (Refer to Section 2.2.) If it has not turned off replace the HT Controller Board.
(Refer to Job Card DR--6.)
5. If LED DS1 is off, check with an oscilloscope the following signals: HT-C CLK, HT-C DAT,
C-HT CLK, and C-HT DAT in order to find a possible defective component at any of both Boards
(HT Controller Board and ATP Console). Replace the board where the defective component
is found. (Refer to Job Cards DR--6 and DR--4.)
3-14
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E03
DESCRIPTION : Failure in power up routine. All workstation are unconfigured.

APPLICABLE TO : All Generators.
APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase. If it appears during normal functioning of equipment, it means
that a problem has caused a power off in the Console.
It has not been possible to establish a correct communication link between ATP Console and HT
Controller Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
All workstations have been configured as tube=0.
The EEPROM (U18) on the ATP Console Board is defective.
The ATP Console Board is not able to communicate with U18.
1. Configure the workstations as referred in the Service Manual.

2. Change U18 and configure the workstations as referred in the Service Manual.
3. If not fixed after the previous steps, replace the ATP Console Board and configure the
workstations. (Refer to Job Card DR--4.)
3-15
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E04
DESCRIPTION : Prep signal received without Console order.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. Generator re-start automatically once error is solved.
APPEARS WHEN : At any moment once initialization phase is over.
It has not been possible to establish a correct communication link between the ATP Console and
the HT Controller Boards.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Generator receives the Prep signal without a Console command.
1. Check the continuity between P1-3 on the HT Controller Board and J3-4 on the ATP Console
Board. Check with special care connector 6J3 of the Generator.
2. If all is correct, check the signal from P1-3 to U5 on the HT Controller Board.
3. If the signal is OK, replace the HT Controller Board. (Refer to DR--6.)
3-16
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E06
DESCRIPTION : Prep and/or Exposure orders activated during power-up routine.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. Generator re-starts automatically once error is solved.
APPEARS WHEN : At any moment once initialization phase is over.
the HT Controller Boards.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Generator has detected Prep or Exposure signals during initialization.
1. In Generators equipped with PREP and EXPOSURE keys on the Console, check that no object
is activating the function. Also check for possible damage to the keys.
2. Check damages on the flat cable with connector J9.
3. In Generators with an external Handswitch check the contacts, cable, and connectors.
4. If the error remains, check the continuity between TS1-37 and J2-17 on the ATP Console Board
and TS1-36 and J2-4 also on the ATP Console Board.
5. If not solved yet, replace the ATP Console Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--4.)
ERROR CODE : E08
DESCRIPTION : Wrong data for X-ray Tube-1.

APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase.
the HT Controller Boards during power ON.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong configuration of X-ray Tube-1.
Corrupted calibration data.
Data on Extended Memory Location E02 are larger than the maximum allowed.
1. Check data in Extended Memory Location E02.

2. If it is OK, replace U3 on the HT Controller Board.
3-17
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E09 -- GENERATOR OVERLOAD
DESCRIPTION : Generator overload. Arcing or IGBT fault.

ERROR TYPE : Informative.
APPEARS WHEN : During the exposure and In Stand-by,
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : This error may appear at the Console as “E09” Error Code or as a “Generator Overload”
indication.
During exposure an over current on the IGBTs of the HV Inverter Module has been detected. This
may be produced by an arc or malfunction on the HV Circuitry.
In stand-by, the Console is continuously displaying “E09” or “Generator Overload” due to a defective
or overheated IGBT Module.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Symptom-1:
G Defective X-ray Tube.
G Defective HV Transformer or HV Cable.
G Defective Inverter Module.
G Defective HT Controller Board.
Symptom-2:
G Extremely high Duty Cycle on Rad and Fluoro operation.
A. PRELIMINARY
1. Select minimum kVp , minimum mA, and 80 ms (for example 40 kVp, 10mA, and 80 ms). Make
preparation and check that anode rotates in the X-ray tube. If the anode is not rotating correctly,
check the starter and the Stator connections.
2. In case the anode is rotating correctly, make an exposure:
G If “09” or “Generator Overload” appears, follow the procedure in paragraph B, “Inverter
Module Test.”
G If not, follow step 3.
3. Increment kVp in 10 kVp steps, select the same mA and time. Make an exposure:
G If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears, or the exposure is cut before 80 ms, then follow
Procedure C, “HV Transformer Test.”
G If not, keep on increasing the kVp in 10 kVp steps (60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, and 125
kVp for 125 kVp HV Transformers; and 130, 140, 150 kVp for 150 kVp HV Transformers)
making Exposures at each kVp selected.
-- If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears or the exposure is cut before 80 ms at any
kVp selected, follow Procedure C, “HV Transformer Test.”
-- If “E09” or “Generator Overload” has not appeared at the maximum kVp or the
exposure was not cut before 80 ms, it means that the HV Transformer and the HV
Cables are OK. Then follow Procedure F, “RANDOM “E09” OR “GENERATOR
OVERLOAD”.” In this case high mA causes “E09” or “Generator Overload”.
3-18
REV 4 5192971--100
B. INVERTER MODULE TEST
Illustration 1 shows a Flowchart for Procedure “B.”
Illustration 4
Flowchart for B: Inverter Module Test
TURN THE GENERATOR OFF

WAIT UNTIL THE INVERTER IS DISCHARGED
MAKE A JUMPER DC--BUS+ AND DC--BUS--
MEASURE AND CHECK
NO
V¶ 0,3V REPLACE IGBT
YES
REMOVE JUMPER DC--BUS

REMOVE SHIELDED CABLES THAT CONNECT
INVERTER TO THE HV TRANSFORMER
SET 3000SW2-2=ON
TURN ON GENERATOR & MAKE EXPOSURE
E09 OR NO
RE--CONNECT H V TRANSFORMER AND INVERTER
EXPOSITION CUT?
PERFORM PROCEDURE C, “HV TRANSFORMER TEST”
YES
REPLACE INVERTER
3-19
REV 4 5192971--100
1. Turn the Generator and Electrical Room Cabinet (Main Disconnect) OFF.
2. Remove the cover from the Generator Cabinet.
3. Wait for the DC Bus of the Inverter to be fully discharged. When it is fully discharged the LEDs
on the Charge-Discharge Monitor Board will be completely turned off.
MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN STORAGE CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH

VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY RESIDUAL CHARGE. WAIT
UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING DIODES ON THE CHARGE- DISCHARGE
MONITOR BOARDS ARE OFF, APPROXIMATELY THREE (3) MINUTES
AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.
4. When LEDs are off make a jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC--BUS-- (use a wire AWG 22 (0.5
mm2) or higher). Make sure that there is less than 10 VDC across the BUS. (Refer to
Illustration 5 to see where to make the jumper.)
5. Measure with a Multimeter in Diode (or ohms) between C2E1 (positive polarity) and E2 or C1
(negative polarity) in both IGBTs (refer to Illustration 5 for more details). Repeat the measure
with different polarity between C2E1 (negative polarity) and E2 or C1 (positive polarity).
Voltage should be around 0.3 V (or the resistance must be a high impedance) for the IGBT to
be OK. Normally when an IGBT is broken the voltage is = 0 volts (or the resistance is zero [0]
Ohms) or very close.
Illustration 5
Jumper and Measurement Points
Jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC-BUS-- E2

C2E1
3--PHASE LINE POWERED GENERATOR
6. Repeat the measurements done in step 5 for the other IGBT.
DON’T FORGET TO REMOVE THE JUMPER ACROSS THE DC BUS AFTER

ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE, OTHERWISE THE INVERTER WILL
SUFFER SERIOUS DAMAGE.
3-20
REV 4 5192971--100
7. If any of the IGBTs are short-circuited, replace the IGBT. (Refer to Job Card DR--16.)
8. If both IGBTs are OK, remove both shielded cables that connect the Inverter to the HV
Transformer: P1, P3, and SHLD (P2). Isolate the three (3) wires completely from each other
and from the metal sheet or ground.
MAKE SURE THE WIRES ARE PERFECTLY ISOLATED AND THAT NO

SHORT-CIRCUIT IS MADE, OTHERWISE SERIOUS DAMAGES COULD
RESULT.
9. Set DIP switch 3000SW2--2 in the ON position at the HT Controller Board.

10. Turn the Room Electrical Cabinet (Mains Disconnect) and Generator ON.
11. Make an exposure:
G If “E09” or “Generator Overload” does not appear and the exposure has not been cut
before 80 ms, re--connect both shielded cables to the HV Transformer (P1, P2, and P3).
Follow Procedure C, “HV Transformer Test.”
G If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears or the exposure has been cut before 80 ms,
change the whole Inverter Module. (Refer to Job Card DR--10.)
Note . At the end of an Exposure and right after releasing the Handswitch, error “E13” is
shown on the Console. This is normal. Reset and continue.
12. Turn the Electrical Room Cabinet (Main Disconnect) and generator OFF. Wait three (3) minutes
for the Main Storage Capacitors to discharge.
13. Set DIP switch 3000SW2-2 in the OFF position at the HT Controller Board. Re-connect both
shielded cables that connect the Inverter to the HV Transformer P1, P3, and SHLD (P2).
C. HV TRANSFORMER TEST
1. Make these connections with the Oscilloscope:

G CH.1 on + mA (TP14) on the HT Controller Board.
G CH.2 on - mA (TP13) on the HT Controller Board.
G Base Time in 10 ms per division and 1 V per division
2. Turn the mains and Generator ON. Set DIP switch 3000SW2-4 to the ON position at the HV
Controller Board.
3. Select 40 kVp, 10mA, and 80 ms. Make an exposure and check that both waveforms are almost
symmetric (a difference of 12% is normal).
G If it is OK, follow the procedure in step 4.
G If it is not OK, check:
-- that in the mA Test Point of the HV Transformer the jumper is correctly placed and
secure.
-- that connector J1 is correctly placed and secure in the HV Transformer.
-- continuity between J1-D and P4-7, J1-E and P4-6, J1-B and P4-2, and J1-C and
P4-1. Check that they are correctly connected and secure.
-- if after these actions the waveform is not OK, replace the HV Transformer. (Refer to
Job Card DR--20.)
4. Turn the Generator and Electrical Room Cabinet (Main Disconnect) OFF. Wait three (3)
minutes for the Main Storage Capacitors to discharge.
3-21
REV 4 5192971--100
5. Remove the HV Cables from the HV Transformer (anode and cathode) and fill the HV
Receptacles with oil.
6. On the HT Controller Board, make a jumper FIL (TP8) and + 5 V (TP2).
7. Turn the Electrical Room Cabinet (Main Disconnect) and Generator ON.
G CH.1 on + kV (TP11) on the HT Controller Board.
G CH.2 on --kV (TP12) on the HT Controller Board.
G Base time in 10 msec. per division and 2 V per division.
9. Select 40 kVp, 10 mA, and 80 ms. Make an Exposure and check that both waveforms are
symmetric. A difference of 12% is normal.
Note . If error code “E15” appears after pressing PREP, reset the Error
and select the lowest mA for Large Focus. Repeat the exposure.
G If it is OK, follow procedure in step 10.

G If it is not OK, follow Procedure D, “Asymmetry on the kVp Loop.”
10. Make exposures from 40 kVp to 150 kVp with the same Exposure Time and check that all kVp
waveforms are symmetric and the values are similar according the table below.
Select TP11 & TP12 on the HT Controller
50 kVp 2.1 V
70 kVp 2.9 V
90 kVp 3.7 V
110 kVp 4.5 V
130 kVp 5.3 V
150 kVp 6.1 V
11. If the waveforms are not symmetric (within 12% at any point), follow Procedure D, “Asymmetry
on the kVp Loop.”
12. If everything is OK, it means that HV Transformer is OK and the problem could be in the X--ray
Tube or in the HV Cables. In order to determine exactly what part must be replaced (the X--ray
Tube or the HV Cables) it is necessary to replace one of both components and perform the
procedure again. In most of the cases the part to be replaced usually is the X--ray Tube. To know
when the Tube begins to arc follow Procedure E, “X--ray Tube Test.”
13. Turn the Generator and Electrical Room Cabinet (Main Disconnect) OFF and wait three (3)
minutes for the Main Storage Capacitors to discharge. Set DIP switch 3000SW2--4 in the OFF
position at the HV Controller Board and remove the jumper between FIL (TP8) and + 5 V (TP2).
3-22
REV 4 5192971--100
D. ASYMMETRY ON THE kVp LOOP
This procedure determines what part should be replaced due to asymmetry on the kVp Loop:
the High Voltage Transformer or the HT Controller Board.
1. Turn the generator and Electrical Room Cabinet (Main Disconnect) OFF and wait three (3)
2. Set DIP Switch 3000SW2--2 to the “ON” position at the HV Controller Board.
3. Turn the Room Electrical Cabinet (Main Disconnect) and generator ON.
G CH.1 on +kV (TP11) on the HT Controller Board.
G CH.2 on kVp (TP16) on the HT Controller Board.
5. Apply +12VDC (P2--2) to +kV (P4--2) for 500 ms. This operation may cause Error “20” if the
voltage is applied for more than 500 ms; in this case turn the generator OFF and ON to reset
the error.
6. Check the waveform’s result:
G If it is OK, follow the procedure in step 7.

G If it is not OK, replace the HT Controller Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--6.) It is
recommended to perform Procedure C, “HV Transformer Test,” again.
G CH.1 on --kV (TP12) on HT the Controller Board.
G CH.2 on kVp (TP16) on HT the Controller Board.
8. Apply --12VDC (P2--1) to --kV (P4--1) for 500 ms. This operation may cause Error “20” if the
voltage is applied for more than 500 ms. In this case turn the generator OFF and ON to reset
the error.
3-23
REV 4 5192971--100
9. Check the waveform’s result:
G If it is OK, replace the HV Transformer. (Refer to Job Card DR--20.)

G If it is not OK, replace the HT Controller Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--6.) It is
recommended to perform Procedure C, “HV Transformer Test,” again.
10. Turn the Generator and Electrical Room Cabinet (Main Disconnect) OFF and wait three (3)
11. Set DIP Switch 3000SW2--2 in the OFF position at the HV Controller Board.
E. X-RAY TUBE TEST
After the performance of the above referred test everything is found OK, the Service (Field) Engineer
may want to know the actual status of the tube. Perform the following procedure in order to
determine the point in which the X-ray Tube begins to arc.
It is strongly recommended to replace the tube as soon as

possible to prevent potential damage to the Generator.
1. Select 40kVp, 10mA, and 100 ms.

2. Make an exposure.
3. Increment kVp in 10 kVp steps, select same mA and time. Make an exposure.
G If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears follow Procedure C, “HV Transformer Test,” if
it has not been performed before. If Procedure C has been already performed follow the
procedure in step 4.
G If “E09” or “Generator Overload” does not appear, keep on incrementing the kVp in steps
of 10 kVp (up to the maximum kVp), making exposures at each kVp selected.
-- If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears at any kVp selected it means that the tube
has dielectric problems above the selected kVp.
-- If “E09” or “Generator Overload“ does not appear (up to maximum kVp), it means that
arcing may be due to mA or kW. Follow the procedure in step 4.
4. Select 40 kVp and 10 mA. Increment the mA one station and make an Exposure. Keep on
incrementing the mA station (making exposures) until “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears.
This will give an idea of the maximum mA allowed by the tube without arcing. If “E09” or
“Generator Overload” does not appear follow step 5.
3-24
REV 4 5192971--100
5. If the tube still does not arc, the problem is related to kW = KV*mA. Make selections on the
Console at 100 ms incrementing kV and mA. A point will be reached in which “E09” or
“Generator Overload” will appear. This will give an idea on the approximate value of kVp and
mA that can be handled by the X--ray Tube. Also, this value may change when the tube heats
up.
F. RANDOM “E09” OR “GENERATOR OVERLOAD”
If everything is OK and random “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears, check:

1. That the signal IGBT FAULT on Pin 3 of P5 on the HT Controller Board is not low (logic 0) in
stand--by and during the exposure. If there is noise, check for a loose connection between Pin
3 of P5 on HT Controller Board and Pin 4 of J2 in both IPM Driver Boards
2. If IGBT FAULT is active during an exposure, try to isolate when it occurs. It may be due to noise
coming from any device outside the Generator. Or it may occur when selecting a high power
Exposure and the voltage of the main line goes down more than 10%.
3-25
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E10
DESCRIPTION : EEPROM corrupted or not initialized on the ATP Console CPU Board or on the HT Controller
Board. Wrong data calibration.
ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error during power up (when EEPROM U3 on the HT Controller Board is corrupted or not
initialized).
Informative error during power up (when EEPROM U18 on ATP Console Board is corrupted or
not initialized or when EPROM U24 on ATP Console Board has been changed). In both cases,
“E10” appears together with “E34” Error Code or “Technique Error” indication.
APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Generator does not continue with start up.
POSIBLE CAUSES
EEPROM U3 on the HT Controller Board corrupted or not initialized.
EEPROM U18 on the ATP Console Board corrupted or not initialized.
EPROM U24 on the ATP Console Board has been changed.
1. If EPROM U24 in the ATP Console Board has been replaced, reset the Error Code to
acknowledge that the NVRAM has been initialized.
2. If the error does not reset, turn the Generator OFF and set DIP switch A3024SW2-3 to the ON
position to allow Service Mode. Turn the Generator ON and enter the workstation’s
configuration and check as referred in the Service Manual. Do not forget to exit from the
Configuration mode to store the workstation configuration.
3. If the problem is still present, and “E10” error appears together with “E34” Error Code or
“Technique Error” indication, replace the ATP Console Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--4.)
4. If the problem is still present and only “E10” error appears on the Console, replace the HT
Controller Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--6.)
3-26
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E11
DESCRIPTION : No voltage in the Main Storage Capacitors of the Generator (Inverter Module).
ERROR TYPE : Informative. Prep is not allowed.
APPEARS WHEN : Only during initialization phase or when pressing PREP.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : It was not possible to perform Prep or Exp.
POSIBLE CAUSES
No voltage in the Main Storage Capacitors (5C1, 5C2, 5C3, 5C4) of the Generator (Inverter Module).
Defective Charge/Discharge Monitor Board.
Precharge K6 contactor located inside the Generator Cabinet is not energized.
Main line fuses F3 and/or F4 are blown.
“--CHRG” signal of Pin 7 on connector P1 on HT Controller Board is not present.
Exposition parameters selected above IGBT maximum current (only software versions before
V2.R06)
Cables disconnected accidentally or damaged connectors.
A. IF LED DS1 IN CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR LIGHTS

Check the voltage at the Main Storage Capacitors (5C1, 5C2, 5C3, 5C4) (Inverter Module)
measuring the voltage between DC BUS (+) and DC BUS (--) as indicated in the illustration below.
DC BUS (+) DC BUS (--)
Input Power Line Voltage at the Main Storage Capacitors
400 VAC 600 VDC (±10%)
480 VAC 720 VDC (±10%)
3-27
REV 4 5192971--100
• If the voltage in the Capacitors is OK, check that P1--7 on the HT Controller Board is at logic
level “0.” (1.5 V for Generators with two (2) Charge/Discharge Monitor Boards).
G If it is OK (logic level “0”), replace the HT Controller Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--6.)
G If it is not OK (logic level is not “0”), check the links between P1--7 on the HT Controller
Board and P1--2 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #1 and between P1--1 in
Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #1 and P1--2 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #2.
-- If it is OK, replace the defective Charge/Discharge Monitor Board. (Refer to Job Card
DR--14.)
-- If it is not OK, repair the connection.
• If the voltage in the Capacitors is not OK, check VAC on AC1, AC2, and AC3 at the Input
Rectifier Board.
G If VAC is not OK, verify the input connections and Input Line Fuses 6F3, 6F4, and 6F5.
Replace them if necessary.
G If VAC is OK, disconnect BUS+ and BUS-- at the Input Rectifier Board and check VDC.
-- If VDC is not OK, replace the defective component (CR1, CR2, CR3) at the Input
Rectifier Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--12.)
-- If VDC is OK, check each Main Storage Capacitor (5C1, 5C2, 5C3, 5C4) at the
Inverter Module and replace the defective Capacitors. (Refer to Job Card DR--13.)
B. IF LED DS1 DOES NOT LIGHT IN THE CHARGE / DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS
• Check input VAC on 6LF1,
G If VAC is OK, replace a defective component at the Input Rectifier Board (CR2, CR3, or
CR1). (Refer to Job Card DR--12.)
G If VAC on 6LF1 is not OK, check that contactor 6K5 is ON.
-- If 6K5 is ON, check VAC on T1, T2, and T3 (in 6K5).
-- If voltage is OK, replace defective Resistor 6R1.
-- If voltage is not OK, replace the defective Input Line Fuse (F3, F4, or F5).
• If Contactor 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK.
G If it is not OK, check and/or replace fuse 3F6 and transformer 6T2.
G If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC,
-- if --LINE CONT is OK, replace Contactor 6K5.
-- If --LINE CONT is not OK, check continuity in J3-10 at the ATP Console CPU Board.
-- If --LINE CONT is OK at the ATP Console Board, repair the connection between
J3-10and “A” in Contactor in 6K5.
-- If --LINE CONT is not OK at the ATP Console Board, replace the ATP Console
CPU Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--4.)
3-28
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E12
DESCRIPTION : No mA during exposure or mA out of tolerance. Wrong filament current.

APPEARS WHEN : After exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Error 12 appears after the Exposure to alert the operator that the mA at the start of the exposure has
not been correct. During the first 10 ms the Generator applies constant filament current to the tube.
This current is proportional to the current already calibrated for that mA station at the kVp selected
for that Exposure (filament numbers). Near the end of these 10 ms, the HT Controller Board reads
the mA and if they are found to be 30% under or over what has been selected, it sends error 12 to the
Console.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Calibration data for kVp and mA is not correct causing error E12.
The mA jumper on the HV Transformer is open, or it is not making good contact. The mA read at
the beginning of the exposure is 50% of the correct value (because one branch is open).
There is a problem on the reading of the mA.
No correct heating prior to the Exposure. The filament has not reached its correct temperature and
the mA at the start of the exposure is low. It usually occurs when the Prep and Exp buttons are
pressed down at the same time.
Making an exposure immediately after getting out of calibration mode in extended memory.
+5 VDC , +12 VDC, or --12 VDC Power Supplies of the HT Control Board (measured at TP2, TP3,
and TP4 of this Board) have excesive ripple or VDC measured is not correct.
1. Connect a scope to the following Test Points on the HT Control Board and check that the
voltage is correct. If not, adjust it with the respective Potentiometer in the Power Supply Board
(refer to Section 2.1, “Low DC Voltage Power Supply Test”):
TP2 (+5 VDC) on the HT Control Board is adjusted with R12 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.
TP3 (+12 VDC) on the HT Control Board is adjusted with R26 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.
TP4 (--12 VDC) on the HT Control Board is adjusted with R25 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.
2. Check calibration data for the mA Open Loop (filament numbers) as stated in the Service
Manual for all combinations of kVp and mA when this error appears.
With a scope connected to the Test Point TP5 (mA) on the HT Control Board check that the
mA read is within the ratio of 1V=100 mA (± 5%) for V2 and V3 software versions, for V4 and
up the ratio is 1V=10mA from minimum mA to 80 mA and 1V=100mA from 100 mA to the
maximum rating. If it is not, the cause could be that the mA second test is not measuring
correctly, or a wrong measurement performed in the Generator. (Refer to step 3.)
3. Check that the jumper in the mA Test Point of the HV Transformer is correctly placed and
secure.
3-29
REV 4 5192971--100
4. With an Oscilloscope check that during the entire Exposure signals on Test Points TP13 (--mA)
and TP14 (+mA) on the HT Controller Board connectors are symmetrical (12%).
G If one (1) is found missing or not symmetrical, measure on Pin 6 and 7 of J4 on the HT
Controller Board.
-- If they are symmetrical on both Points, the problem could be on the HT Controller
Board.
-- If they are not correct, check that the connections made on the HV Transformer in
J1--E, D, K terminals are correctly connected and secure. Also check that the GND
wire is connected to the GND stud. If connections are correct the problem is in the
HV Transformer.
5. Connect an Oscilloscope to Test Point TP5 (mA) on the HT Controller Board.
Note . For the following test, the self--running mode has not been active. DIP switch
3243SW4--6 on the Control DRAC Board must be in the “OFF” position (High
Speed Generators).
Check that:
G when the exposure is made by pressing first the PREP control and then the EXP control,
the mA reading at the beginning of exposure is correct.
G and when an exposure is made by pressing at the same time the PREP and EXP controls,
the mA reading at the beginning of exposure is low.
In this case, reprogram the “RAD Filament Setting Time” one (1) step over the previously
configured time (i.e., if the Filament Setting Time programmed was 1.8 seconds, reprogram it
for 2.7 seconds). (Refer to Section 5.2.2, “Programming of RAD Filament Setting Time” of
Chapter 4, “Configuration and Calibration.”)
In order to verify that the problem has disappeared:
G select the highest mA station for Small Focus and the lowest kVp allowed for this mA
station. Make an Exposure by pressing at the same time the PREP and EXP controls;
check that the mA reading at the beginning of the Exposure is correct.
G select the highest mA station for Large Focus and the lowest kVp allowed for this mA
station. Make an Exposure by pressing at the same time the PREP and EXP controls;
check that the mA reading at the beginning of the Exposure is correct.
If it is not correct, reprogram the “RAD Filament Setting Time” one (1) step over the previously
configured time and test again.
3-30
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E13
DESCRIPTION : No kVp during exposure, kVp out of tolerance (±33%) or insufficient time parameters during
AEC operation.
ERROR TYPE : Informative. May abort exposition.
APPEARS WHEN : During and after exposures.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : No kVp during exposure.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Note . This error assumes that the fault is not on the IGBT and is not due to arcing in the
X-ray Tube.
Faulty HT Controller Connection between the ATP Console CPU Board and
HT Controller Board (--EXP signal)
Connection between HT Controller Connection on the IPM Driver Boards
and IPM Driver Boards
Faulty IPM Driver Board Open Serial Capacitor (5C9)
5V OUT during exposure Faulty HV Transformer
115 VAC Faulty IGBT
Note . Ensure that Dipswitches SW3 on the ATP Console CPU Board (A3024-xx) are all
set to the OFF position.
1. With an Oscilloscope, measure between TP-12 & TP-11 on the HT Controller. These signals should be
incomplete and/or irregular.
2. Assure that the power supply to the HT Controller Board and the two IPM Drivers are correct.
HT Controller: Schematic A3000-xx -- Check for 5V, --12VAC and +12VAC.
IPM Driver: Schematic A3063-xx -- Check for 115 VAC ±10 % (supplied from the Interface Control
Board) and 5V. 5V should be constant (not presenting any variation), including during the entire
Exposure.
3. Measure the pulses at P3-1 (KV DR1) and P3-2 (KV DR2) on the HT Controller. If these pulses are not
present, change the HT Controller. If they are present, proceed to the next step.
The following procedures involve the IPM Driver Boards which are
connected to the IGBTs. This area has dangerous HIGH VOLTAGE and must
be treated with great care.
3-31
REV 4 5192971--100
4. Ensure that KV DR1 and KV DR2 reach the IPM Drivers at J1-1 & J1-2. If these signals are not present
at the connection points, revise the connection or cables. If these signals are present, proceed to the next
step.
5. Turn OFF the equipment disconnect J2 from one of the IPM Drivers and then measure the resistance
between J2-1 & J2-2. This reading should be approximately 175 Ω. Replace the IPM Driver board if
necessary. Repeat this step for the other IPM Driver board. If both boards present a correct resistance,
proceed to the next step.
6. Dismount an IPM Driver leaving J1 & J2 connected. Turn ON the equipment and ensure the power supply
by measuring at J3/J5-1 (+15 V OUTPUT 1) & J3/J5-4 (GND 1). Turn OFF the equipment and dismount
the second IPM Driver. Turn ON the equipment and repeat the test at J4/J6-1 (+15 V OUTPUT 2) &
J4/J6-4 (GND 2). Repair or replace if necessary. If +15 V OUTPUT is present, return the IPM Drivers to
their original position and proceed to the next step.
7. If a digitalmenter to test Capacitors is available, check Capacitor 5C9. If the Capacitor functions correctly,
If this digitalmeter is unavailable or the Capacitor does not charge, short-circuit the terminals of the
Capacitor and make an exposure with mA and kV parameters as low as possible (ex: 10 kV & 40 ms).
If Error 13 does not appear during the exposure, replace Capacitor 5C9. If the Error persists, proceed
to the next step.
8. Refer to Schematic 54302010 for the connections between the HV Transformer and the IGBTs. Measure
the resistance (continuity) of the following cables from the IGBTs to the HV Transformer, replacing or
repairing where necessary:
Capacitor 5C9 (Transformer side terminal) and P1 of the HV Transformer

C2E1 and P2
9. Disconnect P1 & P2 on the HV Transformer. Check that the resistance at P1 & P2 is low (approximately
0.2 Ω). If the resistance is too high, replace the HV Transformer (refer to Job Card DR--20.). If the
resistance is correct, proceed to the next step.
10. Turn OFF the equipment and wait a few moments for the equipment to fully discharge. On the HT
Controller Board, place SW2-2 to ON. Disconnect A2(B) +24V PSU (Faston Terminal) at the 6K5
contactor (some are simply marked as K5).
11. Turn ON the equipment and verify that 6K5 does not activate and that there is NO TENSION on the DC
Bus (± 300 VDC), Charge / Discharge Screws or Capacitor Bars.
Note . The following action requires the Inverter Module (L2), to which the
Charge/Discharge Boards are mounted, to be dismounted in order to gain access
to the IPM Driver Boards. Do not disconnect the Charge/Discharge Boards.
12. With an Oscilloscope at one of the IPM Driver boards, measure pulses between J3/J5-4 (GND 1) &
J3/J5-3 (CP1 KVDR1). Repeat the test with the other board at J4/J6-4 (GND 2) & J4/J6-3 (CP1 KVDR2).
Change the IPM Driver if the pulses are not present (refer to Job Card DR--15.)
3-32
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E14
DESCRIPTION : Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command.

APPEARS WHEN : During and after exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Exp signal is grounding on the HT Controller Board.
1. Remove the connector J1 on the HT Controller Board and check the grounding of Pin 6 of P1.
2. If so, replace the HT Controller Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--6.)
3. If it is not, remove the connector J3 on the Console, and check Pin 1 on connector J3 on the
Generator Cabinet.
4. If GND, replace the communication cable at J3. If not, replace the ATP Console Board. (Refer
to Job Card DR--4.)
3-33
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E15
DESCRIPTION : Filament Driver Circuit Open, No current on Filament. Wrong selection of Focal Spot detected
during “Prep”.
ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow “Prep”. Requires to be reset twice.
APPEARS WHEN : At any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : No current detected on Focal Spot (Filaments Off). After resetting the Error Code, the filament
driver will be shut off.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Absence of --12 V Power Supply at the HT Controller
A There is no power supplied to the Filament Board
Poor connection at the Cathode HV Cable
Defective Filament Transformer inside the HV Transformer
B Wrong signal --FIL1 ACK
Note . “E15” may be provoked by an absence of --12 V (power supply) to the HT Controller
at P2-1 or from the Low Voltage Power Supply (LVDC Power Supply 3PS1) at
3TS1-16. See schematics 54302010 and HT Controller 3000-33 for further
information.
Before Troubleshooting for the Possible Causes listed above, proceed with the
following steps.
1. Verify -12V from the Low Voltage Power Supply to the HT Controller, identifying and correcting
any possible short circuit. If -12V is present, Troubleshoot for the causes listed in the Possible
Causes section above (Causes A and B). It -12V is not present, proceed to the next step.
2. There is a possibility of a short circuit at the Ion Chamber connections. If the system has AEC
and doesn’t have an AEC Adaptation Board, proceed to the next step. If the system has an AEC
Adaptation Board, proceed to step 4.
3. It is likely that there is a short circuit in 3TS1, most probably at 3TS1-16.
4. Disconnect J1, J2, J3 & J5 that go to the Ion Chambers and test for a short circuit in one of these
aforementioned connections.
A. THERE IS NO SUPPLY TO THE FILAMENT BOARD, A POOR CONNECTION ON THE

CATHODE HV CABLE, A DEFECTIVE FILAMENT TRANSFORMER OR A DEFECTIVE HV
SWITCH.
1. Visual Check for Unplugged Connectors:
The visual inspection should include all the connectors located at the front door of the
Generator such as the HT Controller, Filament Driver, Interface Control, and High Voltage
Switch Control. Ensure that all connection points are secure.
3-34
REV 4 5192971--100
2. X--Ray Tube Small Filament Resistance Test:

With the Generator turned OFF, measure the Small Filament of the tube by disconnecting the
Cathode High Voltage Cable (shown below) from the HV Transformer (Generator side)
There are three pins located at the male end of the plug: C (Common), L (Large) and S (Small).
With an Ohm meter, measure between C and S. If the filaments are closed and functioning
normally, the reading should be close to zero Ohms. It is also recommended to check between
C and L and L and S.
If there is an open circuit in any of the Tube filaments, measure the resistance on the Tube side.
Remove the Cable from the Tube and test the ohms in the female plug (Tube side) with an Ohm
meter that has sufficiently long probes.
3. Primary Filament Resistance Test (1):
With the Generator turned off, remove connector J1 on the HV Transformer and measure on
the Connector of the HV Transformer between the pin marked G (FIL SUP) and H (FIL RTN).
As an added security, test between G (FIL SUP) and F (FIL 1 RTN). These readings should
be about 5 ohms each.
Plug Cable
Nipple
L s
4. Primary Filament Resistance Test (2):

Reconnect J1 to the HV Transformer and ensure that it is securely connected and “locked” into
position by twisting the outside cover until a “click” is heard. Measure the Ohms between the
following points (Each one should read about 5 Ohms):
-- FIL 1 RTN (Large Focus) P3-4 on the Filament Driver Board and P4-15 on the
Interface Control Board
-- FIL 1 RTN (Small Focus) P3-4 on the Filament Driver Board and P5-16 on the
Interface Control Board
5. High Voltage Switch Connection:
If the primary resistance tests do not reveal the source of the error, remove the Cathode High
Voltage Cable from the HV Transformer. Set position 2 of dipswitch “SW2” in the HT Controller
to “ON”. Setting “SW2” to “ON” will turn OFF the Filament Circuit.
Turn the Generator “ON” .
Test the female pins inside of the HV Transformer, measuring the corresponding pins between
C and S, and again for C and L. These readings should be about 0.5 Ohms for each filament.
6. Check through the X-ray tube window to see if the selected filament is On. Check both circuits
to detect which one is causing the error code.
7. If none lit when selected, check in the DC output on the BR1 rectifier (324 Dc approx.) or input
voltage (220 VAC approx.). If input voltage is OK and output voltage is not OK, replace rectifier.
(Refer to Job Card DR--12). If it is OK go to step 3.
8. Check if the Leds DS1 and DS2 are lit ON in the Filament Board. If they are not, replace the
Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--7.)
9. If everything is OK, check DC voltage between P2-4 and P2-1 (324 DC approx.). If not enough
voltage detected, review circuit between BR1 and T2 transformer. Replace Filament Board if
defective. (Refer to Job Card DR--7.)
10. If it is OK, check the AC voltage between Pin 4 on connector P3 (on Filament Board Fil. Sup.)
and Pins 15 or 16 (depends on filament selection) on connector P4 on Interface Control Board.
The range should be between 90 and 200 VAC.
3-35
REV 4 5192971--100
11. If not, check the voltage on Pin 17 of connector P4 at Interface Control Board and Pin 4 of
connector P3 at Filament Board, also Check P14 of connector P4. If no voltage present, replace
the Interface Control Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--8.)
12. If it is OK, check continuity between HV Transformer connector and Interface Board.
13. If it is OK, check continuity of HV Cable connector (between common C and S (Small Focus)
and between common C and L (Large focus). The OHM value should be very low in both cases
(0.01 approx.)
14. If it is OK, replace the HV Transformer. (Refer to Job Card DR--20). If it is not OK, check all
connections from HV Cable to the tube. Replace cable if necessary.
15. If HV Cable is OK, check tube filaments. Replace Tube if necessary.
B. WRONG SIGNAL --FIL1 ACK

Perform the following diagnosis if after pressing “Prep” the Error Code “E15” appears on the
Console and after resetting it, the Console displays Error Code “E04”.
START
Press “Prep”
Check and REPAIR Check --FIL1 ACK
NO YES and check --FIL1 ACK at
link P1-8 HT Controller & at Interface Board in
Interface Board (P4-22).
P4-22 Interface Board P1-8 at HT Controller.
Is it Low Level?
Is it ok?
NO
YES
Check if K7
Replace YES is active when
HT Controller Board selecting FIL1*.
Press Prep?
Is it active?
NOTES
1) FIL1 is Small Focus in Tube1 and it is Large Focus in Tube2.
NO
2) FIL1 SLC is activated when selecting FIL1 during Stand by

for RAD Tubes. For R&F Tubes it is activated at “Prep”.
Check signal
FIL1 SLC at P4-19
Replace YES
Interface Board.
Interface Board
Is it at Low Level when
selecting FIL1*?
NO
Check and fix

link P1-13 in YES Check Signal --FIL1 Replace
NO
HT Controller SCL in P1-13 at HT HT Controller Board
with P4--19 in Controll. Is it OK?
Interface Board
3-36
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E16
DESCRIPTION : Invalid value of: kVp, mA, or kW.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow Prep or Exp.
APPEARS WHEN : In “Prep”
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Selected mA or kVp are not correct.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong maximum kVp configuration.
Wrong software compatibility on the Generator Cabinet and Console.
When pressing PREP during calibration of Open Loop mA with a technique that overpasses the
Generator power kVp/mA.
1. Check switch 5 of SW2 on HT Controller Board (125 kVp in open position and 150 kVp in closed
position).
2. Check the software version on U5 of HT Controller Board and U24 of the ATP Console Board.
3. Set calibration data manually as per calibration procedure table “mA calibration number
change” in Chapter 4, “Configuration and Calibration,” of this manual.
ERROR CODE : E17
DESCRIPTION : Communication error between ATP Console CPU Board and HT Controller Board.
ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop.
APPEARS WHEN : Once initialization phase is over at any moment.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : No communication link between the Console and the Generator Cabinet.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Defective communication cable between the Console and the Generator Cabinet (J3).
Noise on the bucky circuitry.
Defective HT Controller Board or defective ATP Console Board.
The “Prep” signal from Console to HT Controller Board is short--circuited to ground.
1. Turn the Generator OFF/ON.

2. If “E01” appears, follow procedure for E01.
3. If “E01” does not appear, it is an intermittent error due an external device. Install an R--C filter
in the power supply and at bucky start circuitry.
4. If the error persists, replace the HT Controller Board or the ATP Console Boards. (Refer to Job
Cards DR--6 and/or DR--4.)
3-37
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E18 OR ROTOR ERROR
DESCRIPTION : Rotor error.

ERROR TYPE : Informative Error when the Rotor is not running while “Prep” is active. Exposure is not allowed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : The X-ray tube is not detected to be rotating while “Prep” is active, then exposure is inhibited.
POSIBLE CAUSES
“--PREP” signal is not going low in the HT Controller Board when “Prep” is pressed.
HT Controller Board is not receiving the “RTR Ready” signal back from the Control DRAC Board.
A. PREVIOUS CHECK
Check that the “--PREP” signal is going low in the HT Controller Board when “Prep” is active.
• “--PREP” signal can be measured in connector P1--3 of the HT Controller Board or by looking
at the LED DS2 in the HT Controller Board (it must be ON when “Prep” is active).
• If not, check the communication cable (J3) between the ATP console CPU Board and the
Generator connector 6J3 and then to the HT Controller Board (P1--3). Make sure it is properly
connected and that all the pins are well inserted on both sides (especially 6J3--4 on both sides).
G If there is not signal continuity between the ATP Console CPU Board (J3--4) and the HT
Controller Board (P1--3), repair or replace the communication cable.
G If the “--PREP” signal is going low and there is signal continuity between the ATP Console
CPU Board (J3--4) and the HT Controller Board (P1--3) and LED DS2 in the HT Controller
Board is OFF when “Prep” is active, replace the ATP Console CPU Board. (Refer to Job
Card DR--4.)
G If the “--PREP” signal is going low and there is signal continuity between the ATP Console
CPU Board (J3--4) and the HT Controller Board (P1--3) and LED DS2 in the HT Controller
Board is ON when “Prep” is active, perform procedure B.
B. ONLY FOR GENERATORS WITH HIGH SPEED STARTER (LV-DRAC)

In “Prep” (the Rotor is not running while “Prep” is active)
“Rotor Error” means that the ATP Console CPU Board is not receiving the “Ready” communication
signal back from the HT Controller Board. This could be also because the HT Controller Board is
not receiving the “Ready” (--RTR RDY) signal from the High Speed Starter (LV-DRAC).
1. Perform the Programming of the High Speed Starter and RAD Filament Setting Time as
explained in the Configuration Chapter of the Generator Service Manual. Perform the following
sequence:
G Turn OFF the Generator and take note of the setting of Dipswitch 3000SW2 on the HT
Controller Board.
G Set all Dipswitch positions to OFF.
G Set Dipswitch of positions 1, 2, 5 and 7 to ON (position 2 to ON informs to the HT Controller
Board that it has a LV-DRAC connected).
G Turn ON the Generator and wait of E01. If E01 is not displayed leave the Generator for
1 minute and then proceed to turn it off.
G Set all Dipswitch positions as they were originally.
3-38
REV 4 5192971--100
2. If after this, the “Rotor Error” is still present check that the “--RTR RUN” signal is going low in
the Control DRAC Board by measuring J4--20 in the Control DRAC Board when “Prep” is
active. Normally, if this signal is received by the Control DRAC Board a noise can be heard on
the LV-DRAC Transformers because the starter is trying to start the Tube.
G If there is no signal, check the signal continuity between the HT Controller Board (P5--5),
connector 6J1 of the Generator Cabinet (6J1--1) and Control DRAC Board (J4--20). If the
continuity is correct but there is no signal in the Control DRAC Board (J4--20), replace the
HT Controller Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--6.)
G If this signal is arriving to the Control DRAC Board then most probably is that the LV-DRAC
(High Speed Starter) is accelerating the Tube and therefore the “--RTR RDY” signal is not
being received in the HT Controller Board.
-- Measure the signal “--RTR RDY” (active--low) in J4--4 of the Control DRAC Board.
Also the LED DL3 must be ON on the Control DRAC Board. If either is not correct:
-- Set Dipswitches for “Minimum Time for Ready (Delay)” on the Control DRAC
Board are set for “0” seconds (Dipswitches 3243SW1--1, SW1--2 and SW1--3 in ON
position).
-- Check the voltage at the following Test Points on the Control DRAC Board:
+5 VDC at TP14, +15 VDC at TP15, --15 VDC at TP37, using for GND reference the
following Test Points on the Control DRAC Board: TP2, TP4, TP12, TP13, or TP19.
If they are correct, replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--17.)
-- If voltages at the above points are correct, turn the generator OFF and wait
three (3) minutes for the Main Storage Capacitors to discharge. Remove the Ribbon
Cable from Connector J3 at the Control DRAC Board.Turn the generator ON.
Check the voltage at the following points on the Interface DRAC Board:
+5 VDC at Anode of diode CR6,
+15 VDC at Anode of diode CR5 or at Cathode of diode CR6,
--15 VDC at Cathode of diode CR7.
For GND reference use the Terminal J2--3 on the Interface DRAC Board.
If voltages at the above points are correct, replace the Control DRAC Board.
If any voltage at the above points are not correct, verify at the Interface DRAC
Board that there is 220 VAC between J3--1 and J3--2, and fuse F1 and F2
are correct, if 220 VAC is present and the fuses are correct replace the
Interface DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--18.)
-- If the signal “--RTR RDY” (active--low) in J4--4 of the Control DRAC Board is correct
and the LED DL3 is ON on the Control DRAC Board, check the signal continuity
between the Control DRAC Board (J4--4), connector 6J1 of the Generator Cabinet
(6J1--5) and HT Controller Board (P5--4). If the continuity is correct but there is no
signal in the HT Controller Board (P5--4), replace the HT Controller Board. (Refer to
Job Card DR--6.)
Connect all the wires / cables removed during the procedure back to the
original connections.
3-39
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E19
DESCRIPTION : mA detected without “Exp” command.

ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in an endless loop. It is necessary to
turn off the equipment.
APPEARS WHEN : In stand-by or during initialization.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Current in tube without “Prep” command.
POSIBLE CAUSES
± 12 VDC power supplies missing on the H. T. Controller Board.
Defective H. T. Controller.
mA signal on H T Controller is active.
1. Check ± 12 VDC power supplies.

2. Check a logic level “0” in TP5. Check also a level logic “0” in TP13, TP14, connector P4-6, and
P4-7.
3. If it is OK, replace the HT Controller Board or the Filament Drive Boards, one by one. (Refer
to Job Cards DR--6 and/or DR--7.)
ERROR CODE : E20
DESCRIPTION : kVp detected without “Exp” command.

ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in an endless loop.
APPEARS WHEN : In stand-by or during initialization.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : kVp detected without “Exp” command.
When “E20” appears on the Console (E20) it means that the error can not be solved without turning
the equipment OFF.
POSIBLE CAUSES
--12 VDC power supply missing.
Defective HT Controller Board.
1. Check --12 VDC power supply.

2. Check logic level “0” in TP7 and TP11, TP12, P4-1, and P4-2.
3. If it is OK, replace the HT Controller Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--6.)
3-40
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E21
DESCRIPTION : Wrong Tube-1 selection.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. Does not allow working unless the error is solved or other tube is selected.
APPEARS WHEN : At any moment mainly after initialization or when changing tube selection.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Wrong tube 1 selection.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The –HT INTLK is not grounding (tube 1 selection).
Defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (two [2] tubes option).
The --HT INTLK is missing.
Only for one (1) tube option (Compact Generators):

1. Check the –HT INTLK in 6J3-13 (Generator Cabinet), it should be “0” VDC on tube 1 selection.
2. If it is not OK, check the Jumper between 6J3-13 and 6J3-16 (GND).
3. If 6J3-13 = 0, check 6J3--13 on the ATP Console Board.
4. If not “0” in J3-13, check the link between TB1-9 and J3-13. If voltage = “0” and E21 appears,
replace the ATP Console Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--4.)
ERROR CODE : E23
DESCRIPTION : Calibration data not stored

ERROR TYPE : Indicative although it is almost impossible to find if not provoked.
APPEARS WHEN : When trying to save a calibration data.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Calibration data not stored. Calibration value intended to be stored has not been properly
recorded.
POSIBLE CAUSES
This problem may be shown randomly.
This problem is continuos or occurs frequently and the communication link between the Generator
Cabinet and the Console is too noisy.
1. Store the data again.

2. Check the communication cables.
3. Route the communication cables in a different way.
3-41
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E24
DESCRIPTION : Bucky Movement Signal has not been detected.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Does not allow exposition.
APPEARS WHEN : At the beginning of the exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Wrong Exposure signal from Buckies.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Bucky Malfunction.
1. Check there is a jumper between 3TS1--5 (Bucky Motion) and 3TS1--7 (GND).
2. In the Interface Control Board, check Jumper W1 is installed between pins W1--2 and W1--3.
3. In the Interface Control Board, check there is 0 VDC in connector P4--11, if not check
connection between 3TS1--5 (Bucky Motion) on the Generator and connector P4--11 on the
Interface Control Board.
4. Check Relay “K4” is activated in the Interface Control Board after “Exp”.
G If not, replace the Interface Control Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--8.)
G If Relay “K4” is activated but Error “E24” persists, check there is 0 VDC in connector P4--6
on the Interface Control Board after “Exp” (“K4” activated).
-- If not, replace the Interface Control Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--8.)
-- If there is 0 VDC in connector P4--6 on the Interface Control Board but Error “E24”
persists, check there is 0 VDC in connector J3--12 (BUCKY EXP) on the ATP
Console CPU Board.
-- If there is not 0 VDC in connector J3--12 on the ATP Console CPU Board, check
continuity between connector P4--6 on the Interface Control Board and connector
J3--12 on the ATP Console CPU Board.
-- If there is 0 VDC in connector J3--12 on the ATP Console CPU Board but Error
“E24” persists, replace the ATP Console CPU Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--4.)
3-42
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E27
DESCRIPTION : Failure in the Console EPROM. Bad checksum.

ERROR TYPE : Fatal Error. The Generator does not start.
APPEARS WHEN : During Console initialization.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : The Console performs a checksum procedure of EPROM when it has been configured to a
non-allowed calibration and it has found this value to be incorrect.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The Console has been configured in a non communication mode.
The non volatile RAM does not calculate and compare the Console checksum.
The EPROM (U24) has been corrupted.
1. Check if DIP Switch SW2 on the ATP Console is correctly configured, per the Service Manual.
2. If the error remains, replace the non--volatile RAM (U23) on the ATP Console.
3. If the error remains, replace the EPROM (U24) on the ATP Console. (Refer to Job Card DR--1.)
3-43
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E33
DESCRIPTION : No communication link between the Generator and the PC Unit.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative.
APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with Serial Communication.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Serial Communication Error.
POSIBLE CAUSES
ATP Console CPU Board or Serial Port of the PC is damaged.
The Generator is turned OFF and PC is ON.
Error E33 means that there is no serial communication (RS232) between the ATP Console CPU
Board and the PC. The ATP Console CPU Board (for serial communication) is located at the back
side of the Front Panel the Generator cabinet.
1. Check the connection cable between connector J8 from the ATP Console CPU Board to
connector J5 of the Generator cabinet and then check the serial communication cable and
connections from J5 to the Serial Console or to the Interface Box (when a PC is used). (Refer
to schematics 54301052 and A6188--03 of the Installation Manual).
2. In order to isolate the problem, turn the Generator ON and measure if any of the following
voltages are present in order to know if the Generator is really turned ON.
-- 240 VAC SW: between 3TS1--26 and 3TS1--10.
-- 115 VAC SW: between 3TS1--27 and 3TS1--10.
-- Relay 3K3 (located on the front door of the generator) is energized.
-- LED DS1 in the Interface Control Board is ON.
3. If the Generator is turned ON, maybe the problem is due to the ATP Console CPU Board is not
either turned ON or not properly working. Check the following points when the error code “E33”
is displayed.
-- 12 V UNR: In the ATP Console CPU Board between TP9 and TP11.
-- 12 V ISO: In the ATP Console CPU Board between TP10 and TP1.
-- 5 VDC of the ATP: In the ATP Console CPU Board between TP3 and TP1.
-- DS1 of the HT Controller Board (normally flashing).
-- DS1 of the ATP Console CPU Board (normally ON).
-- DS2 of the ATP Console CPU Board (normally flashing).
G If any of the voltages is not present and correct when the error code “E33” appears or if
any of the LEDS is not OK, replace the ATP Console CPU Board. (Refer to Job Card
DR--4.)
G If all the voltages are present and correct when the error code “E33” appears and if also
all the LEDS are OK then the problem is isolated in the RS232 connection between the
ATP Console CPU Board and PC. Check the Serial Port on the PC and if possible the RxD
and TxD signal between the ATP Console CPU Board and the PC. (Refer to schematics
54301052 and A6188--03 of the Installation Manual). Replace any defective part found.
3-44
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E34 -- TECHNIQUE ERROR
DESCRIPTION : Technique error.

ERROR TYPE : Informative without acoustic alarm or Fatal after exposition. It does not allow exposition.
APPEARS WHEN : At any moment after parameter selection or after exposition.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated with the warning “Technique error” on Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of
the Consoles, “E34” appears in display.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The calibrations for those parameters are wrong.
1. If it occurs with time parameters close to 1mS, it means that the cable capacity is excessive
for a short exposition. Also the calibrations for those parameters are wrong. Check the Service
Manual Section on Exposure Time Adjustment. (Refer to Chapter 4, “Configuration and
Calibration,” Section 6.2, “Exposure Time Adjustment,” for this procedure.)
2. If it happens at Fluoroscopy mode with ABC, it means that the equipment is not able to perform
that operation. Perform Jumper W1 in Fluoro CPU.
3. If it happens after exposition, it means a failure in exposition timer and backup has been
cut. Dangerous. Reset APR and reconfigure values.
ERROR CODE : E35 -- DOOR OPEN
DESCRIPTION : Door Open.

ERROR TYPE : Informative. It may inhibit Exposition depending on the configuration of SW1.2 at Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated with warning “Door Open” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles
“E35” appears in display. Does not allow “Prep” and “Exp.”
POSIBLE CAUSES
Door open or cable disconnected or cable not installed.
1. Close the door.

2. If that is not the reason for the error, check Jumper TS1-22 & TS1-23. See the Installation
Manual Section on “Door Interlock Signal.”
3-45
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E36 -- HEAT UNITS
DESCRIPTION : Safety Thermostat Open. Overheating.

ERROR TYPE : Informative without acoustic alarm. Does not allow expositions.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : “E36” appears in display. Does not allow “Prep” and “Exp”.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The thermostat of the selected tube is open due to an overheated Tube Housing
(temperature > 60oC), a defective thermostat connection, or a faulty thermostat.
Discontinuity problem inside the wires or at connection points.
If the Tube Housing is cool (temperature < 60oC) and there is a closed circuit (connections are not
faulty and Voltmeter reading for Tube-1/2 is 0 VDC), there is a damaged ATP.
It may also appear during calibration due to the high volume of exposures (starting, braking and
Anode heating)
1. If the error is due to overheating, wait until the temperature is lower than 60oC, the thermostat
will be closed.
2. When there is no thermostat on the X-ray Tubes, the respective thermostat signals have to be
connected to ground (For Tube-1: TS2-4 & TS2-5)
3. Check for a correct installation of the Thermostat/Presostat (connections for Tube-1: TS2-4 &
TS2-5).
G If the Tube does not have this signal, make the Jumpers as indicated above.
G If the tube has this signal, check for a faulty ATP Console CPU Board.
START
Is the Tube Housing

Is there a Thermostat?
YES YES Wait for Tube Does the NO Normal
Warm?
error persist? Operation
(Temp <60oC) to cool
YES
NO
NO
Install Thermostat
or
Make Jumper following
Action 2 above Check
Continuity YES Damaged ATP Console CPU Board
Action 2 Replace ATP Console CPU Board
(0 VDC)
NO
Discontinuity Problem
Is the Thermostat YES Check for break in circuitry inside
Closed? wires and at connection points
Replace necessary parts
NO
Faulty Thermostat
Replace
Thermostat
3-46
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E37 -- TUBE OVERLOAD
DESCRIPTION : Tube Overload.

ERROR TYPE : Informative without acoustic alarm. Does not allow Exposition.
APPEARS WHEN : After “Exp” due to Tube overheating. After changing radiographic parameters. In some Consoles
this error may not appear as they are provided with an automatic blocking that disables
parameters above the tube capacity.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated with warning “Tube Overload” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of the
Consoles “E37” appears in the display. Exposures are not allowed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
1. Parameters selected for a new exposition are above the tube capacity (Heat Units or Rating).
2. The Capacity Line frequency is wrong. (see SW1.1 at Console) or the Tube selected is in an
extended position E02 or E18 is not correct.
1. Wait for the Tube to cool and the Heat Units available to increase or modify the Exposition
parameters.
2. If Heat Units of tube are 100% and the “E37” or “Tube Overload” warning appears, check
3024SW1.1 on the ATP Console. See Chapter 4, “Configuration and Calibration,” in the
Service Manual and Test Switches or verify the X-Ray Type Selection: E02 for Tube 1 and E18
for Tube 2 in Chapter 4, “Configuration and Calibration,” of the Service Manual.
ERROR CODE : E41
DESCRIPTION : Dosimeter failure. Communication failure between the Tube-1 Dosimeter and Generator.
APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with Dosimeter.
APPEARS WHEN : Communication error starting the measuring.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated as Error Code “E41”.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Wrong Physical connection between Dosimeter and Generator for Tube-1.
1. Check the following cable connections between Dosimeter and Generator:

G DAP cable is connected to the Counter Unit 70954 (4 pins Binder round connector) in the
Front Panel of the Generator.
G Radiation Meter cable (A3354-03) is properly connected between the Counter Unit and
P2 of the Radiation Meter Board.
G Wire-1 is inserted in connector J1--1 of the Radiation Meter Board (A3170--01).
2. Turn OFF/ON the Generator to reset the Radiation Measuring System.
3-47
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E42
DESCRIPTION : Dosimeter failure. Autotest error on Tube-1 Dosimeter.

APPEARS WHEN : Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-1 or during regular operation.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated as Error Code “E42”. Failure test in Dosimeter.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Error during electronic checking of Counter Module for Tube-1.

3. If the error persists, replace the Counter Unit 70954 at the Front Panel of the Generator.
ERROR CODE : E43
DESCRIPTION : Dosimeter failure. Tube-1 DAP Ion Chamber status check error.
APPEARS WHEN : Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-1 or during regular operation.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Indicated as Error Code “E43”. Wrong DAP Ion Chamber status request.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Error during DAP Ion Chamber checking. DAP Ion Chamber not operative.

3. If required, replace the Ion Chamber for Tube-1.
4. If the error persists, replace the DAP Ion Chamber under Collimator.
3-48
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E50
DESCRIPTION : Interrupted Exposure.

APPEARS WHEN : When operator releases “EXP” button before exposure time has ended.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : “E50” appears on Console.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Operator releases the EXP button before the exposure time has ended.
1. Press the respective button on the Console to reset the Error indication.
2. Repeat the exposure.
3. If the error remains, check the Handswitch or EXP button and replace what is wrong.
ERROR CODE : E51
DESCRIPTION : Checksum failure or EPROM corrupted.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative. System does not allow exposition.
APPLICABLE TO : Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.
APPEARS WHEN : After self-test.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : At power On, after the Generator autocheck, “E51” is displayed and it is not possible to make
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
DRAC program memory corrupted.
1. Replace U17 on the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--3.)
3-49
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E52
DESCRIPTION : Microcrontroller RAM failure.

ERROR TYPE : Indicative. Exposure is not allowed.
APPLICABLE TO : Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC
APPEARS WHEN : After self-test.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : At power On, after the Generator autocheck, “E52” is displayed and it is not possible to make
Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
U17 on Control DRAC Board is defective.
1. Replace U17 on the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--3.)
3-50
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E53
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient DC BUS voltage at low level voltage (220 VAC).
APPLICABLE TO : Generators with High Speed Starter
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Error Code “E53” is displayed and it is not possible to make Prep.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Low or no DC BUS Voltage on the Control DRAC Board.
Voltage at TP18 on the Control DRAC is <1.1VDC.
1. Turn the generator ON.
TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT TOUCH ANY

HEATSINK OR ANY COMPONENT IN THE LV- DRAC
MODULE.
2. On the Interface DRAC Board check that the voltage between J2--1 (--) and J2--2 (+) is higher
than 200 VDC.
G If it is not, perform Error Code “E11” checking.
G If it is higher than 200 VDC, go to next step.
3. On the Interface DRAC Board check that there is the same voltage between J2--5 (--) and J2--4
(+) than the voltage measured before between J2--1 (--) and J2--2 (+).
G If VDC is OK, go to step 8.
G If VDC is not OK, go to next step.
4. Turn the generator OFF and wait three (3) minutes for Main Storage Capacitors to discharge.
5. Check Fuses F3 and F4 on the Interface DRAC Board and that the Fuse Holders are making
contact with the Fuses. If necessary, replace the Fuses and close the contacts of the Fuse
Holders.
7. If the error persists, check on the Interface DRAC Board that there is the same voltage between
J2--5 (--) and J2--4 (+) than the VDC measured before between J2--1 (--) and J2--2 (+).
G If VDC is not OK, turn the generator OFF and wait three (3) minutes for the Main Storage
Capacitors to discharge.
-- If any of the Fuses are blown again, replace the Fuse(s) and replace the Control
DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--17.)
-- If both Fuses are OK, replace the Interface DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--18.)
3-51
REV 4 5192971--100
8. On the Control DRAC Board, check that the voltage between J2--1 (--) and J2--2 (+) is the same
than the voltage measured before between J2--1 (--) and J2--2 (+) on the Interface DRAC
Board.
G If VDC is not OK:
-- Turn the generator OFF and wait three (3) minutes for the Main Storage Capacitors
to discharge.
-- Check the Faston terminals of the DC BUS Cable on both Boards (Control and
Interface DRAC Boards). If necessary, close the Faston terminals.
-- Check the continuity of the DC BUS Cable. If necessary, replace the DC BUS Cable.
G If VDC is OK, but the error persists, check that the voltage at TP18 on Control DRAC Board
is < 1.1 VDC.
Note . For GND reference use the following Test Points on the Control DRAC Board: TP2,
TP4, TP12, TP13, or TP19.
-- If VDC is higher than 1.1 VDC, replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card
DR--17.)
-- If VDC is lower than 1.1 VDC, check the voltage at the following Test Points on the
Control DRAC Board:
-- +5 VDC at TP14
-- +15 VDC at TP15
-- --15 VDC at TP37
-- If voltages at the above Test Points are correct, replace the Control DRAC Board.
-- If any voltage at the above Test Points are not correct, go to next step.
9. Turn the generator OFF and wait three (3) minutes for the Main Storage Capacitors to
discharge.
10. Remove the Ribbon Cable from Connector J3 at the Control DRAC Board.
12. Check the voltage at the following points on the Interface DRAC Board:
-- +5 VDC at Anode of diode CR6
-- +15 VDC at Anode of diode CR5 or at Cathode of diode CR6
-- --15 VDC at Cathode of diode CR7
Note . For GND reference use the Terminal J2--3 on the Interface DRAC Board.
-- If voltages at the above points are correct, replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer
to Job Card DR--17.)
-- If any voltage at the above points are not correct, replace the Interface DRAC Board.
Connect all the wires / cables removed during the procedure

back to the original connections.
3-52
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E54
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient DC BUS voltage at high level voltage (400 / 480 VAC).
APPEARS WHEN : At any moment
POSIBLE CAUSES
Low or no DC BUS Voltage on the Control DRAC Board.
Voltage at TP18 on the Control DRAC is <2.48VDC.

MODULE.
2. On the Interface DRAC Board check that the voltage between J2--1 (--) and J2--2 (+) is higher
than 447 VDC.
G If it is not, perform Error Code “E11” checking.
G If it is higher than 447 VDC, go to next step.
3. On the Interface DRAC Board, check that there is the same voltage between J2--5 (--) and J2--4
(+) than the voltage measured before between J2--1 (--) and J2--2 (+).
G If VDC is not OK, go to next step.
discharge.
5. Check Fuses F3 and F4 on the Interface DRAC Board and that the Fuse Holders are making
contact with the Fuses. If necessary, replace the Fuses and close the contacts of the Fuse
Holders.
7. If the error persists, check on the Interface DRAC Board that there is the same voltage between
J2--5 (--) and J2--4 (+) than the voltage measured before between J2--1 (--) and J2--2 (+).
G If VDC is not OK, turn the generator OFF and wait three (3) minutes for the Main Storage
Capacitors to discharge.
-- If any of the Fuses are blown again, replace the Fuse(s) and replace the Control
DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--17.)
-- If both Fuses are OK, replace the Interface DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--18.)
3-53
REV 4 5192971--100
8. On the Control DRAC Board, check that the voltage between J2--1 (--) and J2--2 (+) is the same
than the voltage measured before between J2--1 (--) and J2--2 (+) on the Interface DRAC
Board.
G If VDC is not OK:
-- Turn the generator OFF and wait three (3) minutes for the Main Storage Capacitors
to discharge.
-- Check the Faston terminals of the DC BUS Cable on both Boards (Control and
Interface DRAC Boards). If necessary, close the Faston terminals.
-- Check the continuity of the DC BUS Cable. If necessary, replace the DC BUS Cable.
G If VDC is OK, but the error persists, check that the voltage at TP18 on the Control DRAC
Board is < 2.48 VDC.
-- If VDC is higher than 2.48 VDC, replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card
DR--17.)
-- If VDC is lower than 2.48 VDC, check the voltage at the following Test Points on the
Control DRAC Board:
-- +5 VDC at TP14
-- +15 VDC at TP15
-- --15 VDC at TP37
discharge.

3-54
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E55
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive DC BUS voltage at 480 VAC.

APPEARS WHEN : At any moment
POSIBLE CAUSES
DC BUS Voltage out of range on the Control DRAC Board.
Voltage at TP18 on the Control DRAC is > 4.92 VDC.

MODULE.
2. Check that the input voltage to the Generator (at Input Line Fuses) is according to
specifications (480 VAC, ±10%). If it is not, check the Input Power Line.
Note . For a three--phase Generator, the DC BUS voltage should be approximately the
RMS voltage value between phases times 1.5, when the generator is ON and not
making exposures.
G The following steps are a few recommendations to check the Input Power Line. These
steps are not related with the Generator.
G Measure the voltage between all the phases: L1 and L2; L2 and L3; L3 and L1. They may
have a big disequilibrium in one (1) of them.
G If the three (3) measurements are equal, maybe the input voltage in the installation is not
sinusoidal and the peek between any of the phases is too higher.
Use an Oscilloscope with the shield of the probe isolated from ground. Both the probe and
the scope have to be able to handle and insulation voltage of 480 VAC (±10%) between
the active of the probe and the shield.
Connect the probe between all the phases: L1 and L2; L2 and L3; L3 and L1. Check the
peek between any of the phases.
3-55
REV 4 5192971--100
3. If the input voltage is OK, check on the Control DRAC Board that the voltage between J2--1
(--) and J2--2 (+) is < 800 VDC. Take note of the measured VDC.
G If VDC is > 800 VDC, go to step 8.
G If VDC is < 800 VDC, but the error persists, measure on the Control DRAC Board the
voltage between TP18 and a GND Test Point (TP2, TP4, TP12, TP13 or TP19).
Check that VDC measured at TP18 complies with the following scale factor:
181 VDC measured between J2--1 and J2--2 = 1 VDC measured at TP18.
-- If VDC ratio is OK, but the error persists, replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer
-- If VDC ratio is not OK, check the voltage at the following Test Points on the Control
DRAC Board:
-- +5 VDC at TP14
-- +15 VDC at TP15
-- --15 VDC at TP37
discharge.
discharge.
9. Disconnect the DC BUS Cable from J2--5 (--) and J2--4 (+) on the Interface DRAC Board.
11. Check on the Interface DRAC Board that the voltage between J2--1 (--) and J2--2 (+) is
< 800 VDC.
G If VDC is < 800 VDC, replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--17.)
G If VDC is > 800 VDC, go to the next step.
discharge.
13. Disconnect the DC BUS Cable from J2--1 (--) and J2--2 (+) on the Interface DRAC Board.
3-56
REV 4 5192971--100

15. At thewire ends (--) and (+) of theDCBUSCable disconnected before from the Interface DRAC
Board, check that the voltage is < 800 VDC.
G If VDC is < 800 VDC, replace the Interface DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--18.)
G If VDC is > 800 VDC, go to the next step.
discharge.
17. Disconnect the wires (--) and (+) of the DC BUS Cable from the Input Rectifier Board.
19. Check if the voltage is < 800 VDC between BUS+ and BUS-- on the Input Rectifier Board
(Inverter Module).
G If VDC is > 800 VDC, replace the Input Rectifier Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--11.)
G If VDC is < 800 VDC, at least one of the Main Storage Capacitors (Inverter Module) is
defective. Replace the Main Storage Capacitors. (Refer to Job Card DR--13.)
discharge.

3-57
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E58
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
APPLICABLE TO : Generators with High Speed Starter.
APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Error Code “E58” is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the main winding up to 3300 RPM is detected.
Defective: Interface DRAC Board, or Control DRAC Board, or Tube Stator, or Stator Cable, or
Clamping Board, or Transformers, or Contactors in LV--DRAC Module.
1. Check that the DIP switches on the Control DRAC Board are set in the correct position. (Refer
to Section 5.2.1, “DIP Switch Configuration on Control DRAC Board,” of Chapter 4,
“Configuration and Calibration.” Especially check that DIP switch 3243SW3--5 is in the “ON”
position.)
2. Check each wire connection of the Stator Cable on the Tube side and on 11TS2 on the
LV--DRAC Module are correct and secured (good contact), connect properly, and tighten each
wire if necessary. Check if the error has been corrected. If not, go to the next step.
3. Verify the generator is turned OFF.
All the wires / cables removed during the procedure have to

be isolated to avoid contact with any other wire or ground.
4. Measure the Stator Tube Winding impedances on 11TS2 on the LV--DRAC Module:
G Between Main (11TS2--1) and Common (11TS2--3).
G Between Auxiliary (11TS2--2) and Common (11TS2--3).
G Between Main (11TS2--1) and Auxiliary (11TS2--2), it must be the sum of impedance
measured between Main and Common plus Auxiliary and Common.
Note . Impedance must be as stated in the X--ray Tube Stator specifications. (Refer to the
Manufacturer X--ray Tube Data Sheet.)
-- If the impedance is OK, go to the next step.

-- If the impedance is not correct:
-- Measure the Stator Tube Winding impedances on the Tube side:
-- Between Main and Common.
-- Between Auxiliary and Common.
-- Between Main and Auxiliary, it must be the sum of impedance measured
between Main and Common plus Auxiliary and Common.
-- If the impedance is correct on the Tube, replace the Stator Cable.

-- If the impedance is not correct on the Tube, replace the X--ray Tube.
3-58
REV 4 5192971--100
5. Check for correct isolation between the connections for the Main winding and Auxiliary winding
in 11TS2 on the LV--DRACModule. Measure the impedance between Main and Ground,
Auxiliary and Ground, Common and Ground; in all cases it must be high impedance
(mega--ohms).
G If the impedance is OK, go to the next step.
G If the impedance is not correct, it can be due to:
-- a wrong connection of the Stator Cable on the Tube side or on the Generator side.
Check the connection of the Stator Cable and connect it properly if necessary.
-- or the Stator Cable is short--circuited, then disconnect the Stator Cable on the Tube
side and measure impedance in the Tube. If the problem persists replace the X--ray
Tube.
To perform each one of the following checks it is necessary:

- Turn the generator OFF and wait three (3) minutes to
discharge the Main Storage Capacitors.
- Remove the wire indicated in each step below.
- Turn the Generator ON. Press PREP and note the error code
and reset it.
7. On the Tube side, remove the Main wire. Check:

G If an “Excessive Current” code appears, go to the next step.
G If an “Insufficient Current” code appears, the problem is in the Tube Stator. Replace the
X--ray Tube.
8. On the Generator side, remove wire 11TS2--1 (Main). Check:
G If an “Insufficient Current” code appears, the problem is in the Stator Cable. Replace the
Stator Cable.
9. Desolder the wire marked as “12” on the Main Transformer of the LV--DRAC Module. Check:
G If an “Insufficient Current” code appears, there is a bad contact from 11TS2 to Terminal
“12” in the Transformer on the Contactor’s Terminals 11KT1, 11K2, and/or 11K3. (Refer
to Schematic “54302010” at the end of this Service Manual.) Identify faulty connections,
clean the contacts, tighten each wire connection, and/or replace Contactors if necessary.
10. On the Control DRAC Board, remove wire J1--1 (Main). Check:
G If an “Insufficient Current” code appears, replace the Main Transformer at the LV--DRAC
Module.
11. On the Control DRAC Board, remove wire J1--3 (Shield). Check:
G If an “Excessive Current” code appears, replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to Job
Card DR--17.)
Module.

3-59
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E59
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
APPLICABLE TO : All Generators with High Speed Starter.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : Error Code “E59” is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the auxiliary winding up to 3300 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-60
REV 4 5192971--100
in 11TS2 on the LV--DRAC Module. Measure the impedance between Main and Ground,
(mega--ohms).
Tube.

- Turn the generator OFF and wait three (3) minutes to discharge the Main
Storage Capacitors.
- Turn the Generator ON. Press PREP and note the error code and reset it.
7. On the Tube side, remove the Auxiliary wire. Check:

X--ray Tube.
8. On the Generator side, remove wire 11TS2--2 (Auxiliary). Check:
Stator Cable.
9. On the Interface DRAC Board, remove J5--1 and J5--4 wires. Check:
G If an “Insufficient Current” code appears, replace the Interface DRAC Board. (Refer to Job
Card DR--18.)
10. Remove the two (2) wires connected to the Clamping Board. Check:
G If an “Insufficient Current” code appears, replace the Clamping Board. (Refer to Job Card
DR--19.)
11. Desolder the wire marked as “12” on the auxiliary Transformer of the LV--DRAC Module.
Check:
12. On the Control DRAC Board, remove wire J1--4 (Auxiliary). Check:
Module.
Card DR--17.)
Module.

3-61
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E60
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding up to 3300 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-62
REV 4 5192971--100
5. Check that there is a low resistance (ohms) on the primary and secondary side of either the
Main or Auxiliary Transformer (depending if the error is in the Main or Auxiliary winding):
-- For Primary measure between terminals 1--7 of the Transformer.
-- For Secondary measure between terminals 8--10 and 10--12 of the Transformer.
G If the low resistance is OK, go to the next step.
G If the low resistance is not correct, replace the Transformer.
6. On the Control DRAC Board, check that there is a continuity between the following points:
-- For Main measure between J1--1 and J1--3.
-- For Auxiliary measure between J1--3 and J1--4.
G If the continuity is OK, go to the next step.
G If the continuity is not correct, check cable connections in J1 of the Control DRAC Board
and in Primary side of the Transformers.
7. With the generator turned OFF, check that Contactors 11KT1, 11K2, and 11K3 are not
energized (OFF) on the LV--DRAC Module.
G If it is OK, go to the next step.
G If any Contactor is energized (ON), replace the Contactor.
8. Turn the generator ON and check that ten (10) seconds after power--up Contactors 11K2 and
11K3 are not energized (OFF) and Contactor 11KT1 is energized (ON) on the LV--DRAC
Module.
G If Contactor 11K2 or 11K3 is energized (ON), replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to
Job Card DR--17.)
G If Contactor 11KT1 is not energized (OFF), turn the generator OFF and wait three (3)
minutes for the Main Storage Capacitors to discharge. Check that Diode CR14 is OK on
the Interface DRAC Board.
-- Diode CR14 is OK, replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--17.)
-- Diode CR14 is not OK, replace the Interface DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card
DR--18.)

MODULE.
10. Check that there is a continuity between the following points:

-- For Main measure between terminal 12 of the Main Transformer and 11TS2--1.
-- For Auxiliary measure between terminal 12 of the Auxiliary Transformer and
11TS2--2.
-- For Common measure between terminal 8 of each Transformer (Main and Auxiliary)
and then between terminal 8 of the Main Transformer and 11TS2--3.
G If the continuity is not correct, there is a bad contact on the Transformer Terminals or on
the Contactor’s Terminals 11KT1, 11K2, and/or 11K3. (Refer to Schematic “54302010” at
the end of this Service Manual.) Identify faulty connections, clean the contacts, and/or
tighten each wire connection.
3-63
REV 4 5192971--100
11. Check the proper operation of the Control DRAC Board. For that:
G Set DIP switch 3243SW4--7 in the “ON” position to inhibit errors.
G Select: 40 kVp, 10 mA and 10 ms (low speed) and Direct Workstation. Check the X--ray
Tube is starting properly by performing an Anode Rotation Test. (Refer to Section 5.3,
“Anode Rotation Test,” in Chapter 4, “Configuration and Calibration.”)
-- If the Tube does not start, replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card
DR--17.)
-- If the Tube starts, the Control DRAC Board has to be replaced (refer to Job Card
DR--17) but the unit can work (for a short period of days) whenever DIP switch
3243SW4--7 is in the “ON” position to inhibit errors.
-- In both cases, set DIP switch 3243SW4--7 in the “OFF” position after replacing the
Control DRAC Board.

3-64
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E61
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the main winding up to 3300 RPM is detected.
to Section 5.2.1, “DIP switch Configuration on Control DRAC Board,” of Chapter 4,
position.)



3-65
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-66
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-67
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E62
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM
APPEARS WHEN : During Anode acceleration at High Speed.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the main winding up to 10000 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-68
REV 4 5192971--100
(mega--ohms).
Tube.

Storage Capacitors.

X--ray Tube.
Stator Cable.
Module.
Card DR--17.)
Module.

3-69
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E63
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the auxiliary winding up to 10000 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-70
REV 4 5192971--100
(mega--ohms).
side and measure impedance in the Tube. If the problem persists, replace the X--ray
Tube.

Storage Capacitors.

X--ray Tube.
Stator Cable.
Card DR--18.)
DR--19.)
11. Desolder the wire marked as “12” on the auxiliary Transformer of the LV--DRAC Module.
Check:
Module.
Card DR--17.)
Module.

3-71
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E64
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding up to 10000 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-72
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-73
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-74
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E65
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the main winding up to 10000 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-75
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-76
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-77
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E66
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the main winding running at 3300 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the main winding running at 3300 RPM is detected.
During the acceleration time the Contactor 11K2 remains OFF. Once the acceleration time has been
completed the Contactor 11K2 must be energized to apply to the Stator a lower voltage (running
voltage). This is the step where the errors are appearing (excessive current in running mode). For
any reason, Contactor 11K2 is not energized so that the voltage applied to the Stator is higher than
should be and this is causing the excessive current.
Defective: cable connections, or Contactor 11K2, or Control DRAC Board, or Stator Cable, or Tube
Stator.

1. Verify the Generator is turned OFF.
position.)
3-78
REV 4 5192971--100


(mega--ohms).
Tube.
6. Turn the Generator ON.
3-79
REV 4 5192971--100
7. Check that the Contactor 11K2 is energized few moments after the “Prep” order.
G If it is OK, check if Contactor 11K2 is providing a good contact, if needed replace Contactor
11K2.
G If Contactor 11K2 is not energized, check +24 VDC at the coil of 11K2 (between A1 and
A2).
Note . The voltage must be verified when the Contactor is supposed to be ON (after the
acceleration time)
-- If the voltage is OK, check the coil of the Contactor by an ohmmeter. It must be around
160 Ohms. If it is not correct replace the Contactor.
-- If the voltage is not present, check 24 VDC (Delayed) between A1 of Contactor 11K2
and ground (this voltage must be present at any time).
-- If 24 VDC is not present between A1 of Contactor 11K2 and ground, check
continuity between the Interface Control Board (J5--2) and A1 of Contactor
11K2, checking it also in the aerial connector 11J7--1. Repair defective
connections.
-- If 24 VDC is present between A1 of Contactor 11K2 and ground, check the
link between A2 of Contactor 11K2 and J4--2 of the Interface DRAC Board.
If the link is not correct, repair or replace it.
If the link is correct, check low logic level at the cathode of CR13 when
Contactor 11K2 is supposed to be ON. If the low level is present check the
diode CR13, and if diode CR13 is defective replace this diode or the
Interface DRAC Board. Check also the flat cable between Interface DRAC
Board (J1) and Control DRAC Board, if the flat cable is not correct, replace
this cable.
If the flat cable is correct but you have +24 VDC between cathode of CR13
and ground, replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--17.)

3-80
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E67
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM is detected.
Stator.

position.)
3-81
REV 4 5192971--100


(mega--ohms).
Tube.
3-82
REV 4 5192971--100
11K2.
A2).
acceleration time)
connections.
this cable.

3-83
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E68
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-84
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-85
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-86
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E69
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the main winding running at 3300 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the main winding running at 3300 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-87
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-88
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-89
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E70
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the main winding running at 10000 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the main winding running at 10000 RPM is detected.
Stator.

position.)
3-90
REV 4 5192971--100


(mega--ohms).
Tube.
3-91
REV 4 5192971--100
11K2.
A2).
acceleration time)
connections.
this cable.

3-92
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E71
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM is detected.
Stator.

position.)
3-93
REV 4 5192971--100


(mega--ohms).
Tube.
3-94
REV 4 5192971--100
11K2.
A2).
acceleration time)
connections.
this cable.

3-95
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E72
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM is detected.
position.)

Manufacturer X--ray Tube Data Sheet).


3-96
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-97
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-98
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E73
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the main winding running at 10000 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the main winding running at 10000 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-99
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-100
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-101
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E74
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the main winding braking at 3300 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the main winding braking at 3300 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-102
REV 4 5192971--100
(mega--ohms).
Tube.

Storage Capacitors.

X--ray Tube.
Stator Cable.
Module.
Card DR--17.)
Module.

3-103
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E75
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-104
REV 4 5192971--100
(mega--ohms).
Tube.

Storage Capacitors.

X--ray Tube.
Stator Cable.
Card DR--18.)
DR--19.)
11. Desolder the wire marked as “12” on the Auxiliary Transformer of the LV--DRAC Module.
Check:
Module.
Card DR--17.)
Module.

3-105
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E76
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-106
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-107
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-108
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E77
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the main winding braking at 3300 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the main winding braking at 3300 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-109
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-110
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-111
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E78
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the main winding braking at 10000 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the main winding braking at 10000 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-112
REV 4 5192971--100
(mega--ohms).
Tube.

Storage Capacitors.

X--ray Tube.
Stator Cable.
Module.
Card DR--17.)
Module.

3-113
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E79
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in the auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-114
REV 4 5192971--100
(mega--ohms).
Tube.

Storage Capacitors.

X--ray Tube.
Stator Cable.
Card DR--18.)
DR--19.)
Check:
Module.
Card DR--17.)
Module.

3-115
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E80
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-116
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-117
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-118
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E81
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in the main winding braking at 10000 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the main winding braking at 10000 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-119
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-120
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-121
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E83
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Excessive current in DC Brake.

APPEARS WHEN : During Anode braking in DC voltage.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Excessive current in the main or auxiliary winding is detected.
position.)



3-122
REV 4 5192971--100
(mega--ohms).
Tube.

Storage Capacitors.

X--ray Tube.
Stator Cable.
Card DR--18.)
DR--19.)
Check:
12. On the Control DRAC Board, remove wire J1--1 (Main) and J1--4 (Auxiliary). Check:
Module.
Card DR--17.)
Module.

3-123
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E87
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 3300 RPM
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the common wire up to 3300 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-124
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-125
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-126
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E88
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in common wire running at 3300 RPM.

POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the common wire running at 3300 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-127
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-128
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-129
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E89
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.
POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in the common wire during acceleration up to 10000 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-130
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-131
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-132
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E90
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Insufficient current in common wire running at 10000 RPM.

POSIBLE CAUSES
Insufficient current in common wire running at 10000 RPM is detected.
position.)



3-133
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
Job Card DR--17.)
DR--18.)

MODULE.

11TS2--2.
3-134
REV 4 5192971--100
DR--17.)
Control DRAC Board.

3-135
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E91
DESCRIPTION : Incorrect signal measure in IPRINC (CH2).

APPEARS WHEN : In Stand-by situation.
POSIBLE CAUSES
The generator is detecting current through the main wire when it should be zero (0).

MODULE.
2. Check the voltage at TP1 and TP17 on the Control DRAC Board. Both voltages should be 0
VDC.
Note . For GND reference use the following Test Points on the Control
DRAC Board: TP2, TP4, TP12, TP13, or TP19.
G If both voltages at TP1 and TP17 are 0 VDC and the Error Code persists, replace the
Control DRAC Board. (Refer to Job Card DR--17.)
G If any voltage at TP1 and TP17 is different than 0 VDC, go to the next step.
3. Check the voltage at the following Test Points on the Control DRAC Board:
-- +5 VDC at TP14
-- +15 VDC at TP15
-- --15 VDC at TP37
G If voltages at the above Test Points are correct, replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer
G If any voltage at the above Test Points are not correct, go to the next step.
3-136
REV 4 5192971--100
4. Turn the Generator OFF and wait three (3) minutes for the Main Storage Capacitors to
discharge.
7. 7. Check the voltage at the following points on the Interface DRAC Board:
Note . For GND reference use the Terminal J2--3 on the Interface DRAC
Board.
G If voltages at the above points are correct, replace the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to Job
Card DR--17.)
G If any voltage at the above points are not correct, replace the Interface DRAC Board.

3-137
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E92
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Incorrect signal measure in IAUX (CH3).

POSIBLE CAUSES
The generator is detecting current through the auxiliary wire when it should be zero (0).

MODULE.
2. Check the voltage at TP3 and TP16 on the Control DRAC Board. Both voltages should be 0
VDC.
G If any voltage at TP3 and TP16 is different than 0 VDC, go to the next step.
-- +5 VDC at TP14
-- +15 VDC at TP15
-- --15 VDC at TP37
3-138
REV 4 5192971--100
discharge.
Board.
Card DR--17.)

3-139
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E93
DESCRIPTION : LV--DRAC: Incorrect signal measure in ICOM (CH4).

POSIBLE CAUSES
The generator is detecting current through the main wire when it should be zero (0).

MODULE.
2. Check the voltage at TP1, TP3, and TP36 on Control DRAC Board. All voltages should be 0
VDC.
G If any voltage at TP1, TP3, or TP36 is different than 0 VDC, go to the next step.
-- +5 VDC at TP14
-- +15 VDC at TP15
-- --15 VDC at TP37
3-140
REV 4 5192971--100
discharge.
Board.
Card DR--17.)

3-141
REV 4 5192971--100
ERROR CODE : E98
DESCRIPTION : DIP Switch 3024SW2-3 on ATP Console Board set for Configuration and Calibration Mode
Active.
ERROR TYPE : Informative. It allows normal operation.
APPEARS WHEN : After turning on the Control Console.
INFORMATION / SYMPTOM : “E98” appears at console display.
POSIBLE CAUSES
DIP Switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console Board set in the ON position.
1. Reset the error condition by pressing the respective button on the Console.
Keep in mind that this error will appear each time the Generator is turned OFF/ON during
service procedures (configuration, calibration, etc.) whenever DIP Switch 3024SW2-3 on the
ATP Console Board is in the ON (closed) position (for service mode allowed).
2. When servicing is finished and the Generator is ready for normal operation, turn the Generator
OFF and set DIP Switch 3024SW2-3 on ATP Console Board in the OFF (open) position
(operation mode).
3-142
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 4 DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY
JOB CARD LIST

JOB CARD DESCRIPTION
DR--1 Replacement of the Memory EPROM--U24 on the ATP Console CPU Board
DR--2 Replacement of the Microcontroller+ROM U5 on the HT Controller Board
DR--3 Replacement of the Microcontroller U17 on the Control DRAC Board
DR--4 Replacement of the ATP Console CPU Board
DR--5 Replacement of the AEC Control Board
DR--6 Replacement of the HT Controller Board
DR--7 Replacement of the Filament Control Board
DR--8 Replacement of the Interface Control Board
DR--9 Replacement of the Power Supply
DR--10 Replacement of the Inverter Module
DR--11 Replacement of the Input Rectifier Board
DR--12 Replacement of the Rectifiers
DR--13 Replacement of the Main Storage Capacitors of the High Voltage Inverter
DR--14 Replacement of the Charge / Discharge Monitor Board
DR--15 Replacement of the IPM Driver Boards
DR--16 Replacement of the IGBT
DR--17 Replacement of the Control DRAC Board
DR--18 Replacement of the Interface DRAC Board
DR--19 Replacement of the Clamping Board
DR--20 Replacement of the High Voltage Transformer
DR--21 Replacement of the AEC Adaptation Board
3-143
REV 4 5192971--100
3-144
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-1: REPLACEMENT OF THE MEMORY EPROM-U24 ON THE

SUBASSEMBLY : MEMORY EPROM-U24 ON THE ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD (A3024--21)
TOOLS : Standard Service Tool Kit and Anti-static Protection Device.
PROCEDURE
U24
BEFORE REPLACING THIS PART BE SURE THAT THE

GENERATOR AND THE ELECTRICAL ROOM CABINET (MAIN
DISCONNECT) ARE POWERED OFF (LOCK-OUT / TAG-OUT).

DOCUMENT.
ALSO, FOLLOW THE GENERAL CAUTIONS INDICATED IN

SECTION 1.2, “GENERAL CAUTIONS,” IN THIS CHAPTER.
Use the Anti-static Protection Device for handling or

replacing any board or electronic part.
3-145
REV 4 5192971--100
1. Check that the new EPROM--U24 has “(U24)” written on its label.
2. Check that the software code written in the EPROM-U24 label is correct.
3. Replace the old Memory EPROM--U24 on the ATP Console CPU Board
with the new one. Insert it in the correct position.
4. Set the DIP switch A3024SW2--3 of the ATP Console CPU Board to the
ON position. This enables the Service Mode.
5. Turn the generator ON. Error Code E10 will be displayed a few seconds
after the unit start-up. This is shown because the EPROM-U24 has been
replaced.
6. Reset the Error Code indication from the Console by pressing and
holding the Error Reset button until Error Code E10 disappears. After this
the normal start-up will be completed.
7. Turn the generator OFF and set DIP switch A3024SW2--3 of the ATP
Console CPU Board to the OFF position. This enables the normal
Application Mode. This will disable the operator from entering the Service
Mode.
3-146
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-2: REPLACEMENT OF THE MICROCONTROLLER+ROM U5

ON THE HT CONTROLLER BOARD
SUBASSEMBLY : MICROCONTROLLER+ROM U5 ON THE HT CONTROLLER BOARD

(A3000--33)
PROCEDURE
U5


DOCUMENT.

3-147
REV 4 5192971--100

1. Check that the new Microcontroller+ROM U5 has “(U5)” written on its

label.
2. Replace the old Microcontroller+ROM U5 on the HT Controller Board
with the new one. Insert it in the correct position.
3-148
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-3: REPLACEMENT OF THE MICROCONTROLLER U17 ON

THE CONTROL DRAC BOARD
SUBASSEMBLY : MICROCONTROLLER U17 ON THE CONTROL DRAC BOARD

(A3243--04)
PROCEDURE
U17
Board Reference

GENERATOR AND ELECTRICAL ROOM CABINET (MAIN
DISCONNECT) ARE POWER OFF (LOCK--OUT / TAG--OUT).

DOCUMENT.

Use the Anti- static Protection Device for handling or

3-149
REV 4 5192971--100
1. Check that the new Microcontroller U17 has “(U17)” written on its label.
2. Replace the old Microcontroller U17 on the Control DRAC Board with the
new one. Insert it in the correct position.
4. Ten (10) seconds after turning the generator ON LED DL1, located on the
Control DRAC Board, must be switched off indicating that
Microcontroller--U17 is operating normally.
3-150
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-4: REPLACEMENT OF THE ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD
SUBASSEMBLY : ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD A3024--21
PROCEDURE
SW1 SW3 SW2 Board SW4

JP13 Reference
JP4 J6
J13 J1 J2 J3 J5 J7 J8
J4
JP5
JP7, 8, 21, & 22
J9
J14 J10, J11, J16 J12 J15
U18 AEC CONTROL PCB AREA

U23 U24


DOCUMENT.


3-151
REV 4 5192971--100
1. In the old ATP Console CPU Board:
a. It is recommended to remove the Memories U18, U23, and U24

from the old ATP Console CPU Board for installing in the new
board.
The EPROM-U24 has the software of the ATP Console CPU

Board. Note the software code wrote in the EPROM-U24 label.
The Non-Volatile RAM U23 has the record of the exposures

performed with the X-ray Tube.
The EEPROM-U18 has the workstation configuration.
b. Label and remove all board connectors.
c. Disconnect and remove the AEC Control Board if this option is

present. (Refer to Job Card DR-5, “Replacement of the AEC
Control Board.”)
2. Remove the Allen screws used to secure the board.

3. Replace the old ATP Console CPU Board with the new one and fasten
it using the Allen screws removed before.
4. Set the position of the following DIP switches and jumpers in the new ATP
Console CPU Board:
3024SW1 POSITION OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
All DIP switches -
All DIP switches -
3-152
REV 4 5192971--100
GENERATOR BOARD JUMPERS POSITION
JP1, JP2 and JP3 in “B” (soldered)
JP4 in “A” (installed)
JP5 in “B” (installed)
JP6 in “A” (soldered)
Connector J8 configured for RS232 so:

JP9, JP10 and JP11 in “A” (soldered)
ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD JP7, JP8, JP21 and JP22 do not matter jumpers
(A3024--21) position (in “A” soldered)
JP12 removed
JP13 (installed)
JP14 (soldered)
JP15, JP16, JP17 and JP18 removed
5. In the new ATP Console CPU Board:
a. If this option is present, connect and install the AEC Control Board
removed earlier. (Refer to Job Card DR-5, “Replacement of the
AEC Control Board.”)
b. Connect all board connectors.
c. Install the previously removed Memories U18, U23, and U24.
6. Set DIP switch A3024SW2--3 of the ATP Console CPU Board to the ON
position. This enables the Service Mode.
8. Five (5) seconds after turning the generator ON, LED DS1 must light ON
permanently and LED DS2 must blink on the ATP Console CPU Board.
(Also, refer to Section 2.2, “Microprocessors and General Operation.”)
If not, there is a problem with one of the old Memories (U18, U23, & U24).
Turn the generator OFF and replace these memories one by one with
new ones. Check this step again until both LEDs (DS1 and DS2) light
properly.
a. If EPROM--U24 is new, check that it has “(U24)” written on its label.
b. If NVRAM-U23 is new, the record of the exposures performed with

the X-ray tube is reset to zero (0).
c. If EEPROM-U18 is new, the workstation configuration must be

checked and/or configured again during step 10.
3-153
REV 4 5192971--100
9. Error Code E10 will display a few seconds after the unit start-up. Reset
the Error Code indication from the console by pressing and holding the
Error Reset button until Error Code E10 disappears. After this the normal
start-up will be completed.
10. If EEPROM-U18 is new, check and/or configure the workstations as
described in Section 3.5, “Workstations Configuration,” of Chapter 4,
“Configuration and Calibration.” Then update the backup file.
Note . Record the Workstation configuration in the Data Book (refer to

Appendix A, “Data Book,” at the end of Chapter 4, “Configuration
and Calibration”).
11. Turn the generator OFF and set DIP switch A3024SW2--3 of the ATP
Console CPU Board in the OFF position. This enables the normal
Mode.
3-154
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-5: REPLACEMENT OF THE AEC CONTROL BOARD
SUBASSEMBLY : AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3604-05)
TOOLS : Standard Service Tool Kit, Anti-static Protection Device, Flat Field Phantom
(GE Healthcare part number 2281087 or equivalent; used for AEC Calibration),
and Dose Probe Holder (GE Healthcare part number 5198282 or equivalent;
used for AEC Calibration).
PROCEDURE
R10 JP3 R13 R12
R11
JP4
R14
JP2
JP1
J1
(see reverse)
Board Reference


DOCUMENT.

3-155
REV 4 5192971--100

Note . The AEC Control Board is mounted directly onto the ATP Console
CPU Board.
1. Set the position of the following jumpers in the new AEC Control Board:
JP1 in “C” (installed)

AEC CONTROL BOARD
JP2 and JP3 in “A” (installed)
(A3604--05)
2. Remove the Allen screw used to secure the AEC Control Board to the
ATP Console CPU Board. Hold the nut in place to avoid stripping.
3. Disconnect the flat cable from the AEC Control Board. Then disconnect
the pin connector located at the backside of the board by carefully lifting
it perpendicular from the ATP Console CPU Board.
4. Replace the old board with the new one. Do not forget to insert the spacer
between the boards. Connector J1 on the ATP Console CPU Board may
have more connections than the AEC Control Board. Ensure that pin 1
(J1) on the AEC Control Board lines up perfectly with pin 1 (J12) on the
ATP Console CPU Board if the size or number of connection points are
not the same.
5. Re-install the Allen screw.
7. Perform the AEC Calibration as described in Section 6.7, “AEC

Calibration,” in Chapter 4, “Configuration and Calibration.”
8. Turn the generator OFF.
3-156
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-6: REPLACEMENT OF THE HT CONTROLLER BOARD
SUBASSEMBLY : HT CONTROLLER BOARD A3000--33
PROCEDURE
Board Reference Potentiometers SW2
P3 P2 P4
GND
TP2(+5V) GND
TP3(+12V) TP4 (--12V)
TP5 (mA)
P1
TP7 (kV)
P5
U23 U19 U5 U3
Pot. Adjustment Data


DOCUMENT.

3-157
REV 4 5192971--100

1. On the old HT Controller Board:
a. It is recommended to remove the Memories U5 and U3 from the

old HT Controller Board for re-installing them in the new board.
The EPROM-U5 has the software of the HT Controller Board.

Note the software code wrote in the EPROM-U5 label.
The EEPROM-U3 has the Configuration and Calibration data of

the generator.
b. Label and remove all board connectors.
2. Remove the Allen screws used to secure the board.

3. Replace the old HT Controller Board with the new one and install it using
the Allen screws removed before.
4. Set the position of the following DIP switches and jumpers in the new
HT Controller Board:
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
JP1, JP2, JP3, JP5 and JP6 in “2” (soldered)

HT CONTROLLER BOARD
(A3000--33) JP4 in “1” (soldered)
5. In the new HT Controller Board:
a. Connect all board connectors.
b. Install the previously removed Memories U5 and U3.
3-158
REV 4 5192971--100
6. Turn the system ON.
7. After turning the system ON, the LED DS1 located on the HT Controller
Board blinks fast during power up, then slows to a steady blink of about
two (2) per second. This indicates that Microprocessor U5 is operating
normally. (Also, refer to Section 2.2, “Microprocessors and General
Operation” in this chapter.)
If it is correct follow with step 8. If not, there is a problem with the old
EEPROM U3. Turn the system OFF and replace EEPROM U3 as
described below. Then check that LED DS1 lights properly during power
up and after.
a. Turn the system OFF.
b. Set DIP switch A3024SW2--3 of the ATP Console CPU Board to

the ON position. This enables the Service Mode.
c. Turn the system ON.
d. If EEPROM-U3 is new, perform a Restore operation of the

Generator Configuration and Calibration data from the Magic PC
application using the CD / USB where the backup files are stored.
All the Configuration and Calibration data are noted in Appendix

A, “Data Book,” at the end of Chapter 4, “Configuration and
Calibration.” If Restore operation is not possible, enter the data
manually using Manual Calibration from the Generator Service
Mode (GSM). (Refer to Chapter 4, “Configuration and
Calibration.”)
8. Once the whole system has started-up, if Error Code E01 or E10 appears
on the Console and the HT Controller Board has the old EEPROM U3
installed, replace EEPROM U3 as described in step 7.
9. Turn the system OFF.
10. Set DIP switch A3000SW2--2 to the ON position.
3-159
REV 4 5192971--100
12. Check the period adjustment of the board. R29 and R49 are used to
adjust the period of the modulator for the inverter and filament, U19-5 and
U23-5 respectively. Using an oscilloscope at U19-5 or U23-5, the period
can be adjusted using these two (2) potentiometers if necessary.
Visually check the original Board Potentiometer Adjustments (pot

adjustments), which should be marked as shown in the photo above (Pot.
Adjustment Data), for the Inverter period in microseconds. If one or both
period measurement markings are missing, refer to the “Manufacturer
Original Final Test” documentation that came with the equipment.
The table below should serve as a guideline in case markings and

documentation are not available:
Component -- Pin System Configuration Period
U19-5 Heavy Duty Cycle Inverters (Three-Phase Generator) 48μs (45μs )
U23-5 Filament Control Board 3004-10 80μs
-- During the final system test, certain U19 components are set to 37 or 45, depending on the system.

14. Set DIP switch A3000SW2--2 to the OFF position.
15. Only if EEPROM-U3 is new, perform Section 5.2.2, “Programming of
RAD Filament Setting Time,” of Chapter 4, “Configuration and
Calibration.”
17. Perform the Planned Maintenance procedures for Radiographic
Parameters. (Refer to Section 2.7, “Radiographic Parameters,” of
Chapter 2, “Planned Maintenance.”)
18. If the Configuration and Calibration data are not correct, perform a
complete Configuration and Calibration of the system. (Refer to Chapter
4, “Configuration and Calibration.”)
19. Turn the system OFF and set DIP switch A3024SW2--3 of the ATP
Console CPU Board to the OFF position. This enables the normal
Mode.
3-160
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-7: REPLACEMENT OF THE FILAMENT CONTROL BOARD
SUBASSEMBLY : FILAMENT CONTROL BOARD A3004--10
TOOLS : Standard Service Tool Kit, Anti-static Protection Device, Digital mAs Meter
(GE Healthcare part number 46--194427P435 or equivalent), and
Oscilloscope (Tektronics 486 or similar).
PROCEDURE
Board Reference
W1


DOCUMENT.

3-161
REV 4 5192971--100

1. Set the position of the following jumpers in the new Filament Control
Board:
FILAMENT CONTROL BOARD

W1 in “A” (installed)
(A3004--10)
2. On the old Filament Control Board, label and remove all board
connectors.
3. Remove the Allen screws used to secure the board to the cabinet.
4. Replace the old board with the new one.
5. Re-install the Allen screws.
6. Re-install all board connectors.
7. With the system powered OFF, verify or set:
G DIP switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board in the OFF

position (enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).
G DIP switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in the ON

G Remove the link between the banana plug connections on the HV

Transformer. Connect the mAs Meter (GE Healthcare part number
46--194427P435 or equivalent) to the banana plug connections to
measure mA or mAs (Digital mA Loops).
the mA readings but should not be used to calibrate the unit.
These test points must be checked with scope:

- from 100 mA, 1 volt = 100 mA
8. Perform Section 2.7.5, “Test for Digital mA Loop Open,” of Chapter 2,

“Planned Maintenance.”
3-162
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-8: REPLACEMENT OF THE INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD
SUBASSEMBLY : INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD A3009--11
PROCEDURE
W1
Board Reference
W2
W6
W7
ZONE A
W5
ZONE B
W4
W3


DOCUMENT.

TURN THE GENERATOR OFF AND SHUT DOWN THE POWER

SUPPLY FROM THE ELECTRICAL CABINET.
3-163
REV 4 5192971--100

1. Set the position of the following jumpers in the new Interface Control
Board:
W1 in “2--3” (installed)
INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD
(A3009--11)
W3 to W8 removed
2. On the old Interface Control Board, label and remove all board
connectors.
3. Remove the Allen screws used to secure the board to the cabinet.
4. Replace the old board with the new board.
5. Re-install the Allen screws.
6. Re-install all board connectors.
3-164
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-9: REPLACEMENT OF THE POWER SUPPLY
SUBASSEMBLY : POWER SUPPLY
TOOLS : Standard Service Tool Kit, Anti-static Protection Device, and Digital
Multimeter.
PROCEDURE
Soldered
Connections
Plastic Cover Mount
Soldered
Connections
+12V adjust --12V adjust +5V adjust


DOCUMENT.


3-165
REV 4 5192971--100
1. Remove the two (2) screws from the plastic cover mount and take off the
plastic cover.
2. Note and label the positions of the wires soldered to the Board,
Transformer, and Fuse Holder. Unsolder these wires.
3. Remove the Allen screws used to secure the power supply to the cabinet.
4. Replace the old power module with the new one and secure it with the
Allen screws removed before.
5. Solder all the wires previously unsoldered to their respective points.
6. Remove the fuse from the old power supply and insert it into the new
power supply.
8. With a Digital Multimeter measure between:

G P2-3 (+) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the
voltage at this point is +5 (±0.2 VDC). If required, adjust the
voltage with the +5 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power
Supply Board.
G P2-2 (+) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the
voltage at this point is +12 (±0.1 VDC). If required, adjust the
voltage with the +12 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power
Supply Board.
G P2-1 (--) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the
voltage at this point is --12 (±0.1 VDC). If required, adjust the
voltage with the --12 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power
Supply Board.
3-166
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-10: REPLACEMENT OF THE INVERTER MODULE
SUBASSEMBLY : INVERTER MODULE
PROCEDURE
Charge / Discharge Boards
IPM Driver Boards
Input Rectifier Board
GND
Seen from the bottom
Power
Cables
OUT

Power
Cables
IN
GND
Seen from the rear
3-167
REV 4 5192971--100

DIODES (LEDS) ON THE CHARGE- DISCHARGE MONITOR
BOARDS ARE OFF, APPROXIMATELY THREE (3) MINUTES


DOCUMENT.


1. Remove the Generator Cover.

2. Remove the Allen screws that secure the Front Panel to the Generator
Frame and open the Front Panel.
3. Remove the four (4) Allen screws that secure the LV--DRAC Module to
the Generator Frame and take out the LV--DRAC Module.
Inverter Module
Front Panel
LV DRAC Module
3-168
REV 4 5192971--100
4. Label and disconnect the following connectors / wires (refer to illustration

below):
G Tube Stator wires connected to 11TS2.
G GND wire connected to the LV--DRAC Module.
G Aerial Connector J7.
G Connector J4 at the Control DRAC Board.
G Wires J2--1 and J2--2 at the Interface DRAC Board.
J7
Stops of
Tube Stator wires
LV--DRAC
connected to 11TS2
Module
J2--1 and J2--2
GND Wire J4
5. Remove the two (2) Stops at the rear side of the LV--DRAC Module and then remove
the LV--DRAC Module from the Cabinet.
6. Remove the protective plastic safety cover from the front of the Inverter Module.
7. Disconnect the Cables from the IPM Drivers (J1 & J2) and the Charge / Discharge
Boards (P1 & P2).
P1 & P2
300 V
J1 & J2
Cable to Starter (1&2)
3-169
REV 4 5192971--100
8. Label and disconnect the Cables from the HV Transformer (P1, P2--Shield, and P3).
P2--Shield
P1
P3
9. At the back side of the Cabinet remove the two (2) lower screws that secure the
Upper Back Cover of the Cabinet to the Generator Support. Remove the Upper
Back Cover.
10. Carefully remove the Allen screws and the Back Cover of the Generator.
11. From the backside of the system, disconnect the power cables from the input
rectifier holding the hexagonal spacer in place while unscrewing the connection as
shown in the photo below.
Hexagonal
Spacer
3-170
REV 4 5192971--100
12. With a socket wrench, disconnect the GND (yellow and green wires) on the bottom
inside of the chassis as shown in the photo below.
13. The most practical way of dismounting the Inverter Module from the Generator is
by first removing the two (2) lower screws and then loosening the two (2) upper
screws.
Allen Screws to secure the

Inverter Module
3-171
REV 4 5192971--100
14. Brace the module with one (1) hand (to keep the module from falling and
potentially damaging the components underneath) while removing the
already loosened upper screws of the inverter module.
This module is heavy and must be removed through the front

of the cabinet.
15. Install the new Inverter Module, attaching the screws with the nuts
removed earlier.
16. Connect to the Inverter Module all the wires and connectors removed in
the previous steps.
MAKE SURE THAT ALL CONNECTIONS ARE NOT ONLY

SECURE BUT ALSO CORRECT.
17. Re--install the Protective Plastic Safety Cover at the front of the Inverter
Module.
18. Re--install the LV--DRAC Module into the Generator. Install the two (2)
Stops at the rear side of the LV--DRAC Module. Insert the LV--DRAC
Module and secure it to the Generator Frame.
19. Connect in the LV--DRAC Module all the wires and connectors removed
in the previous steps.
MAKE SURE THAT ALL CONNECTIONS ARE NOT ONLY

SECURE BUT ALSO CORRECT.
20. Close the Front Panel and secure it to the Generator Frame.
21. Re--install the Back Cover of the Generator, the Upper Back Cover of the
Cabinet, and finally the Generator Cover.
3-172
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-11: REPLACEMENT OF THE INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD
SUBASSEMBLY : INPUT RECTIFIER (A3255-01).
PROCEDURE
Components for
3 Phase Systems
Board Reference



DOCUMENT.

SECTION 1.2, “GENERAL CAUTIONS.”

3-173
REV 4 5192971--100
1. Remove the Inverter Module as described in the Job Card DR--10 from
steps 1 to 14.
2. Position the Module in order to access the Input Rectifier Board.
3. Label and disconnect the DC BUS wires (+) and (--).
DC BUS Cable WIRE --
DC BUS Cable WIRE +
4. Remove the five (5) Hexagon shaped--spacers and the four (4) Allen
screws used to fix the Board to the Rectifiers behind.
5. Replace the old board with the new one.
Before securing the new Input Rectifier Board make sure that
the three (3) washers are installed under the Board (between
the Rectifiers and the Board) at the Power Cable terminal
connections as indicated in the illustration below.
Washers between
Board and Rectifiers
3-174
REV 4 5192971--100
6. Re--install the four (4) Allen screws and the five (5) Hexagon
shaped--spacers.
7. Connect the DC BUS wires (+) and (--) removed before.
8. Re--install the Inverter Module as described in Job Card DR--10 from step
15 to the end of the process.
3-175
REV 4 5192971--100
3-176
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-12: REPLACEMENT OF THE RECTIFIERS
SUBASSEMBLY : RECTIFIERS ON THE IGBT MODULE.
PROCEDURE
Bar Codes



DOCUMENT.


3-177
REV 4 5192971--100
steps 1 to 14.
2. Position the Module in order to access the Input Rectifier Board.
3. Label and disconnect the DC BUS wires (+) and (--).
DC BUS Cable WIRE --
DC BUS Cable WIRE +
4. Remove the five (5) Hexagon shaped--spacers and the four (4) Allen
screws used to fix the Board to the Rectifiers behind.
Before securing the new Input Rectifier Board make sure that
the three (3) washers are installed under the Board (between
the Rectifiers and the Board) at the Power Cable terminal
connections as indicated in the illustration below.
Washers between
Board and Rectifiers
3-178
REV 4 5192971--100
5. Remove the Input Rectifier Board to access the Rectifiers below. Note
the original position of the Board for reference.
6. Each Rectifier is fixed to the Module by four washers and two nuts. Note
the orientation of the Rectifiers. Remove and replace the Rectifiers
respecting the original orientation as to not interfere with the Polarity of
the Unit.
7. Re--install the Input Rectifier Board, ensuring that its position matches its
original placement.
8. Re--install the four (4) Allen screws and the five (5) Hexagon
shaped--spacers.
9. Connect the DC BUS wires (+) and (--) removed before.
3-179
REV 4 5192971--100
3-180
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-13: REPLACEMENT OF THE MAIN STORAGE CAPACITORS OF

THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER
SUBASSEMBLY : MAIN STORAGE CAPACITORS.
PROCEDURE
Main Storage Capacitors

of the Inverter Module

3-181
REV 4 5192971--100


DOCUMENT.


steps 1 to 14.
2. Position the Module face upward in order to access the screws that
secure each Storage Capacitor to the DC BUS. Remove the two (2)
screws that fix the Capacitor to be replaced to the DC BUS. If these
screws serve as connections for wires from the Charge / Discharge
Monitor Board, mark the respective wire(s).
Allen Screws
Mark these wires as needed
Allen Screws Tie Wraps
3. While holding the Capacitor to be replaced, cut the Tie Wrap that holds
the Capacitor to the Module.
3-182
REV 4 5192971--100
4. Place a new Tie Wrap through the holes provided in the Module.
5. Install the new Storage Capacitor, securing it to the DC BUS with the two
(2) Allen screws. Reconnect any wires removed from the Charge /
Discharge Monitor Board, if needed.
MAKE SURE THAT THE DC BUS WIRES (+) AND (- ) ARE

CONNECTED IN THE CORRECT SCREWS AND SECURED.
Allen Screws DC BUS (+) DC BUS (--)
6. Secure the new Storage Capacitor to the module by securing the Tie
Wrap.
3-183
REV 4 5192971--100
3-184
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-14: REPLACEMENT OF THE CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR

BOARD
SUBASSEMBLY : CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARD (A3212-XX).
PROCEDURE
DS1
P2
Board Reference P1
DC BUS Connection Wire (+) DC BUS Connection Wire (--)



DOCUMENT.

3-185
REV 4 5192971--100

3. Remove the Protective Plastic Safety Cover from the front of the Inverter
Module.
4. In the old Charge / Discharge Monitor Board, label and remove all Board
connectors and note their position.
P1 and P2
DC BUS (+)
DC BUS (--)
5. Label and remove the DC BUS wires (+) and (--) connected to the Board
and note their position.
6. Remove the Allen screws used to secure the Board to the Inverter
Module.
7. Replace the old Board with the new one.
8. Re--install the Allen screws.
3-186
REV 4 5192971--100
9. Re--install the DC BUS wires (+) and (--).
MAKE SURE THAT THE DC BUS WIRES (+) AND (- ) ARE

CONNECTED IN THE CORRECT SCREWS AND SECURED.
11. Check for correct operation that:
a. LED DS1 is ON.
b. Measure the voltage in Resistor R4. It must be 0 VDC.
c. Turn the Generator OFF and wait three (3) minutes for the Main
Storage Capacitors to discharge.

DIODES (LEDS) ON THE CHARGE- DISCHARGE MONITOR
d. LED DS1 is OFF.
e. Measure the voltage in Resistor R4, it must be 0 VDC or close to

0 VDC (less than 10 VDC).
f. Measure the voltage at DC BUS, it must be 0 VDC or close to 0

VDC (less than 10 VDC).
Module.
14. Re--install the Generator Cover.
3-187
REV 4 5192971--100
3-188
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-15: REPLACEMENT OF THE IPM DRIVER BOARDS
SUBASSEMBLY : IPM DRIVER BOARDS (A3063--03)
PROCEDURE
Board Reference



DOCUMENT.


3-189
REV 4 5192971--100
Module.
4. On the old IPM Driver Board label and remove Board connectors J1 and
J2.
J1 and J2
5. Remove the two (2) Allen screws used to secure the Board to the Inverter
Module.
IGBT’s Connector Pins
Allen Screws
The IGBT’s Connector Pins inserted on the backside of the

IPM Boards are fragile. Be careful when removing and
installing the replacement board.
3-190
REV 4 5192971--100
6. Remove the IPM Driver Board by pulling them gently and perpendicular
from the Module.
7. Replace the old Board with the new one. When installing the new IPM
Driver Board, ensure that the IGBT’s Connection Pins line up with the
connectors on the Board.
8. Re--install the Allen screws.
9. Re--install the Board connectors J1 and J2 to the Board.
Module.
3-191
REV 4 5192971--100
3-192
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-16: REPLACEMENT OF THE IGBT
SUBASSEMBLY : IGBT S ON THE INVERTER MODULE.
PROCEDURE



DOCUMENT.


3-193
REV 4 5192971--100
Both IGBTs are located at the middle of the Inverter Module (at the back of the
Coil (L2), IPM Driver Boards, and DC Bus)
Coil (L2)
Charge / Discharge
Monitor Boards
IPM Driver Boards
TWO (2) IGBTS LOCATED

UNDERNEATH
Module.
4. Label and disconnect the Cables from the IPM Drivers (J1 & J2) and the
Charge / Discharge Monitor Boards (P1 & P2).
P1 and P2
J1 J2
3-194
REV 4 5192971--100
5. Remove the Allen screws, then label and disconnect the DC BUS wires
from the Charge/Discharge Monitor Boards secured with round terminals
to the Main Storage Capacitors. Take note of the wire positions and mark
the respective wire if necessary.
Allen Screws DC BUS Wires
6. Label and remove the wire connections of the DC BUS / Coil at the upper
corner of theCoil (L2), then re--install thewashers and nuts. Take note of
the wire positions and mark the respective wire if necessary.
7. Remove the two (2) Standoffs (hexagonal spacers) that secure the Plate
(with the Coil (L2) and the Charge / Discharge Monitor Boards). Then
remove this assembly (Plate, Coil and Charge / Discharge Monitor
Boards) and the two (2) Standoffs (hexagonal spacers) located under it.
DC BUS -- Coil
Wire Connection
Standoffs
3-195
REV 4 5192971--100
8. Remove the two (2) Allen screws used to secure each IPM Driver Board
to the Inverter Module.
Allen Screws

IPM Boards are fragile. Be careful when removing the
replacement board.
9. Remove both IPM Driver Boards by pulling them gently and

perpendicular from the Module.
10. Remove all the Allen screws that secure the three (3) Capacitors (2 Micro
/ 1000 V) on the DC BUS. Then remove the three (3) Capacitors and the
wires connected to the DC BUS. Take note of the wire positions and mark
the respective wire if necessary.
DC BUS
Capacitors (2 Micro / 1000 V)
3-196
REV 4 5192971--100
11. Remove the rest of the screws and the DC BUS (metallic rail) over both
IGBT.
IGBT
12. Label and disconnect the remaining connections to the IGBT and remove
the screws that fix the IGBT to the Heat Sink. Take note of the IGBT and
wire positions and mark the respective wire if necessary.
13. Install the new IGBT keeping a thin layer of semiconductor silicone paste
between the IGBT and the Heat Sink. Secure the IGBT to the Heat Sink
with the removed Allen Screws and connect to the IGBT the previously
removed wires.
14. Re--install the DC BUS (metallic rail) over both IGBT.
15. Re--install the three (3) Capacitors (2 Micro / 1000 V) and the removed
wires on the DC BUS.
DC BUS
Capacitors (2 Micro / 1000 V)
3-197
REV 4 5192971--100
16. Re--install the IPM Driver Boards. Ensure that the IGBT’s Connection
Pins line up with the connectors on the Board.

IPM Boards are fragile. Be careful when installing the Board.
17. Secure the IPM Driver Boards with the two (2) Allen screws.
Allen Screws
18. Re--install and secure the assembly (Plate, Coil (L2) and Charge /
Discharge Monitor Boards) to the Inverter Module by placing the two (2)
Standoffs (hexagonal spacers) located under it and the two (2) Standoffs
(hexagonal spacers) over it.
19. Re--install the wire connections of the DC BUS / Coil at the upper corner
of the Coil (L2).
DC BUS -- Coil
Wire Connection
Standoffs
3-198
REV 4 5192971--100
20. Connect the DC BUS wires from the Charge / Discharge Monitor Boards
secured with Round Terminals to the Main Storage Capacitors.
Allen Screws DC BUS Wires
21. Connect the Cables to the IPM Drivers (J1 & J2) and the Charge /
Discharge Monitor Boards (P1 & P2).
P1 and P2
J1 J2
Module.
23. Close the Generator Front Panel and re--install the Allen screws that
secure the Front Panel to the Generator Frame.
3-199
REV 4 5192971--100
3-200
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-17: REPLACEMENT OF THE CONTROL DRAC BOARD
SUBASSEMBLY : CONTROL DRAC BOARD (A3243-XX).
PROCEDURE
SW1
SW2
J2 SW3
SW4
J1
J3
Board Reference U17


DOCUMENT.

Use the Anti-static Protection Device for handling when

1. Note the actual setting of the jumpers on the board.
2. Label and remove all wires and connectors on the board.
3. Remove the four (4) Allen screws that secure the board to the cabinet.
3-201
REV 4 5192971--100
5. Replace the four (4) Allen screws.
6. Replace all wires and connectors previously removed.
7. Set all jumpers to their original position (see Step 1).
8. Remove U17 from the old board and place onto the new board.
9. Turn the electrical cabinet and generator ON.
10. Make a functional check of acceleration, running and braking times

and visually check the rotation of the anode through the window.
11. Make a functional check of the equipment.
12. Note in the Log Book the cause and the date of the replacement and fix
an adhesive label beside the new board indicating the date and name of
the field engineer in order to give the maximum info.
3-202
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-18: REPLACEMENT OF THE INTERFACE DRAC-HT
SUBASSEMBLY : INTERFACE DRAC--HF (A3240-XX).
PROCEDURE
DS1
Board Reference
High DC Voltage IN
J2



DOCUMENT.

3-203
REV 4 5192971--100
THE LED DS1 BEGINS TO DIM DURING DISCHARGE AND IS

OFF WHEN COMPLETELY DISCHARGED. NEVERTHELESS,
ENSURE THAT DC VOLTAGE IS NOT PRESENT AT J2-1 & J2-2
BEFORE CONTINUING WITH THE REASSEMBLY.

ENSURE THAT LED DS1 IS ON WHEN THE SYSTEM IS ON.
TURN OFF THE POWER FROM THE ELECTRICAL CABINET

AND WAIT AT LEAST THREE (3) MINUTES FOR THE POWER
MODULE TO COMPLETELY DISCHARGE.
1. Label and remove all wires and connectors on the board.
3. Replace the old board with the new one and secure it to the chassis with
the four (4) Allen screws.
4. Replace all previously removed connectors. Ensure that connections line

up properly, the first and the last pin are numbered to aid this task.
5. Turn the electrical cabinet and the generator ON.
6. Make a functional check of the equipment, acceleration, running and

braking times with a visual check of the rotating anode.
7. Note in the Log Book the cause and the date of the replacement and fix
an adhesive label beside the new board indicating the date and name of
the field engineer in order to give the maximum info.
3-204
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-19: REPLACEMENT OF THE CLAMPING BOARD
SUBASSEMBLY : CLAMPING BOARD (A3109-XX).
PROCEDURE
Board Reference


DOCUMENT.


3-205
REV 4 5192971--100
1. Label and remove all wires on the board.
2. Remove the four (4) screws that secure the board to the cabinet.
5. Replace all wires previously removed.
6. Turn the electrical cabinet and the generator ON.
8. Note in the Log Book the cause and date of the replacement and fix an
adhesive label beside the new board indicating the date and name of the
field engineer in order to give maximum info.
3-206
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-20: REPLACEMENT OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
SUBASSEMBLY : HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
PROCEDURE


DOCUMENT.


3-207
REV 4 5192971--100
1. Label and remove all wires and cables from the HV Transformer. These
wires from the Inverter Module are P1, P3, and “Shield” (SHLD). The
ground wire (GND) is directly connected to the chassis.
2. Replace the old HV Transformer with the new one and replace all
connections previously removed in Step 1.
Note . Do not open the oil cover as the oil level does not need to be
checked in this type of HV Transformer.
3. Power the electrical cabinet and then the system ON.
4. Make a check with a few mA and kV settings and recalibrate the system
if necessary following the calibration procedures for kV Loop, Digital mA
Loop Closed and Digital mA Loop (both Focal Spots) detailed in the
Calibration Chapter of the Service Manual.
5. Return the faulty HV Transformer to the factory.
field engineer in order to give the maximum info.
3-208
REV 4 5192971--100
Job Card DR-21: REPLACEMENT OF THE AEC ADAPTATION BOARD
SUBASSEMBLY : AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263-XX)
PROCEDURE
JP10
JP9
Setup Jumpers
R8
R11
R5
R2
Board Reference
JP11
JP12


DOCUMENT.


3-209
REV 4 5192971--100
1. Note the actual setting of the jumpers on the board. Their configuration
depends on the ion chamber setup with the system. The table below will
help you with this task. This is the same table from the Data Book chapter
in the Service Manual. See Schematic A3263--xx in the Service Manual
for more information.
JUMPERS POSITION
JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8
JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6
JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
JP9 (IC1)
JP10 (IC2)
JP11 (IC3)
JP12 (IC4)
2. Label and remove all connectors to the board.
6. Replace all connectors previously removed.
7. Set jumpers to their original positions (see Step 1). In case jumpers 9 - 12
have come in different positions to those on the previous board, set them
to their necessary positions and ensure a proper ion chamber output
according to the table below. If the jumpers are in the same position,
Ion chambers output has to be 0 VDC when there is no radiation

(no--Offset Adjustment). If an ion chamber output has an offset, it must
be adjusted to 0 VDC with the respective Potentiometer. The table below
will aid with any necessary adjustment.
JUMPERS POSITION
ION CHAMBER OUTPUT
JP9 (IC1) JP10 (IC2) JP11 (IC3) JP12 (IC4)
NO--OFFSET ADJUSTMENT A A A A
OFFSET ADJUSTMENT B B B B
TEST POINT AND POTENTIOMETER
TP1 - R11 TP2 - R8 TP4 - R2 TP12 - R5
(ONLY IF JUMPER IS IN “B” POSITION)
3-210
REV 4 5192971--100
8. Power the electrical cabinet and generator ON.
9. Make several exposures with different AEC technique settings in order

to ensure a correct selection.
field engineer to give maximum info.
3-211
REV 4 5192971--100
3-212
REV 4 5192971--100
CHAPTER 4
CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION
4-1
REV 4 5192971--100
4-2
REV 4 5192971--100
IMPORTANT NOTE
THIS GENERATOR HAS BEEN CONFIGURED, CALIBRATED, AND TESTED

BY THE MANUFACTURER, EXCEPT FOR AEC PROCEDURES.
DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION IT IS NECESSARY TO PERFORM AN MA

AUTO CALIBRATION AND AEC CALIBRATION AS OUTLINED IN SECTIONS
6.5.1, “AUTO--CALIBRATION OF DIGITAL MA LOOP OPEN,” AND 6.7, “AEC
CALIBRATION,” IN THIS CHAPTER.
Configuration provides the initial settings for extended memory and checkout
procedures that must be carried out before making X-ray exposures. When the
initial setup and checkout has been completed the generator will be ready for
calibration.
Calibration information and procedures to perform all the adjustments required

to establish optimal performance of this generator are contained in this chapter.
Some configuration and calibration data are entered in digital form and stored
in a non-volatile memory chip (U3-EEPROM) located on the HT Controller
Board, thus no battery back-up is required.

AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF. REFER TO CHAPTER 1
FOR SAFETY INFORMATION.

DOCUMENT.
Note . Configuration and Calibration procedures must be performed in

the order listed in this document.
Note . Record all the configuration settings and calibration data in the
Data Book (refer to Appendix A, “Data Book,” at the end of this
Chapter).
4-3
REV 4 5192971--100
The following test equipment is required for Configuration and Calibration:
• Standard service engineer’s tool kit.
• Calculator.
• Non-invasive kVp Meter (Kiethley model 35080A, GE Healthcare part

number 2109730 or equivalent).
• Digital mAs Meter (GE Healthcare part number 46--194427P435 or

equivalent).
• Flat Field Phantom (GE Healthcare part number 2281087 or equivalent)

(used for Digital Detector Calibration and AEC Calibration).
• Dose Probe Holder (GE Healthcare part number 5198282 or equivalent)

(used for AEC Calibration).
1.2 GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS
1.2.1 MINIMUM CURRENT TIME PRODUCT (mAs)
• Minimum Current Time Product obtained at 0.1 s is 1 mAs.
• Minimum Current Time Product within the specified ranges of

compliance for linearity and constancy is 0.1 mAs.
4-4
REV 4 5192971--100
1.2.2 EXPOSURE ACCURACY
Note . Specified accuracy does not include test equipment accuracy.
ACCURACY
PARAMETERS
(with 12 BITS HT Controller)
kVp ± 3% (±1 kVp)
RAD mA ± 4% (±1 mA)
Exposure Time ± 2% (±0.1 ms)
1.2.3 HV FREQUENCY
The operating HV Frequency of this generator is 25 kHz / 30 kHz.
1.2.4 DUTY CYCLE
With the Toshiba E7254FX X-Ray tube: 18 exposures per hour at maximum
mAs (lapse time between exposures: three (3) min.).
4-5
REV 4 5192971--100
4-6
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 2 CONFIGURATION AND TEST SWITCHES
IMPORTANT NOTE

DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION, IT IS NECESSARY TO PERFORM AN MA

Note . Refer to Chapter 5, “Renewal Parts,” for assistance in locating the

indicated boards.
Specific versions of EPROM-U24 on the ATP Console CPU Board and

Microcontroller-U5 on the HT Controller Board are based on the generator
configuration. (Refer to Illustration 3-1.)
Illustration 3-1
EPROM and Switch locations
INTERFACE CONTROL
-- A3009
J8 3000SW2
3024SW4
U5
J7
HT CONTROLLER
--A3000
U24
POWER SUPPLY
FILAMENT
DRIVER
A3004
3024SW2
3024SW3
POWER CABINET -- FRONT PANEL
3024SW1
ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD -- A3024
4-7
REV 4 5192971--100
ATP Console DIP Switches must be configured with the generator turned OFF,
and they are read when the generator is turned ON again.
2.1 3024SW1 - ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD
Set DIP switch 3024SW1 in accordance with Table 3-1.
Table 3-1
System Configuration DIP Switch 3024SW1 on the ATP Console CPU Board
1 Normal. 60 Hz *1)
For generators with High Speed Starter Not used. (50 Hz *1) )
(LV-DRAC) always set SW1-1 to 60 Hz
Normal -- Application mode.

2 -- Exposures are inhibited when
Door Interlock Switch is opened.
3 Not used. Not used.
4 Not used. Not used.
NOTE: *1) This switch is related to the frequency of the Rotor Controller.
Set DIP switch 3024SW2 verifying that each position is set as per Table 3-2.
Table 3-2
Test DIP Switch 3024SW2 on the ATP Console CPU Board
Skips reception with the HT Controller. Use only

for troubleshooting when there is no Power
1 Normal -- Application mode.
Module. Be sure the J3 connector is not plugged
to the ATP Console CPU Board.
Tick Sound (button / command acknowledge) is Tick Sound (button / command acknowledge) is
2
not emitted by the ATP Console CPU Board. emitted by the ATP Console CPU Board.
3 Normal -- Application mode. Service Mode .
Normal -- Application mode.

4 Not used. kVp Lineal Scale Mode for kVp variation
(kVp changes one by one).
4-8
REV 4 5192971--100

DIP switch 3024SW3 is not used for configuration but all the switches must be
set in the OFF position.
DIP Switch 3024SW4 is not used for configuration but all the switches must be
set in the OFF position.
2.5 3000SW2 - HT CONTROLLER BOARD
HT Controller DIP switches can be configured while the generator is ON except

DIP switch 3000SW2-1.
Set DIP switch 3000SW2 as indicated in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3
Test DIP Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board in the Power Module
THE kVp OUTPUT OF THE HV TRANSFORMER WILL BE

WHATEVER IS SET BY THE CONSOLE. IF THE X-RAY TUBE
HV CABLES ARE NOT CONNECTED INTO THE HV
TRANSFORMER, COMPLETELY FILL BOTH HV
RECEPTACLES WITH HV OIL.
3000SW2
OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
POSITION
Programming the Rotor Boost Time and

1 Normal.
Filament Setting Time *1) *2)
2 Normal. Bypasses: Filament, Rotor Ready, Error E11. *1) *3)
3 Normal -- Not used. Not used.
4 Normal -- Digital mA Loop Closed Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant *1)
5 Not used. Normal -- 150 kVp
6 Normal -- Generator with Tube-1 Not used.
7 Normal -- Filament Boosting for Tube--1 No Filament Boosting for Tube--1 *4)
8 Normal -- Not used. Not used.
Notes.-- *1) Set in Closed (ON) position only for Calibration and Testing procedures when indicated in the Service Manual.
*2) Note that SW2-1 in Closed (ON) position is only set to program the Rotor Acceleration Time and the Rad Filament
Settling Time, therefore it changes the functions of Switches SW2-2, SW2-7, and SW2-8. Refer to Section 3 of this
chapter.
*3) This turns the filaments off so no radiation will be produced during the exposure.
*4) Set to “No Filament Boosting” when using X-ray Tubes with a Small Focal Spot smaller than 0.6.
4-9
REV 4 5192971--100
2.6 BASIC CONFIGURATION OF GENERATOR BOARDS
The following jumpers are factory set or removed to configure the Generator
Boards according to the Definium 5000 generator. Check the jumper positions
in the Generator Boards.
Note . Refer to Chapter 5, “Renewal Parts,” for assistance in locating the

indicated boards.
GENERATOR BOARDS JUMPERS POSITION

HT CONTROLLER BOARD
(A3000--33)
JP4 in “1” (soldered)

(A3004--10)
(A3009--11)
W3 to W8 removed

JP7, JP8, JP21 and JP22 do not matter jumpers position (in “A” soldered)
(A3024--21)
JP12 removed
JP13 (installed)
JP14 (soldered)

AEC CONTROL BOARD
(A3604--05)
JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP13, JP14, JP15 and JP16 in “B” (installed)
AEC ADAPTATION BOARD
(A3263--03)
JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12 in “A” (installed)
4-10
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 3 GENERATOR SERVICE MODE
3.1 STARTING THE GENERATOR SERVICE MODE
The Generator Service Mode (GSM) application is started from the Host
Computer (Magic PC) and it is run at the positioner display. GSM allows the
access to the service screens for reading the exposure counters and
configuration and calibration procedures.
Perform the following procedure to enter the Generator Service Mode:
3, “De--Energizing System.” Change DIP switch 3024SW2-3 to the
closed (ON) position to enable the Service Mode.
2. Press the POWER ON (I) button on the CRIB to turn the system ON.
Refer to Chapter 2, “Safety and Service,” Section 2, “Applying System
Power.”
3. Click on the Utilities icon on the main screen of the Host Computer
application. Then click on the Service: Launch button on the next screen.
Illustration 3-2
How to enter in GSM Application (I)
4-11
REV 4 5192971--100
4. Click on the Calibration icon and then click on the Generator Calibration
icon on the SNA (secondary navigation area).
Illustration 3-3
How to enter in GSM Application (II)
Secondary Navigation
Area (SNA)
4-12
REV 4 5192971--100
5. Follow the instructions as described on the screen and then click on the
Start button.
Illustration 3-4
How to enter in GSM Application (III)
4-13
REV 4 5192971--100
6. The Generator Service Mode application starts on the positioner display

after eight (8) seconds. An intermediate screen appears previously on
the positioner display. Do not click on any button on this screen.
Note . All generator service software functions are executed at the

Positioner Display.
Do not click on any button of this screen.
Illustration 3-5
How to enter in GSM Application (IV)
Intermediate screen
GSM Menu
4-14
REV 4 5192971--100
Once the GSM application appears on the Positioner screen, messages will be
displayed in the black information area in the lower right corner. This will provide
status information and instructions related to the processes being executed.
If this message window displays “Please check calibration DIP switch and
toggle with power off,” service mode is disabled at DIP switch 3024SW2--3. Exit
the GSM (see Section 3.2, “Exiting the Generator Service Mode”) and repeat
this procedure from step 1.
Illustration 3-6
GSM Application
4-15
REV 4 5192971--100
3.2 EXITING THE GENERATOR SERVICE MODE
To exit from the Generator Service Mode application:
1. After performing all the Configuration and Calibration tasks related to the
Generator Service Mode application (as described in the rest of this
chapter), close this application by clicking on the Close button.
A new screen will appear on the positioner display asking for a

confirmation to update the backup file. Click Yes or No, then the
Generator Service Mode application will be closed.
Illustration 3-7
How to exit GSM Application (I)
2. Once the generator service screens exit, return to the Magic PC and
select Complete. Shut the system down. (Refer to Chapter 1, “Safety and
Service.”) Reset DIP switch 3024SW2--3 to the OFF position to disable
the service mode.
4-16
REV 4 5192971--100
3.3 GENERATOR SERVICE MODE NAVIGATION

The screens to Read Exposure Counters, to enter in Configuration, Manual
Calibration or Auto Calibration are displayed after selecting the respective
button on the right side. Press the selected button again (in yellow on the right
side) to return to the Main Menu.
Illustration 3-8
Main Menu
Ready Indicator X--ray on indicator
Closes out of the application
Read Exposure Counters button
Configuration button
Manual Calibration button
Auto Calibration button
Error Display
RESET ERROR button
Information Display Area
The Exit button can also be used to return to the Main Menu, especially if the
other buttons are disabled.
Note . Whenever the “Configuration” menu is closed (by pressing any of

the “Configuration” or “Exit” buttons), a double-beep will sound
confirming the storage of the values set for each workstation.
In the Main Menu the buttons change to yellow when they are selected.
Press the Close button to exit from the Main Menu. Refer to Section 3.2, “Exiting
the Generator Service Mode.”
The exposure status indicators for Ready and X-ray On are located on the upper
right corner of the GSM screens. The Information Area (lower right) displays
data related to the service mode, remaining heat units, working mode, error
indicators, etc.
When an error code or message is displayed on the Main Menu, press the
RESET ERROR button to reset the error indication.
4-17
REV 4 5192971--100
Illustration 3-9
Status and Error Indicators
Workstation Selected Exposure Indicators
Exit button
Exit
Button of Menu selected

appears in yellow
RESET ERROR button
Error Indicator
Information Areas
4-18
REV 4 5192971--100
3.4 EXPOSURE COUNTERS
The EXPOSURE COUNTERS display the number of Rad exposures made with
the X-ray tube (TUBE 1 RAD).
1. Press the Read Exposure Counters button.
2. This screen shows the exposure counters. The number of exposures can
be set to zero by pressing the respective Reset button.
3. Exit from this screen by pressing the Read Exposure Counters button
again or the Exit button.
Illustration 3-10
Exposure Counters
Exit
4-19
REV 4 5192971--100
3.5 WORKSTATIONS CONFIGURATION
Two (2) workstations (WS1 for Normal application and WS2 for Service mode)
are factory configured for the Definium 5000. This screen is used to check or
configure the Workstations (Tube, WM, Ion Chamber) of the Definium 5000.
This procedure has to be performed whenever the ATP

Console CPU Board is replaced by a new one.
1. Select the Configuration button.
Illustration 3-11
Configuration
Exit
2. Press the Default Configuration button to set the default values factory
configured for each workstation. Review the values of each workstation
(WS) by pressing the respective button.
WS VALUE WS1 WS2 WS5 to WS8
Tube 1 (Tube--1) 1 (Tube--1) 0 (No-configured workstation)
WM 1 (Bucky-1) 0 (Direct) --
AEC IC 1 (Ion Chamber -- 1) 1 (Ion Chamber -- 1) --
kVp Tracking -- -- --
RAD / RF RAD RAD --
3. Exit from the configuration mode by pressing the Configuration button.

A double-bip will sound confirming the process.
4-20
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 4 EXTENDED MEMORY SETTING
4.1 EXTENDED MEMORY LOCATIONS
Miscellaneous configuration and calibration data are stored in the Extended

Memory Locations. It is recommended to note the values factory stored in each
Memory Location. Refer to Table 3-4. Refer to Section 4.2, “How to Enter and
Store Data in the Extended Memory,” to read the memory locations.
Note . The Radiographic X-ray Tube of Definium 5000 has to be

configured, calibrated, and used as Tube-1.
Table 3-4
Extended Memory Locations
MEMORY LOCATION FUNCTION VALUE
E01 TUBE-1 -- RAD filament stand-by (Autocalibrated. unchangeable)
E02 TUBE-1 -- RAD Tube type
E03 Low Digital mA Loop Closed (from 10 mA to 80 mA)
E05 High Digital mA Loop Closed (from 100 mA)
E06 kV Loop
E07 Maximum kW (Factory set. Only changeable to lower value)
E13 TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Delay
E15 TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Ceq kVp
* Note.-- Memory Locations not specified are not used.
4-21
REV 4 5192971--100
4.2 HOW TO ENTER AND STORE DATA IN THE EXTENDED MEMORY
The Extended Memory data are entered from the positioner display (console)
when the unit is in service mode. Access memory locations as indicated below:
closed (ON) position to enable the Service Mode. Refer to Section 3.1,
“Starting the Generator Service Mode,” to enter the Generator Service
Mode.
2. Select the Manual Calibration button on the GSM application.
buttons, then press the OK button to enter in calibration mode. (Refer to
Illustration 3-12.)
Note . In “Manual Calibration” mode, only the kVp and mA parameters

can be modified, values for Time and mAs are factory
programmed.
4. Increase the mA value beyond the maximum mA position. The mA

Display will show the first Extended Memory location (E01). They will
continue sequentially as the Increase mA button is pressed. (Refer to
Illustration 3-12.)
The values stored in each location are shown on the Calibration Value
display after pressing the Read button or after pressing the Increase or
Decrease buttons of this panel. Since these buttons are also used to
increase or decrease the stored values, one number should be added or
subtracted from the reading to obtain the current stored value.
5. Select the new value by pressing the Increase and Decrease buttons.
Each time these buttons are pressed the value displayed on the
calibration panel is increased or decreased one step.
6. Store the new value by pressing the Store button.
Note . If the “Store” button is not pressed after a new value is selected,
no modified data will be retained.
7. Press the Manual Calibration button to exit from the calibration mode
again.
8. Turn the system power OFF. Refer to Chapter 1, “Safety and Service,”
Section 4, “De--Energizing System.” Set DIP switch 3000SW2-4 on the
HT Controller Board to the OFF position (Digital mA Loop Closed). Reset
DIP switch 3024SW2--3 to the OFF position to disable the service mode.
4-22
REV 4 5192971--100
Illustration 3-12
Manual Calibration
Exit
Calibration Value panel
4-23
REV 4 5192971--100
4.3 LIMIT OF MAXIMUM kW
The Maximum kW of the generator is factory set according to the generator

performance. Generator kW can be limited to a lower value.
Note . This limit can be set to a lower value to match the maximum
generator power to the Line power, due to a high line impedance.
(Refer to 5192967-100 Definium 5000 Pre-installation document
Section 4.3, “Generator Power Line Impedance.”)
Mode.
2. Enter in calibration mode by pressing the Manual Calibration button on

the GSM application. Select the Workstation for Service (WS2) and press
the OK button.
3. Select the E07 Memory Location (memory location is shown on the mA

Display).
4. Set the new limit of Maximum kW by pressing the Increase or Decrease
calibration buttons and store the value by pressing the Store button.
5. Exit from Manual Calibration.
Note . Record configuration data for E07 in the Data Book (refer to
Appendix A, “Data Book,” at the end of this Chapter).
4-24
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 5 X-RAY TUBE SELECTION
5.1 X-RAY TUBE INSERT PROTECTION CURVES
Note . This generator is factory configured for working with Toshiba

E-7254X X-ray Tube (Tube number = 005; Tube code (ID) = 377).
In order to properly select the X-ray tube insert protection curves for the X-ray
tube connected to the generator, perform the following procedure:
Mode.
2. To enter the calibration mode, press the Manual Calibration button on the
GSM application. Select the Workstation for Service (WS2) and then
press the OK button.
3. Select the E02 Memory Location (for Tube-1). The memory location is
shown on the mA Display.
4. Set the tube number (005) by pressing the Increase or Decrease

calibration buttons until the correct number displays on the Calibration
Value panel.
5. Press the Store button to store the value.
6. Verify that the Tube code (ID: 377) is shown in the mAs Display. This code
(ID) can be only read after pressing the Store button.
Note . Record the configuration data for E02 in the Data Book (refer to
Appendix A, “Data Book,” at the end of this Chapter).
4-25
REV 4 5192971--100
5.2 LV-DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)
The LV-DRAC is a High Speed Rotor Controller located on the generator

cabinet.
BEFORE MANIPULATING THE LV-DRAC, MAKE SURE THAT

THE INPUT LINE IS DISCONNECTED AND THE CAPACITOR
BANK IS PROPERLY DISCHARGED. WAIT UNTIL LEDS DL7
AND DL8 ON THE CONTROL DRAC BOARD ARE OFF. REFER
TO CHAPTER 1, “SAFETY AND SERVICE,” SECTION 1,
“LOCK- OUT / TAG- OUT (LOTO)” FOR INFORMATION ON
LOTO.
Illustration 3-13
LV-DRAC Status Diagram
CHANGE
OF TUBE
ACCELERATION STAND-BY ACCELERATION

UP TO 3300 RPM UP TO 10000 RPM
RUNNING RUNNING
AT 3300 RPM AT 10000 RPM
BRAKING SELF-RUNNING MODE BRAKING

FROM 3300 RPM FROM 10000 RPM
4-26
REV 4 5192971--100
5.2.1 DIP SWITCH CONFIGURATION ON CONTROL DRAC BOARD
Note . The Control DRAC DIP switches are factory configured for
working with Toshiba E-7254X X-ray tube.
Control DRAC DIP switches must be configured with the generator turned OFF.
The LV-DRAC configuration is made through DIP switches 3243SW1 to

3243SW4 on the Control DRAC Board. The functions of these switches are the
following:
DIP SWITCHES FUNCTION
1 -- 2 -- 3 MINIMUM TIME FOR READY (DELAY)

3243SW1
3243SW1-x
4 -- 5 -- 6 -- 7 -- 8 TUBE TYPE SELECTION FOR TUBE-1
3243SW2-x 1 -- 2 -- 3 -- 4 -- 5 -- 6 -- 7 -- 8 NOT USED*
1 LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE
2 -- 3 -- 4 NOT USED*
3243SW3
3243SW3-x
5 ON
6 -- 7 -- 8 NOT USED*
1 -- 2 -- 3 -- 4 -- 5 NOT USED*
ON = SELF RUNNING ENABLED

6
3243SW4-x OFF = SELF RUNNING DISABLED
7 PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS
8 DC BRAKE
* NOTE: Set switches not used in the “ON” position.
Set DIP switches in accordance with the following tables.
Set DIP switches not described in the “ON” position.
4-27
REV 4 5192971--100
MINIMUM TIME FOR READY (DELAY)
3243SW1-x
MINIMUM TIME
(SECONDS)
1 2 3
0* ON ON ON
0.6 OFF ON ON
0.8 ON OFF ON
1.0 OFF OFF ON
1.2 ON ON OFF
1.5 OFF ON OFF
2.0 ON OFF OFF
3.0 OFF OFF OFF
* Note: It is recommended to set these switches at “0 seconds.”
TUBE TYPE SELECTION
(Switch 3243SW3-5 = ON)
3243SW1-x 3243SW2-x
TUBE FAMILY
(Stator - ∅ Anode)
4 5 6 7 8 4 5 6 7 8
TOSHIBA E7254X ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON
These DIP switches configure the tube family (anode stator + insert).
Configuration of these DIP switches automatically determines the appropriate
starting and running stator voltage and rotor acceleration time of the selected
tube family.
LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE
LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE MODE (3300 RPM TO 0 RPM) 3243SW3-1
INHIBITED ON
ACTIVATED OFF
4-28
REV 4 5192971--100
SELF RUNNING MODE
Continuous starting and braking cycles will cause the X--ray tube stator to
overheat. The Self Running mode prevents excessive heat accumulation by
holding the rotor at speed for a period of time after the exposure in the event an
immediate follow--on exposure is required such as during calibration.
In the Self-running mode (switch 3243SW4-6 in the ON position), the anode

remains running for approximately one (1) minute when rotating at 3300 rpm or
10000 rpm.
The LV-DRAC enters in the Self-running mode when Preparation is selected

three (3) consecutive times only from the Handswitch, and the time between
two (2) of the consecutive accelerations is shorter than 30 seconds. (Refer to
Illustration 3-14.)
Illustration 3-14
Self-running Mode
PREPARATION SIGNALS
t < 30 s t < 30 s t < 30 s t > 30 s t < 30 s t < 30 s t < tsr
ANODE ROTATION
tsr tsr
Self-running mode Self-running mode
tsr (time for self-running mode) = approx. 1 minute at 3300 rpm or 10000 rpm.
4-29
REV 4 5192971--100
PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS
PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS 3243SW4-7
INHIBITED
ON
(LED DL1 on the Control DRAC Board is always illuminated)
ACTIVATED (Normal Operation mode)

(LED DL1 on the Control DRAC Board is non-illuminated OFF
indicating that the LV DRAC is working properly).
Note: The Error Codes are shown on the Operator Console preceded by the letter “E”
(e.g. E51). For Error Codes refer Chapter 3 in this manual.
WHEN SWITCH 3243SW4-7 IS IN THE ON POSITION, THE

ERROR PROTECTIONS OF THE LV-DRAC ARE INHIBITED.
DC BRAKE (FOR LOW AND HIGH SPEED)
DC BRAKE 3243SW4-8
ACTIVATED ON
INHIBITED OFF
5.2.2 PROGRAMMING OF STARTER TYPE AND RAD FILAMENT SETTING TIME
DIP Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board is used to program:
• Rad Filament Settling Time. This value is programmable from 0.8 to 2.7
seconds. It can initially be set as the same value assigned for the rotor
acceleration time. (Refer to the technical information of the X-ray tube.)
Note . The Rad Filament Settling Time is factory set to 1.8 seconds for
working with Toshiba E-7254X X-ray tube. Maintain this value
when it is unknown or not provided with the X-ray Tube
documentation.
If it is required to increase the Rad Filament settling time to the next value,
configure the respective switches again. This adjustment avoids
Error-12.
4-30
REV 4 5192971--100
1. Turn the system OFF and note the current settings of DIP switch
3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board. Refer to Chapter 1, “Safety and
Service,” Section 3, “De--Energizing System.”
Note . Configuration of these times is only allowed when DIP switch

3000SW2-1 is in a “Closed” (ON) position after powering the
system OFF and back ON again.
2. Set DIP switches 3000SW2-1 and 3000SW2-2 as indicated below, in

order to enable the selection of times with the high speed starter. DIP
switch 3000SW2-1 has to be switched ONLY with the Generator
powered OFF.
3000SW2-1 (selection enable) 3000SW2-2 (High Speed Starter)
ON ON
3. Configure the filament setting times by setting the DIP switches

3000SW2-7 and 3000SW2-8 per Table 3-5. The filament settling time
should be configured in accordance to rotor acceleration time of the X-ray
tube.
Table 3-5
High Speed: Configuration of Filament Setting Time
3000SW2-7 3000SW2-8
TUBE-1
FILAMENT SETTING TIME OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON) OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
0.8 seconds - -
1.2 seconds - -
1.8 seconds - -
2.7 seconds - -
Note . Record the switch configuration in the Data Book.
4. To validate previous configuration, turn the system ON, wait until

Error--01 (E01) appears on the console or positioner display and turn the
system OFF. Refer to Chapter 2, “Service and Safety.”
4-31
REV 4 5192971--100
5.3 ANODE ROTATION TEST
Perform the following test for checking the low and high speed when it is
required.
NEVER MAKE EXPOSURES DURING THE TESTS. THE

PERSON CLOSE TO THE X-RAY TUBE WILL BE EXPOSED.
Note . Two (2) people are needed for this test, one (1) at the Console and
the service engineer looking at the Anode of the X-ray tube. These
tests also can be done by hearing the sound of the anode rotating.
Note . For this test it is recommended to turn off the Tube Filaments
(switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller in the “On” position) and
use a stroboscope to measure the anode speed.
Mode.
3. Select a low value for kVp and mAs for checking the Anode Rotation at
Low Speed.
4. Press the PREP push-button and visually check that the Tube anode
rotates in the proper way. (Refer to the X-ray Tube documentation.)
5. Press and hold the PREP push-button and check that the rotation speed
of the Tube anode is in compliance with the X-ray Tube specifications.
6. Release the PREP push-button.
7. Select a high value for kVp and mAs for checking the Anode Rotation at
High Speed.
8. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5.
4-32
REV 4 5192971--100
5.4 FOCAL SPOTS CONFIGURATION
This configuration determines which mA station will be the smallest mA station

for the large focal spot. It is possible to configure all the mA stations for the small
focal spot or for the large focal spot.
The smallest mA station for the large focal spot must be selected according to
the tube ratings for the small filament and the customer preference.
IF THE mA STATION FOR FOCAL SPOT CHANGE IS NOT

CONFIGURED ACCORDING TO THE X-RAY TUBE RATINGS,
THE TUBE FILAMENTS MAY BE PERMANENTLY DAMAGED.
Mode.
2. Select the Manual Calibration button on the Main Menu.
3. Using the Up and Down buttons, select the Workstation for Service
(WS2). Then press the OK button to enter calibration mode.
4. Using the Increase or Decrease mA buttons, select the smallest mA

station for the Large Focal Spot. When required to configure all mA
stations for the Small Focal Spot, select Memory Location E01.
Note . This is factory set at 200 mA for working with Toshiba E-7254X
X-ray tube.
Exit
4-33
REV 4 5192971--100
5. Press the Toggle button to store the select mA station, then press the
Confirm or Dismiss buttons to confirm or cancel the process. When it is
confirmed, the ATP Console CPU Board emits a “double-beep.”
IF THE FOCAL SPOT SWITCH-OVER POINT IS CHANGED

AFTER mA CALIBRATION, THE mA STATIONS AFFECTED
MUST BE RE-CALIBRATED.
4-34
REV 4 5192971--100
SECTION 6 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
IMPORTANT NOTE

DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION, IT IS NECESSARY TO PERFORM AN MA

BEFORE CALIBRATION MAKE SURE THAT THE INPUT LINE

IS DISCONNECTED AND THE CAPACITOR BANK IS
PROPERLY DISCHARGED. WAIT UNTIL LEDS DL7 AND DL8
ON THE CONTROL DRAC BOARD ARE OFF. REFER TO
CHAPTER 1, “SAFETY AND SERVICE,” SECTION 1,
“LOCK- OUT / TAG- OUT (LOTO)” FOR INFORMATION ON
LOTO.
Before calibration, bear in mind that:
• For calibration and measurement a kVp a non-invasive kVp meter is

needed (Kiethley model 35080A, GE part number 2109730 or
equivalent).
• For calibration and measurement an mA or mAs Meter is needed (GE

part number 46--194427P435 or equivalent) plugged to the banana
connections on the HV Transformer (Digital mA Loops calibration).
the kVp and mA readings but should not be used to calibrate the
unit. These test points must be checked with scope:

- greater than 100 mA, 1 volt = 100 mA
- kVp test point is TP-7 and the scale factor is 1 volt = 33.3 kVp
(0.3 volt = 10 kVp)
4-35
REV 4 5192971--100
With the system power OFF (refer to Chapter 2, “Safety and Service,” Section
3, “De--Energizing System”):
• Verify that DIP switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board is in
the ON position to permit the service mode.
• Verify the position of the DIP switches on the HT Controller Board during
every calibration procedure:
DIP SWITCH OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
3000SW2-4 Position during operation -- Digital mA Loop Closed Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant
6.1 FILAMENT STAND-BY CURRENT
Note . The Filament Stand-by value is auto-calibrated by the generator

and automatically stored into the E01 Memory Location. Filament
stand-by values are not field changeable.
6.2 EXPOSURE TIME ADJUSTMENT
The values stored in these Extended Memory Locations only affect Exposure
Times for techniques below 20 ms. The Memory Locations which affect short
exposure times are:
MEMORY LOCATION FUNCTION
E13 EXPOSURE TIME ADJUSTMENT - DELAY
E15 EXPOSURE TIME ADJUSTMENT - Ceq kVp
The generator has been optimized at the factory to produce correct exposures
at the lower times (<20 ms.) Therefore do not change the value factory set for
these Memory Locations (E13 and E15).
The Exposure Time adjustment is calibrated by performing the following steps:
Mode.
2. Select the Manual Calibration button on the GSM application.
4-36
REV 4 5192971--100
buttons, then press the OK button to enter in calibration mode.
4. Select the E13 Memory Location. The value in this Memory Location
adjusts the time delay of the exposure. It is factory set for a value of 18.
5. Select the E15 Memory Location. The value in this Memory Location is
set in relation to the length in meters of one of the HV Cables
(1 ft = 0.3048 m). It is factory set for a value of 38.
6. Store the value of each Memory Location by pressing the Store button
of the calibration panel.
Note . Record the configuration data for E13 and E15 in the Data Book.
(Refer to Appendix A, “Data Book,” at the end of this Chapter).
4-37
REV 4 5192971--100
6.3 KV LOOP
Extended Memory Location E06 contains the calibration factor for the kV Loop.
Each number above or below the indicated value in the E06 memory location
increases or decreases (respectively) the kVp gain value.
Note . Only perform this procedure if the HT Controller Board and/or

HV Transformer have been replaced in the unit.
Note . Value in E06 Memory Location is only related to the generator

performance. It is not related to the X-ray tube or any other
components installed. The value in this Memory Location is factory
adjusted.
Mode.
2. With the system power OFF:
G Set DIP switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board to the OFF
position. This enables the Filament and Rotor Interlocks.
G Set DIP switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board to the ON
Transformer. Connect the mAs Meter to the banana plug
connections to measure mA or mAs.
G Place and center a non-Invasive kVp Meter on the X-ray tube
output at the required SID. Refer to the non-Invasive kVp Meter
documentation.
3. Enter the GSM application and select the Manual Calibration button on
buttons, then press the OK button to enter into the calibration mode.
5. Select the E06 Memory Location and read the calibration value by
pressing the Read button. Enter the value 200 and store it by pressing
the Store button.
4-38
REV 4 5192971--100
6. Manually calibrate the Filament Current Number for 80 kVp / 200 mA

combination, as indicated in the following steps (if it has not been
previously calibrated).
In calibration mode, Filament Current Numbers are shown on the
calibration panel by pressing the Read button after selecting the
respective kVp / mA combination. They can be changed by pressing the
Increase and Decrease buttons and stored by pressing the Store button
of the calibration panel.
Select 80 kVp, 200 mA, Large Focus. Enter the value 344 as Filament
Current Number (calibration value) and press the Store button. Make an
exposure with these parameters. The mAs read on the mAs Meter must
be the same mAs displayed on the calibration screen with a tolerance of
±0.1 mAs (tolerance of the parameter and mAs Meter).
If the mAs is low, increase the filament number. If the mA is high (or a
Generator Overload Error is shown), decrease the filament number.
Press the Store button before making a new exposure. Repeat until the
mAs read is correct and the mA station is calibrated.
4-39
REV 4 5192971--100
7. Enter in user mode inside the calibration mode by pressing the Go to

User Mode button. Select: RAD menu, kVp: 80, mA: 200, ms: 100, and
Focus: LARGE. Make an exposure and note the kVp value at the end of
the exposure.
8. If the calibration of the kV Loop is correct (80 ±1 kVp), record the value
200 in the Data Book.
9. If calibration of the kV Loop is not correct:
a. Exit from the User Mode screen by pressing the Manual

Calibration button. Select the E06 Memory Location. Press the
Read button to read the value stored.
b. Increase or decrease the value to increase or decrease the kVp

respectively. Enter the new value and store it by pressing the Store
button.
c. Repeat the exposure (step 6) to determine if the new value has

had the proper effect. If not, repeat step 9.
d. Turn the system power OFF. Refer to Chapter 1, “Safety and

Service,” Section 4, “De--Energizing System.” Set DIP switch
3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board to the OFF position
(Digital mA Loop Closed). Reset DIP switch 3024SW2--3 to the
OFF position to disable the service mode.
10. After the calibration of the E06 Memory Location, remove the
non-Invasive kVp meter. Proceed to Section 6.4 to adjust the Digital mA
Closed Loop.
4-40
REV 4 5192971--100
6.4 DIGITAL mA LOOP CLOSED
Extended Memory Locations E03 and E05 contain the calibration factor for
Digital mA Loop Closed. Each number above or below the indicated in the
Memory Locations increases or decreases respectively the mA gain value.
Note . Only perform this procedure if the HT Controller Board and/or

HV Transformer have been replaced in the unit.
Note . Values in E03 and E05 Memory Locations are only related to the
generator performance. They are not related to the X-ray tube
installed. Therefore the values in these Memory Locations are
factory adjusted.
The mA Gain for Digital mA Loop Closed is calibrated by performing the

following steps:
Mode.
2. The calibration of E03 and E05 Memory Locations is performed through

the Auto Calibration menu. Enter in the GSM application and select the
Auto Calibration button on the GSM application.
Note . Each time that auto-calibration is activated in one of these Memory

Locations, calibration data stored for this Memory Location is
deleted and a new calibration for it will be required.
buttons. Press the OK button to enter in calibration mode.
4. Select the respective Memory Location (E03 or E05) and press the OK
button.
Press Yes to confirm Auto-calibration and proceed with the calibration

function.
4-41
REV 4 5192971--100
Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration (second confirmation) by pressing

the respective button (Confirm or Dismiss) on the calibration screen.
4-42
REV 4 5192971--100
Auto-calibration is activated when the Auto Calibration button is lighted

and the Press Prep and Expose message appears on the screen.
5. Calibrate E03 and E05 Memory Locations as described in the following

pages.
4-43
REV 4 5192971--100
For Low mA stations (from 10 mA to 80 mA) (E03 Memory Location):
Mode.
2. Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the Auto Calibration button

on the GSM application and select the E03 Memory Location. Confirm
all the following screens.
3. When Auto-calibration is activated, the Auto Calibration button is lighted

and the 3.5 mAs value is shown on the screen.
4. Perform the following steps:
a. Make an exposure (technique parameters are pre-programmed at

80 kVp, 32 mA and 100 ms and they can be shown when pressing
the PREP button).
b. Read the mAs measured on the mAs Meter.
c. Read the Filament Current Number shown on the calibration

panel.
d. Increase or decrease the Filament Current Number (by pressing
the Increase or Decrease buttons) to determine the correction
needed to obtain a value between 3.00 and 4.00 mAs in the mAs
Meter after making a new exposure.
e. Repeat the above steps until a proper mAs value is obtained in the
mAs Meter.
5. Enter the mAs value read in the mAs Meter (it must be a value between
3.00 and 4.00 mAs) in the mAs Display pressing the mAs Increase or
mAs Decrease buttons.
6. Exit from Auto-calibration mode pressing the Auto Calibration button. At

this moment, the generator will calculate and store the new value in E03
Memory Location. Auto-calibration is deactivated and the process is
finished when the screen shows the GSM application.
7. Press the Manual Calibration button. Select the Workstation for Service
(WS2) and press the OK button. Then, select the E03 Memory Location
and read its new value on the Calibration Display.
8. Record the new value for E03 Memory Location in the Data Book. (Refer
to Appendix A, “Data Book,” at the end of this Chapter.)
9. Exit from the Manual Calibration. Refer to Section 3.2 in this chapter.
4-44
REV 4 5192971--100
For High mA stations (from 100 mA) (E05 Memory Location):
Mode.
2. Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the Auto Calibration button

on the GSM application and select the E05 Memory Location. Confirm
all the following screens.
3. When Auto-calibration is activated, Auto Calibration button is lighted and

the 7.75 mAs value is shown on the screen.
4. Perform the following steps:
a. Make an exposure (technique parameters are pre-programmed at

80 kVp, 125 mA and 65 ms and they can be shown when pressing
the PREP button).
b. Read the mAs measured on the mAs Meter.
c. Read the Filament Current Number shown on the calibration

panel.
d. Increase or decrease the Filament Current Number (by pressing
the Increase or Decrease buttons) to determine the correction
needed to obtain a value between 7.00 and 8.50 mAs in the mAs
Meter after making a new exposure.
e. Repeat the above steps until a proper mAs value is obtained in the
mAs Meter.
5. Enter the mAs value read in the mAs Meter (it must be a value between
7.00 and 8.50 mAs) in the mAs Display pressing the mAs Increase or
mAs Decrease buttons.
6. Exit from Auto-calibration mode pressing the Auto Calibration button. At

this moment, the generator will calculate and store the new value in E05
Memory Location. Auto-calibration is deactivated and the process is
finished when the screen shows the GSM application.
7. Press the Manual Calibration button. Select the Workstation for Service
(WS2) and press the OK button. Then, select the E03 Memory Location
and read its new value on the Calibration Display.
8. Record the new value for E05 Memory Location in the Data Book. (Refer
to Appendix A, “Data Book,” at the end of this chapter.)
4-45
REV 4 5192971--100
10. After calibration of E03 and E05 Memory Locations:
G Switch the system power OFF. Refer to Chapter 1, “Safety and

G Disconnect the mAs Meter to the banana plug connections.
G Re-install the link between the banana plug connections on the HV

Transformer.
4-46
REV 4 5192971--100
6.5 DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN (X-RAY TUBE CALIBRATION)
Two (2) different methods are described in this section: Auto-calibration and
Manual Calibration.
To achieve the most accurate calibration, this procedure has to be

automatically performed by the Generator (Auto-calibration). The
calibration procedure will be manually performed by the field engineer only if
auto-calibration is not possible.
Digital mA Loop Open is calibrated by performing the following steps:
Mode.
2. With the system power OFF (refer to Chapter 1, “Safety and Service,”
Section 4, “De--Energizing System”), set:


4. Perform the Auto-calibration procedure as described in Section 6.5.1,

“Auto--Calibration of digital mA Loop Open.”
6.5.1 AUTO-CALIBRATION OF DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN
Auto-calibration of the Filament Current Numbers is divided in two (2) separate

procedures related to the mA stations available for the small or large focal spots.
It is recommended to start with the small focal spot (first group) and continue
with the large focal spot (second group).
When autocalibration is invoked, all of the filament current

numbers of the selected focal spot are set to “344.” This value
corresponds to a stand by level of filament current and will
require that the entire calibration process be completed in
order to restore normal operation.
4-47
REV 4 5192971--100
Auto-calibration starts with the minimum available mA station for the selected
Focal Spot at 50 kVp and follows with the other combinations of mA stations for
the selected Focal Spot at 80 kVp, 120 kVp, and 40 kVp.
Mode.
2. Enter Auto-calibration mode by pressing the Auto Calibration button on

buttons, then press the OK button to enter in calibration mode.
4. Select the Small Focal Spot by pressing the Small button and then press
the OK button.
Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration mode by pressing the respective

button (Yes or No) on the new screen.
4-48
REV 4 5192971--100
5. Press Confirm to confirm the Auto-calibration on the calibration screen.
6. Auto-calibration is activated when the Auto Calibration button is lighted

and the Press Prep and Expose message appears on the screen. At this
moment the generator has checked the mA stations available for the
Small Focal Spot.
4-49
REV 4 5192971--100
7. Check that the Heat Units capacity available for the X-ray tube is at or
near 100% (HU 100% displayed on the screen).
BEFORE MAKING ANY EXPOSURE IN AUTO-CALIBRATION,

VERIFY THAT THE LINK BETWEEN THE BANANA PLUG
CONNECTIONS ON THE HV TRANSFORMER IS INSTALLED.
8. Keep the Handswitch button fully pressed to perform continuous

exposures.
Note . In Auto-calibration mode, all technique parameters are factory

programmed and cannot be changed.
Auto-calibration can be paused momentarily by releasing the

Handswitch button, whenever there is not an exposure in
process. Do not exit from Auto-calibration before the
procedure has been completed.
If during the Auto-calibration process any error indication is shown

momentarily (such as Tube Overload, etc.), it means that the generator
can not calibrate in this moment the selected kVp / mA combination
(because anode overheated, space charge, generator power limit, etc.).
In this case, the generator will continue with the Auto-calibration of the
following available kVp / mA combinations for the selected Focal Spot.
At the end of the process it will try to calibrate or calculate the
combinations previously uncalibrated.
If the Heat Units capacity available is less than 40%, exposures are
inhibited momentarily and the Tube too hot message is shown on the
screen. This message will disappear and exposures can be made again
when the X-ray tube begins to cool and recovers the Heat Units capacity.
At this point, it is recommended to wait until the Heat Units value

displayed are close to the 80% before making any exposure.
The generator tries to calibrate each kVp / mA combination for ten (10)
attempts (maximum). If calibration is cancelled (after ten [10] attempts),
the message Auto calibration failure is shown on the screen until you
press the Auto Calibration button to exit from the Auto-calibration mode
and go back to the GSM application. Calibration can be also cancelled
due to space charge during calibration of the lowest kVp at the highest
mA stations for the Focal Spot selected, so the message Auto calibration
failure is also shown on the screen until you press the Auto Calibration
button to exit from Auto-calibration mode and go back to the GSM
application.
4-50
REV 4 5192971--100
ONLY IF AUTO-CALIBRATION IS CANCELLED DUE TO

“AUTO CALIBRATION FAILURE,” CONTINUE THE
AUTO-CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR THE OTHER FOCAL
SPOT. CHECK AT THE END OF THE AUTO-CALIBRATION
PROCEDURE WHICH kVp / mA COMBINATIONS HAVE NOT
BEEN AUTO-CALIBRATED FOR EACH FOCAL SPOT. THESE
COMBINATIONS HAVE THE FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBER
SET TO “344.” MANUALLY CALIBRATE THESE kVp / mA
COMBINATIONS AS EXPLAINED IN SECTION 6.5.2.
When Auto-calibration is successfully performed, an Auto Calibration OK

message is shown on the screen until you press the Auto Calibration
button to exit from Auto-calibration mode and go back to the GSM
application.
9. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for the large focal spot. Before starting
exposures, wait until the remaining Heat Units indication is over 80%.
10. After performing both procedures (for Small and Large Focal Spots),
enter in Manual Calibration mode and select each combination of the
available mA stations for each Focal Spot at the kVp break points (40, 50,
80, and 120 kVp). Press the Read button to read on the calibration panel
the new value of the Filament Current Number stored for each
combination and record the new values in the Data Book. (Refer to
Appendix A, “Data Book,” at the end of this Chapter.)
Note . The highest mA station for Small Focal Spot may have numbers
larger than the lowest mA station for Large Focal Spot. This is
normal.
11. Exit from Manual Calibration and from the Generator Service Mode
application. Refer to Section 3.2 in this chapter.
13. Restart the system. Refer to Chapter 1, “Safety and Service,” Section 3,
“Applying System Power.”
Note . In the event it becomes necessary to cancel the auto calibration,

it can be cancelled by pressing the “Auto Calibration” button. A
message on the screen informs that Auto-calibration has been
cancelled and after a while the screen shows the GSM application.
Be advised that the focal spot is not fully calibrated and some or
all of the stations will be unusable until calibrated.
4-51
REV 4 5192971--100
6.5.2 MANUAL CALIBRATION OF DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN
This procedure describes the Manual calibration of all the Filament Current
Numbers. It will also be used to calibrate the kVp / mA combinations not
performed during Auto-calibration procedure because it has not been
completed. These combinations have the Filament Current Number set to “344”
so only these combinations have to be manually calibrated as described in this
procedure. If Auto-calibration for one of the Focal Spots has been successful,
it is only required to perform the manual calibration of the mA station do not
calibrate for the other Focal Spot.
Manual Calibration is initiated at the 80 kVp break point by entering the

appropriate Filament Current Number for the proper tube current at each
selectable mA. Calibration at the other kVp break points (40, 50, 80, and
120 kVp) are obtained by adding or subtracting values as indicated in Table 3-6.
Although the suggested values (Table 3-6) could change depending on the
X-ray tube used, entering those values will approximate accurate calibration
without making excessive exposures.
In the Manual Calibration mode, the Filament Current Numbers are shown on
the calibration panel by pressing the Read button after selecting the respective
kVp / mA combination. The value can be changed by pressing the Increase or
Decrease buttons of the calibration panel and stored by pressing the Store
button.
Note that in calibration mode, only the mA stations and kVp (at the break points)
can be selected.
4-52
REV 4 5192971--100
Table 3-6
mA Calibration Numbers Change
FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kVp BREAK POINT

mA
A STATION
40 50 80 120
10 A1+7 A1+6 A1 A1 --5
12.5 A2+7 A2+6 A2 A2 --5
16 A3+7 A3+6 A3 A3 --5
20 A4+7 A4+6 A4 A4 --5
25 A5+7 A5+6 A5 A5 --5
32 A6+7 A6+6 A6 A6 --5
40 A7+7 A7+6 A7 A7 --5
50 A8+7 A8+6 A8 A8 --5
65 A9+7 A9+6 A9 A9 --5
80 A10+7 A10+6 A10 A10 --5
100 A11+10 A11+8 A11 A11 --7
125 A12+10 A12+8 A12 A12 --7
160 A13+10 A13+8 A13 A13 --7
200 A14+10 A14+8 A14 A14 --7
250 A15+10 A15+8 A15 A15 --7
320 A16+14 A16+11 A16 A16 --9
400 A17+14 A17+11 A17 A17 --9
500 A18+14 A18+11 A18 A18 --9
650 A19+14 A19+11 A19 A19 --9
4-53
REV 4 5192971--100
Mode.
Section 4, “De--Energizing System”), set:



Transformer. Connect the mAs Meter to the banana plug
connections to measure mA or mAs.
4. Enter the calibration mode by pressing the Manual Calibration button on

the GSM application. Refer to Section 3.1 in this chapter.
5. To select the Workstation for Service (WS2), use the Up and Down
buttons then press the OK button.
6. Check that the Heat Units capacity available for the X-ray tube is at or
near 100% (HU 100% displayed on the screen).
7. Accordingly to X-ray tube ratings or maximum Generator power, check

which kVp / mA combinations in Table 3-6 are allowed.
If error “Tube Overload” is shown after selection of a kVp / mA

combination, it means this combination is not allowed for the selected
X-ray Tube.
In calibration mode, if Generator power is exceeded by a kVp / mA

combination selection, error “E-16” is shown after “Preparation”. Reset
this error by pressing the “Reset Error” button.
Note which combinations in Table 3-6 can not be calibrated by making

exposures (combinations not allowed due to Tube rating, maximum
Generator power, space charge, etc.) and the Exposure Time assigned
to these combinations in calibration mode.
4-54
REV 4 5192971--100
8. To enter the user mode in the calibration mode, press the Go to User
Mode button. Select the mA station and exposure time of each kVp / mA
combination not allowed. Increase or decrease the kVp value as required
to determine the kVp value allowed nearest to the kVp value of the
combination. Note the kVp value allowed in the respective cell of
Table 3-6.
9. Exit from the User Mode screen by pressing the Manual Calibration
button. Select 80 kVp and lowest mA station available (the first
combination available). Enter a Filament Number of 344 for this
combination.
10. Make an exposure. The mAs read on the mAs Meter must be the same
mAs displayed on the calibration screen with a tolerance of ±0.1 mAs
(tolerance of the parameter and mAs Meter). If the mAs read is close to
zero, increase the filament number in big steps (i.e. increase values in
40). As the mAs read is close to the mAs displayed on the console,
increase (or reduce) the filament number in smaller steps (i.e., increase
value in 30, 20, 10, ...).
If the mAs is low, increase the filament number. If the mA is high,

decrease the filament number. Press the Store button before making a
new exposure. Repeat until the mA station is calibrated.
Note . Press the “Store” button to store the new data (filament number)
before selecting the next kVp or mA stations.
Calibration data (presently in memory) may or may not be

close to your requirements. If it is not close, the potential
exists to damage the X-ray tube (i.e. too much mA). Thus, as
you start the mA calibration procedure note how close or how
far off the mA break points are. If a large adjustment (more
than 40 points) is required at the low mA stations, make
estimated adjustments to the high mA stations before those
exposures are made.
11. Select the next mA station at 80 kVp. Before making any exposure, enter
as filament number the value calibrated for the previous mA station
increased in step 9.
If the mAs is low, increase the filament number. If the mA is high,

decrease the filament number. Press the Store button before making a
new exposure. Repeat until the mA station is calibrated.
4-55
REV 4 5192971--100
12. Complete the calibration process for all mA stations at 80 kVp as

described before. When you select the first mA station for the Large Focal
Spot, enter as a filament number the value calibrated for the first mA
station for the Small Focal Spot. Note that the highest mA station for
Small Focal Spot may have numbers larger than the lowest mA station
for Large Focal Spot. This is normal.
Press the Read button to read on the calibration panel the new value of
the Filament Current Number stored for each mA station at 80 kVp.
Record the new values in the Data Book.
13. Complete the calibration process for the remaining kVp / mA

combinations using Table 3-6 as a guide. It is not necessary to make
exposures to do this. Compute the value for all the kVp break points of
each available mA station although the generator power can not reach
all the kVp / mA combinations. Select the corresponding kVp / mA
combination and enter the computed value.
14. Check the calibration at all break points by making exposures. Correct
any calibration points as needed.
Note . If a “Tube Overload” error is shown directly after selection of an

allowed combination (refer to step 5), wait until the X-ray tube
anode cools down to permit the calibration of the mA station.
15. Recalculate the values of the non-allowed combinations in accordance

to the new values obtained by the exposures. (Refer to Table 3-6.)
16. To enter the user mode in the calibration mode, press the Go to User
Mode button. Select the mA station, Exposure Time and kVp value noted
for each kVp / mA combination not allowed (refer to step 5). Check
calibration at these kVp / mA combinations by making exposures. If
needed, enter in calibration mode and correct the Filament Current
Number of the respective kVp / mA combination not allowed.
17. To exit from the User Mode screen, press the Manual Calibration button.
In calibration mode select each combination of the available mA stations
for each Focal Spot at the kVp break points (40, 50, 80, and 120 kVp).
Press the Read button to read on the calibration panel the new value of
the Filament Current Number stored for each combination and record the
new values in the Data Book. (Refer to Appendix A, “Data Book,” at the
end of this Chapter.)
Note . Note that the highest mA station for Small Focal Spot may have
numbers larger than the lowest mA station for Large Focal Spot.
This is normal.
4-56
REV 4 5192971--100
19. After the calibration of the Filament Current Numbers:
G Switch the system power OFF. Refer to Chapter 1, “Safety and

G Disconnect the mAs Meter to the banana plug connections.
G Re-install the link between the banana plug connections on the HV

Transformer.
G Set DIP switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in the

OFF position (Digital mA Loop Closed).
4-57
REV 4 5192971--100
6.6 FINAL CHECKS AFTER GENERATOR CALIBRATION
1. After performing all the Configuration and Calibration tasks related to the
Generator Service Mode application, when this application is closed by
clicking on the Close button, a new screen will appear on the Positioner
Display asking for a confirmation to update the Backup file. Click Yes to
close the Generator Service Mode application.
Section 4, “De--Energizing System”), verify that the position of the DIP
switches on the HT Controller Board are:
G DIP switch 3000SW2-2 is in the OFF position (enables Filament

and Rotor Interlocks).
G DIP switch 3000SW2-4 is in the OFF position (Digital mA Loop

Closed).
3. Set the Test DIP switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in
the OFF position to place the system in normal operating mode.
4-58
REV 4 5192971--100
4. Check the HT Transformer and verify the mAs meter is removed and the
banana plug jumper is installed.

6. Back up the system data. Refer to the System Service Manual, Direction
5192970--100 (Chapter 5, “Software Install, Backup & Restore”) for more
information.
4-59
REV 4 5192971--100
6.7 AEC CALIBRATION
For AEC Calibration use the Host Computer application.
Note . AEC calibration requires the following tools:

-- Flat Field Phantom (part number: 2281087 or equivalent).
-- Dose Probe Holder (part number: 5198282 or equivalent)
Click on the AEC folder icon at the left directory of the Calibration Home Page
and follow the instructions as described in the screen.
Illustration 3-15
How to enter in AEC Calibration
4-60
REV 4 5192971--100
APPENDIX A DATA BOOK
This Data Book is the register of the Configuration and Calibration data of the
generator.
Note . Enter the data with a pencil in order to modify them later due to
future changes.
Note . Verify that the “Configuration Control Sheet” and “Final Test
Results” pages from factory have been included with the
equipment.
Table A-1
3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board
1 -
2 -
- = Position for application mode.
Table A-2
3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
4-61
REV 4 5192971--100
Table A-3
3024SW3 and 3024SW4 - ATP Console CPU Board
Note . DIP switches 3024SW3 and 3024SW4 are not used for
configuration but all their switches must be set in the OFF position.
Table A-4
3000SW2 - HT Controller Board
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
4-62
REV 4 5192971--100
Table A-5
Basic Configuration in Generator Boards
GENERATOR BOARDS JUMPERS POSITION

HT CONTROLLER BOARD
(A3000--33)
JP4 in “1” (soldered)

(A3004--10)

(A3009--11)
W3 to W8 removed

ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD JP7, JP8, JP21 and JP22 do not matter jumpers position (in “A” soldered)
(A3024--21)
JP12 removed
JP13 (installed)
JP14 (soldered)
AEC CONTROL BOARD

(A3604--05)
JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP13, JP14, JP15 and JP16 in “B” (installed)
AEC ADAPTATION BOARD
(A3263--03)
JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12 in “A” (installed)
4-63
REV 4 5192971--100
Table A-6
Workstations
WS VALUE WS1 WS2 WS5 to WS8
0 (No-configured
Tube 1 (Tube--1) 1 (Tube--1)
workstation)
WM 1 (Bucky-1) 0 (Direct) --
AEC IC 1 (Ion Chamber -- 1) 1 (Ion Chamber -- 1) --
kVp Tracking -- -- --
RAD / RF RAD RAD --
Table A-7
Extended Memory Locations
MEMORY LOCATION FUNCTION VALUE
E01 TUBE-1 -- RAD filament stand-by (Autocalibrated. Not field changeable)
E02 TUBE-1 -- RAD Tube type
E03 Low Digital mA Loop Closed (from 10 mA to 80 mA)
E05 High Digital mA Loop Closed (from 100 mA)
E06 kV Loop
E07 Maximum kW (Factory set. Only field changeable to lower value)
E13 TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Delay
E15 TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Ceq kVp
* Note.-- The Memory Locations do not specified are not used.
4-64
REV 4 5192971--100
Table A-8
DRAC Control Configuration
3243SW1 3243SW2 3243SW3 3243SW4
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
Table A-9
Rotor Acceleration Time Configuration
3000SW2-2
OPERATION MODE
OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
Rotor Speed Low Speed (not used) High Speed
TUBE-1 3000SW2-7 3000SW2-8

ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME
AND FILAMENT SETTING TIME OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON) OPEN (OFF) CLOSED (ON)
_____ seconds
4-65
REV 4 5192971--100
Table A-10
mA Calibration Numbers
TUBE-1
FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kVp BREAK POINT

mA
A STATION
40 50 80 120
10
12.5
16
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
160
200
250
320
400
500
650
4-66
REV 4 5192971--100
CHAPTER 5
RENEWAL PARTS
5-1
REV 4 5192971--100
5-2
REV 4 5192971--100
GENERATOR
Item Designation
A FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3)
B BACK PANEL (MOD. 4)
C IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY -- INVERTER MODULE (MOD. 5)
D RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6)
E LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12)
F HV TRANSFORMER
G LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11)
A D
F E
G C B
5-3
REV 4 5192971--100
FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3)
Item Designation Qty Mfg. Ref. GE Ref. Remarks
A0 FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3)
A1 PCB, HT Controller 12 bits 1 SAT--A3000--33 2343379
A2 PCB, Interface Control Rad 1 SAT--A3004--09 2197211
A3 PCB, Filament Driver 1 SAT--A3004--10 5212054
A4 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit 1 SAT--53418001 2197216 PS1
A5 Rectifier Bridge FAGOR / 10 A 3 SAT--53404002 2197217 BR1, BR2, BR4
A6 Filter Line 1 SAT--50208001 5182134 LF3
A7 ON/OFF Relay K3 / 4PDT /110V 1 SAT--51401012 2197298 K3
A8 Resistor Kit, 1 Ohm 4 W 1 SAT--52712003 5309469
A9 Capacitor ELE 2400 Micro/50V 2 SAT--54002007 2197300 C6, C7
This Board is not included in the DAP Meter kit listed

A10 Radiation Meter Board 1 SAT--A3170--01 5309468
in the Positioner Service Manual SM 5192972--100
A11 Fuse F2 (1.5 A, 250 V) SB See Fuse Kit
A12 Fuses F6, F7, F8 (3 A, 250 V) SB See Fuse Kit
A13 Fuses F9 (0.4 A, 250 V) SB See Fuse Kit
A1 A2
A0
A12
A10
A11
A12
A12
A7
A8
A3 A5 A13 A6 A4 A9 A4
5-4
REV 4 5192971--100
BACK PANEL (MOD. 4)
B0 BACK PANEL (MOD. 4)
B1 PCB, Delayed Switch OFF 1 SAT--A3274--01 2347305
B2 PCB, ATP Console 1 SAT--A3024--21 2197344
B3 PCB, AEC Control 1 SAT--A3604--05 5200007 Used for AEC
B0
B1
B3
B2
5-5
REV 4 5192971--100
IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY -- INVERTER MODULE (MOD. 5)
IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY -- 1 SAT--A6362--56S 2406627 Inverter 3 Ph, 380-480 VAC

C0
INVERTER MODULE (MOD. 5)
C1 IGBT 300A/1200V for 3 Ph equipment 2 SAT--53416011S 2343388 Selected IGBT
C2 Capacitor 10 Micro /1000DCV 1 SAT--54001011 2197283 C9
C3 Capacitor ELE 3700 Micro /450V 4 SAT--54002011 2197284 C1, C2, C3, C4
C4 Capacitor 2 Micro/1000 V 3 SAT--54008002 2197285 C8, C10, C11
C5 PCB, IPM Driver 2 SAT--A3063--03 2197286 A1, A2
C6 PCB, Charge/Disharge Monitor 2 SAT--A3212--01 2197287
C7 PCB, Input Rectifier 3 Phase 1 SAT--A3255--01 2197288
C8 Rectifier SKKD 40F10 3 SAT--53404019 2197281 CR1, CR2, CR3 Behind Input Rectifier
C0
C2
C1
C7
C8
C6
C5
C4
C3
5-6
REV 4 5192971--100
RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6)
D0 RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6)
D1 Contactor 3 Phase / 24V / 50 A 2 SAT--51405007 5199153 K5, K6
D2 Resistor 20 Ohms / 100 W / 10% 1 SAT--52707021 2197293 R1
D3 Transformer T2 1 SAT--50509029 2197294 T2
D4 Green Light Lamp 220 VAC 1 SAT--54203006 2347306 NL1
D5 Input Filter for 3 Phase 1 SAT--A6371--01 2197296 LF1
D6 Fuses F12, F13 (10 A, 250V) SB See Fuse Kit
D7 Input Line Fuses F3 ,F4, F5 (50 A, 600V) See Fuse Kit
D0
D6
D3
D1 D4
D2
D7
D5
5-7
REV 4 5192971--100
LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12) / HV TRANSFORMER
LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL

E0
(MOD. 12)
E1 PCB, Locks 1 SAT--A3214--02 2197295
E2 PCB, AEC Cabinet Adaptation 1 SAT--A3263--03 2197333--2
E3 Fuses F1 (6 A, 250V) SB See Fuse Kit
E4 Fuses F2 (10 A, 250V) SB See Fuse Kit
F0 HV TRANSFORMER
F0 HV Transformer (150 kV ) 1 Tube, 400 VAC 1 SAT--A6097--07 2406645
F0 HV Transformer (150 kV ) 1 Tubes, 480 VAC 1 SAT--A6097--08 2406646
E0
E1 E2
E3, E4
F0
5-8
REV 4 5192971--100
LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11)
G0 LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11)
G1 LV-DRAC -- High Speed Starter for 400 VAC 1 SAT--A6378--26 2343392
G1 LV-DRAC -- High Speed Starter for 480 VAC 1 SAT--A6378--27 2406650
G2 PCB, Control DRAC 1 SAT--A3243--04 2197309
G3 PCB, Interface DRAC with Cable 1 SAT--A3240--05 2197310
G4 Fuses F3, F4 (15 A) and F1, F2 (0.5 A) See Fuse Kit
G5 PCB, Clamping (A3) 1 SAT--A3109--01 2248293
G6 LV-DRAC Transformer 380/400 VAC 2 SAT--6456--11 2359601 Main and Auxiliary Transformer 380/400 VAC
G6 LV-DRAC Transformer 480 VAC 2 SAT--6456--12 2406652 Main and Auxiliary Transformer 480 VAC
G7 DC BUS Cable 1 SAT--A3237--02 2357935
G8 Contactor 24 V / 15 A 3 SAT--51405004 2303891 K2, K3, KT1
G9 Auxiliar Contactor 1 SAT--51405006 2365949
G10 Fans Micro Boxer 24 VDC 3 SAT--53103001 2343394
G0 G10
G9
G8 G7
G5
G6
G4
G6
G1 G2 G3
5-9
REV 4 5192971--100
FUSE KIT
Item Designation Qty Mfg. Ref. GEHC Ref. Remarks
H0 FUSE KIT 1 SAT--A6696--02 2406667
Fuse Qty. Location
H1 Fuse SB, 400 mA, 250 V 1 FRONT PANEL (Mod. 3) : F9 on Power Supply
H2 Fuse SB, 500 mA, 250 V 2 LV--DRAC (Mod. 11) : F1, F2 on Interface DRAC PCB
H3 Fuse SB, 1.5 A, 250 V 1 FRONT PANEL (Mod. 3) : F2
H4 Fuse SB, 3 A, 250 V 3 FRONT PANEL (Mod. 3) : F6, F7, F8
H5 Fuse SB, 6 A, 250 V, T 4 LOCK & ADAPTATION PANEL (Mod. 12) : F1 on Locks PCB
H6 Fuse SB, 10 A, 250 V, T 4 RIGHT SIDE PANEL (Mod. 6) : F12, F13 on Transformer T2
LOCK & ADAPTATION PANEL (Mod. 12) : F2 on Locks PCB
H7 Fuse SB, 15 A, 600 V 2 LV--DRAC (Mod. 11) : F3, F4 on Interface DRAC PCB
H8 Fuse SB, 50 A, 600 VAC 3 RIGHT SIDE PANEL (Mod. 6) : F3, F4, F5 Input Line Fuses
H0
H4
H3
H4
H4
H1
5-10
REV 4 5192971--100
H0
H6
H5, H6
H8
H7
H2
5-11
REV 4 5192971--100
MISCELLANEOUS
LIST OF PARTS WITHOUT ILLUSTRATION
IO CABLES For Cables refer to the Positioner Service Manual

SM 5192972--100
J0 COVER
Generator Cover 1 SAT--A6470--08 2357942
5-12
REV 4 5192971–100
CHAPTER 6
SCHEMATICS
6-1
REV 4 5192971–100
6-2
REV 4 5192971–100
SCHEMATIC
GENERATOR CABINET
Illustrations 1 to 18 Block Diagrams
54302010 Line Powered Compact Generator
A3274–01 Delayed Switch-Off Board
A3000–33 HT Controller Board
A3004–10 Filament Control Board
A3009–11 Interface Control Board
A3063–03 IPM Driver Board
A3212–01 Charge / Discharge Monitor Board
A3024–21 ATP Console CPU Board
A3604–05 HR AEC Control Board
A3263–03 AEC Adaptation Board
A3243–04 Control DRAC Board (High Speed Starter)
A3240–05 Interface DRAC Board (High Speed Starter)
A3109–01 Clamping Board (High Speed Starter)
A3179–02 Auto ON/OFF Board
A3170–01 Radiation Meter Board
6-3
REV 4 5192971–100
6-4
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 1.– System Block Diagram (with Serial Communication)
6-5
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 2.– Generator Block Diagram
6-6
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 3.– Switch ON–OFF
6-7
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 4.– Charge Circuitry
6-8
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 5.– Switch–ON Sequence
6-9
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 6.– Serial Link
6-10
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 7.– ATP Console CPU Board. Block Digram
6-11
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 8.– APR Checking
6-12
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 9.– Interrupt Controller
6-13
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 10.– HT Controller Block Diagram
6-14
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 11.– Preparation and Exposure Time Control
6-15
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 12.– Filament Connection Block Diagram
6-16
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 13.– Closed Loop Block Diagram
6-17
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 14.– LV-DRAC Module Block Diagram
6-18
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 15.– LV-DRAC Brake
6-19
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 16.– LV-DRAC Speed Control
6-20
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 17.– Inverter Block Diagram
6-21
REV 4 5192971–100
Illustration 18.– HV Transformer
6-22
F E D C B A
POWER INPUT TRANSFORMER --PWR OFF

( S3,S4--C4) 6J2
6T2 3F2 240 VAC SW --PWR ON
LVDC POWER SUPPLY +5V 4
T 1.5A --PWR OFF
44 530 VAC 240 VAC 20 9 5 +5V +12V 5
3LF3 1 3PS1 7 --12V --PWR ON
+12V 3
480 VAC 115 VAC SW 2 10 +12V
10 1 3 3F9 jumper
connect 14 3 --12V 9
3F8 T 0.4A 8 --12V
according 9 440 VAC T 3A 3K3 4 GND 2
2 4 9 +12V UNR
4 with the 115 VAC 18 115 VAC jumper 4
input line 13 8
7 415 VAC 6 +12V UNR
( S3,S4--B3) 6
GND
POWER 8 400 VAC 7
LAMP 0 VAC 17 0 VAC GND
1
5 230 VAC GND
3F6
T 3A
6NL1 4 21 VAC 15
3TS1
0 VAC 14 1 ohm 54
+24V--PSU +24V 240 VAC SPLY
4w
40 110 VAC -- + 10 6 17
3F7 -- + 3BR2 +24V
T 3A 3BR4
11 VAC 12 11 7 3K3 16
3C7 3C6 --12 V
2400 MF 2400 MF 15 +12 V
0 VAC 11 26
240 VAC SW 240 VAC SW
27
3 28 VAC 35 + 115 VAC SW 115 VAC SW 3
-- 3BR1
26 VAC 34
24 VAC 16
3 24 VAC TR
60 VAC 22 VAC 33
20 VAC 32 +SUPPLY
20 VAC TR ( S5--F2)
16 VAC 31 ( S3,S4--E1)
2 14 VAC 30 --SUPPLY
12 VAC 19 0 VAC TR
1 0 VAC 0 VAC 13
12 8
Shield Stud THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO THREE PHASE GENERATORS
MANUFACTURED FOR INPUT LINES FROM 400 VAC
T3 L3
0 VAC RTR Note.-- In Three Phase Generators manufactured for Input Lines up to 240 VAC,
60 VAC RTR ( S8--F4)
Input Transformer 6T2 is as shown on sheet 2.
230 VAC RTR
6F13
T 10A
6F12 6R1
20 ohm
T 10A
100w AC1 + BUS +
6F3 6LF1 ( S5--F2)
2 T 50A C3 CR1 CR2 CR3 2
L1 T1 1 nF R1 R3 R5
L1
33 ohm 33 ohm 33 ohm
6F4 C4
T 50A 470 nF C1 C5 C9
MAINS
LOAD
L2 L2 T2 L2 T2 C12
470 nF 470 nF 470 nF
470 nF
6F5 AC2
T 50A
L3 L3 T3 L3 T3
C7
GND 1 nF
C2 C6 C10
C8
NEUTRAL DELAYED 470 nF 470 nF 470 nF
470 nF
+24V
A2 85
12TS4 Note.- 12TS4, 12F14, 12F15, 6K6 R2 R4 R6
holding Contactor
N and 12F16 are optional NC 33 ohm 33 ohm 33 ohm
AC3 BUS --
A3
U 12F14 pull--in 86 C11 -- ( S5--F2)
1
T 15A 1 nF INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD
V 12F15 A1
5A5
W 12F16 T 15A
1 T 15A --CHRG DR
+24V--PSU A2 85 NAME DATE SHEET / OF
holding 6K5
( S3,S4--D4) DRAWING
F. GARCIA 30/09/02
DWG:
54302010
NC Contactor 1/8
6J3 A3 D CN 06/159 F. GARCIA 08/08/06 REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 D C B A REV
10 pull--in 86
C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
--LINE CONT --LINE CONT
A1
( S3,S4--B4) B CN 03/46,55,58,60 F. GARCIA 09/04/03
SEDECAL COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC
A CN 02/197 F. GARCIA 12/12/02
GENERATOR
F E D REV DESCRIPTION ISSUED BY DATE
F E D C B A
POWER INPUT TRANSFORMER --PWR OFF

( S3,S4--C4) 6J2
6T2 3F2 240 VAC SW --PWR ON
connect LVDC POWER SUPPLY +5V 4
T 1.5A --PWR OFF
according 7 240 VAC 240 VAC 20 9 5 +5V +12V 5
3LF3 1 3PS1 7 --12V --PWR ON
with the
+12V 3
input line 6 115 VAC SW 2 10 +12V
1 3 3F9 jumper
14 3 --12V 9
3F8 T 0.4A 8 --12V
T 3A 3K3 4 GND 2
115 VAC 18 2 4 9 +12V UNR
4 115 VAC jumper 4
13 8
POWER 6 +12V UNR
( S3,S4--B3) 6
LAMP
GND
5 230 VAC 7
0 VAC 17 0 VAC GND
6NL1 1
4 GND
3F6
T 3A
21 VAC 15
21 208 VAC 3TS1

0 VAC 14 54
23 120 VAC +24V--PSU 1 ohm +24V 240 VAC SPLY
4w
-- + 10 6 17
3F7 -- + 3BR2 +24V
3 110 VAC T 3A 3BR4
11 VAC 12 11 7 3K3 16
3C7 3C6 --12 V
8 2400 MF 2400 MF 15 +12 V
22 100 VAC 0 VAC 11 26
240 VAC SW 240 VAC SW
27
3 28 VAC 35 + 115 VAC SW 115 VAC SW 3
26 VAC --
34 3BR1
24 VAC 16
9 60 VAC 22 VAC 24 VAC TR
33
20 VAC 32 ( S5--F2) +SUPPLY
20 VAC TR
16 VAC 31 ( S3,S4--E1)
2 14 VAC 30 0 VAC TR
12 VAC 19 --SUPPLY
1 0 VAC 0 VAC 13
12 8
Shield Stud
L1 T1 THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO SINGLE PHASE GENERATORS

0 VAC RTR MANUFACTURED FOR INPUT LINES UP TO 240 VAC
60 VAC RTR ( S8--F4)
230 VAC RTR
6F13
T 10A
6F12
T 10A 6R1 AC2 +
Note.- For Two Phases, replace 20 ohm, 100w BUS +
Neutral Cartidge (L2/N) by Fuse 6F4. C7 CR2 CR3 ( S5--F2)
2 6F3 6LF1 R3 R5 2
1 nF
T 50A 33 ohm 33 ohm
L1 L1 T1
MAINS
LOAD
Neutral or 6F4 C5 C9
Cartridge T 50A 470 nF 470 nF
L2 T2 L2 T2 C8
N / L2
470 nF
GND
C6 C10
12TS4 470 nF 470 nF
Note.- 12TS4, 12F14
N AC3
and 12F15, are optional
DELAYED R4 R6
V 12F15 +24V C11
12F14 A2 85 6K6 33 ohm 33 ohm
1 nF
U T 15A T 15A Contactor BUS --
holding
NC -- ( S5--F2) 1
W A3
INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD
pull--in 86
+24V--PSU A2 85 5A5
--CHRG DR A1
holding
1 NC ( S3,S4--D4)
A3 NAME DATE SHEET / OF
6J3
pull--in 86
DRAWING F. GARCIA 30/09/02
DWG:
54302010
A1 2/8
10 D CN 06/159 F. GARCIA 08/08/06 REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 D C B A REV
--LINE CONT --LINE CONT 6K5
Contactor C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
( S3,S4--B4)
B CN 03/46,55,58,60 F. GARCIA 09/04/03
A CN 02/197 F. GARCIA 12/12/02
SEDECAL COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC
REV DESCRIPTION ISSUED BY DATE
GENERATOR
F E D
F E D C B A
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO GENERATORS WITH P5

INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD +5V
HT TRANSFORMER FOR TWO X--RAY TUBES 6
3A2 +5V +24V
8 +24V--PSU
P1 +24V
5
7 +24V
--PWR ON --PWR ON 16
( S1, 2--A4 ) 8 +24V DELAYED +24V
--PWR OFF --PWR OFF 2
P2 HT CONTROL BOARD P1 4 DELAYED +24V
4 --12V PT CRL 4
1 3A1 10 1 --LINE CONT ( S1, 2--E1 )
+12V --12V HT--C CLK 3 --LINE CONT
--ON 4 +5V OUT (S5--F3)
2 +12V 11 See NOTE 2 --TUBE 2 SCL +5V OUT
+5V HT--C DAT 2
( S8--F1) +12V GND 12
6J3 3 +5V 12 --T2 SCL 6 DISCHARGE 1 DISCHARGE 1
--TUBE 2 SCL +12V
( S8--F1) 14
(S5--A2)
4 GND 13 1 DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 1 RTN
7 --FIL1 SCL GND
PT CRL 5 GND 14 13
--START --START DISCHARGE 2 DISCHARGE 2
15 ( S8--F1) 10 6J3
--KV UP 15 P3 DISCHARGE 2 RTN DISCHARGE 2 RTN
--PRE CHRG +24V 9 9
8 P1 16
--KV DWN --CHRG DR --CHRG DR 4 GND LINE SYNC
3 1 ( S1, 2--E1 ) +24V 12
HT--C DAT --KV UP 17 2 --BUCKY EXP
6 2 --KV DWN --TUBE 3 GND P3 14
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
HT--C CLK 1 3 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD
1 6 --EXP GND LINE SYNC 11
--EXP P3 ERROR DRAC --BUCKY 2 DR CMD --BUCKY 2 DR CMD
2 4 C--HT DAT 6 ( S3--A2 ) P4 16
C--HT DAT ERROR DRAC P2 GND
5 5 C--HT CLK 1 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 12 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 1
C--HT CLK --KV DR1 --KV DR1 PT SPLY
4 3 --PREP 2 ( S5--F3)
--PREP --KV DR2 --KV DR2 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 13 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 3 3TS1
IC SPLY 1
9 4 9 5 39
GND --FIL DR1 BUCKY SPLY IC SPLY 2 PT SPLY
7 5 5 AUX BUCKY SPLY 7 42
--PREP --CHRG --FIL DR2 IC GND IC GND
3 8 3 3
( S3--A1) --FIL 1 ACK GND 11 --BUCKY 1 MOTION 2 --ROOM LIGHT
--ROOM LIGHT
10 --BUCKY 2 MOTION 4 (S5--B4) 48
--CHRG ROOM LIGHT SW ROOM LIGHT SW
( S5--A2) P4 P5 8 6 47
BUCKY 1 DR ROOM LIGHT SUP ROOM LIGHT SUP
3 5 7
RTR I RTR I BUCKY 2 DR 18
8 --RTR RUN GND
( S8--F1) FIL I 7 18 P4
--ACC --TUBE 2 SCL
4 See NOTE 2 6 19 6
--BRAKE --FIL 1 SCL --BUCKY EXP
1 --KV 9 17 2 115 VAC (S1,2--E4)
115 VAC
--HS SCL FIL PREHEAT 1 NOTE 1:
2 +KV 4 14 0 VAC
0 VAC
--RTR RDY FIL RTN 115 VAC SW Wires FL 1 RTN (P4--15) and
3TS1 6 --MA 3 3
-- IGBT FAULT 22 115 VAC SW FL 2 RTN (P4--16) are factory inverted
2 -- IGBT FAULT --FIL 1 ACK 15
7 1 ( S5--D3) on the INTERFACE CONTROL Board
BUCKY SPLY +MA -- AUTO OFF INH FIL 1 RTN
9 5 10 See NOTE 1 16
BUCKY SPLY GND HI MA FIL 2 RTN
46 20 --BRAKE
AUX BUCKY SPLY SOL DR (S8--F1)
5
--BUCKY 1 MOTION
12 --ACC
--BUCKY 2 MOTION (S8--F1) 6J1 See NOTE 2
4
BUCKY 1 DR +24V 10
2 11 + 24V 2
BUCKY 2 DR J1 HT TRANSFORMER 8
3 ERROR DRAC ERROR DRAC
0 VAC K 9HT1 ( S3--D3 ) 9
HI MA GND
10 0 VAC A
0 VAC GND 1
6 P3 --RTR RUN
BUCKY 1 MOT RTN B
+KV 2
7 DELAYED P1 2 Red --TUBE 1 RTR
GND FIL PREHEAT C mA
--KV 3
BUCKY 2 MOT RTN
13
+24V 5
6
--FIL DR1 FIL RTN
1
4
D
+MA ] posts
test
4
--TUBE 2 RTR
--HS SCL
14 +5V --FIL DR2 FIL SUP E
GND --MA Black 5
3 --TUBE 2 SCL F --RTR RDY
1 +5V FIL 1 RTN
SUPPLY (BUCKY 1) 8 (S8--F1) 6
DELAYED +24V H --SF PREP --SF PREP
8 J1 FIL 2 RTN ( S5--B4)
SUPPLY (BUCKY 2) 7 HT SW CONTROL P1 HT DR1 7
FIL I G --FL EXP --FL EXP
10A2 1 FIL SUP ( S5--C4 ) 12
1 J2 N --PREP
GND 2 SW COM
1 P3 HT DR2 --PREP 11
U GND
2 3 SW1 ( S5--C4 ) ( S5--F3) 1
P2 FILAMENT V
3 4 SW2 COM 6J3
4 DRIVER 0 VAC SHLD
+SUPPLY +SUPPLY 5 J ( S5--E2 )
BOARD +24V 4 240 VAC SW --HT INTLK 13
( S1, 2--B3 ) 1 --HT INTLK
--SUPPLY --SUPPLY 3A3
1
NAME DATE SHEET / OF
NOTE 2: For High Speed version: DRAWING F. GARCIA 30/09/02
DWG:
54302010
3/8
D CN 06/159 F. GARCIA 08/08/06 REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 D C B A REV
“--T2 SCL” signal is shortcircuited with “--TUBE 2 SCL” signal.
C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
“--ACC” and “--BRAKE” signals for Low Speed Version become “--TUBE 1 RTR”
and “--TUBE 2 RTR” respectively. B
A
CN 03/46,55,58,60
CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
12/12/02 SEDECAL COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC
6J1 connector used only for High Speed Version (see LV-DRAC documentation). GENERATOR
F E D C B A
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO GENERATORS WITH
P5
HT TRANSFORMER FOR ONLY ONE X--RAY TUBE INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD +5V
6
3A2 +5V +24V
8
P1 +24V +24V--PSU
5
7 +24V
--PWR ON --PWR ON 16
( S1, 2--A4 ) 8 +24V DELAYED +24V
--PWR OFF --PWR OFF 2
P2 HT CONTROL BOARD P1 4 DELAYED +24V
4 --12V PT CRL --LINE CONT ( S1, 2--E1 ) 4
1 3A1 10 1
+12V --12V HT--C CLK 3 --LINE CONT
--ON 4 +5V OUT
2 +12V 11 See NOTE 2 --TUBE 2 SCL +5V OUT ( S5--F3 )
+5V HT--C DAT 2
( S8--F1 ) +12V GND 12
6J3 3 +5V 12 --T2 SCL 6 DISCHARGE 1 DISCHARGE 1
--TUBE 2 SCL
( S5--A2 )
( S8--F1 ) +12V 14
4 GND 13 1 DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 1 RTN
7 --FIL1 SCL GND
PT CRL 5 GND 14 13
--START --START DISCHARGE 2 DISCHARGE 2
15 ( S8--F1 ) 10 6J3
--KV UP 15 P3 DISCHARGE 2 RTN DISCHARGE 2 RTN
8 --PRE CHRG +24V 9 9
--KV DWN P1 16 --CHRG DR GND LINE SYNC
--CHRG DR 4 +24V
3 1 ( S1, 2--E1 ) 12
HT--C DAT --KV UP 17 2 --BUCKY EXP
6 2 --KV DWN --TUBE 3 GND P3 14
--BUCKY 1 DR CMD
HT--C CLK 1 3 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD
1 6 --EXP GND LINE SYNC 11
--EXP P3 ERROR DRAC --BUCKY 2 DR CMD --BUCKY 2 DR CMD
2 4 C--HT DAT 6 ( S4--A2 ) P4 16
C--HT DAT ERROR DRAC P2 GND
5 5 C--HT CLK 1 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 12 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 1
C--HT CLK --KV DR1 --KV DR1 PT SPLY
4 3 --PREP 2 ( S5--F3 )
--PREP --KV DR2 --KV DR2 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 13 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 3 3TS1
IC SPLY 1
9 4 9 5 39
GND --FIL DR1 BUCKY SPLY IC SPLY 2 PT SPLY
7 5 5 AUX BUCKY SPLY 7 42
--PREP --CHRG --FIL DR2 IC GND IC GND
3 8 3 3
( S4--A1 ) --FIL 1 ACK GND 11 --BUCKY 1 MOTION 2 --ROOM LIGHT
--ROOM LIGHT
10 --BUCKY 2 MOTION 4 ( S5--B4 ) 48
--CHRG ROOM LIGHT SW ROOM LIGHT SW
( S5--A2 ) P4 P5 8 6 47
BUCKY 1 DR ROOM LIGHT SUP ROOM LIGHT SUP
3 5 7
RTR I RTR I BUCKY 2 DR 18
8 --RTR RUN GND
( S8--F1 ) FIL I 7 18 P4
--ACC --TUBE 2 SCL
4 See NOTE 2 6 19 6
--BRAKE --FIL 1 SCL --BUCKY EXP
1 --KV 9 17 2 115 VAC (S1,2--E4)
115 VAC NOTE 1.- Only for one FL tube :
--HS SCL FIL PREHEAT 1
2 +KV 4 14 0 VAC Wires FL 1 RTN (P4--15) and FL 2 RTN
0 VAC
--RTR RDY FIL RTN 115 VAC SW
3TS1 6 --MA 3 3 (P4--16) are factory inverted on the
-- IGBT FAULT 22 115 VAC SW
2 -- IGBT FAULT --FIL 1 ACK 15 INTERFACE CONTROL Board, and
7 1 ( S5--D3 )
BUCKY SPLY +MA -- AUTO OFF INH FIL 1 RTN 6J3--13 is disconnected and insulated.
9 5 10 See NOTE 1 16
BUCKY SPLY GND HI MA FIL 2 RTN
46 20 --BRAKE
AUX BUCKY SPLY SOL DR ( S8--F1 )
5
--BUCKY 1 MOTION
12 --ACC
--BUCKY 2 MOTION ( S8--F1 ) 6J1 See NOTE 2
4
BUCKY 1 DR +24V 10
2 11 + 24V 2
BUCKY 2 DR J1 HT TRANSFORMER 8
3 ERROR DRAC ERROR DRAC
0 VAC K 9HT1 ( S4--D3 ) 9
HI MA GND
10 0 VAC A
0 VAC GND 1
6 P3 --RTR RUN
BUCKY 1 MOT RTN B
+KV 2
7 DELAYED P1 2 Red --TUBE 1 RTR
GND FIL PREHEAT C mA
--KV 3
BUCKY 2 MOT RTN
13
+24V 5
6
--FIL DR1 FIL RTN
1
4
D
+MA ] posts
test
4
--TUBE 2 RTR
--HS SCL
14 +5V --FIL DR2 FIL SUP E
GND --MA Black 5
3 F --RTR RDY
1 +5V FIL 1 RTN
SUPPLY (BUCKY 1) 8 6
DELAYED +24V H --SF PREP --SF PREP
8 FIL 2 RTN P1 HT DR1 ( S5--B4 )
SUPPLY (BUCKY 2) 7 7
FIL I G ( S5--C4 ) --FL EXP --FL EXP
FIL SUP 12
1 N --PREP --PREP
GND SW COM P3 HT DR2
( S5--C4 ) ( S5--F3 ) 11
U GND
SW1 1
P2 FILAMENT V SHLD COM
SW2 ( S5--E2 ) 6J3
4 DRIVER J
+SUPPLY +SUPPLY BOARD --HT INTLK OPEN -- for Fl tube 13
( S1, 2--B3 ) 1 --HT INTLK
--SUPPLY --SUPPLY 3A3 GND -- for RAD tube
1
NOTE 2: For High Speed version: DRAWING F. GARCIA 30/09/02
DWG:
54302010
CN 06/159 4/8
D F. GARCIA 08/08/06 REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 D C B A REV
“--T2 SCL” signal is shortcircuited with “--TUBE 2 SCL” signal.
C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
“--ACC” and “--BRAKE” signals for Low Speed Version become “--TUBE 1 RTR”
CN 03/46,55,58,60
and “--TUBE 2 RTR” respectively. B
A CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
6J1 connector used only for High Speed Version (see LV-DRAC documentation). GENERATOR
F E D C B A
HT DR2 3TS1
( S3,S4--B1 ) 22 --DOOR
J2--19
5C11 23 DOOR RTN
5C10 2 MF 5R2 J2--18
2 MF 5L1 1 Mohm, 2w 24 --ROOM LIGHT
5C8 ( S3,S4--B3 ) J2--8
2 MF HT DR1 36 --SF PREP to J2 connector of the
4 ( S3,S4--A1 ) J2--4 4
( S3,S4--B1 ) 37 --FL EXP ATP CONSOLE board
( S3,S4--A1 ) J2--17
51 PT INPUT
J2--13
C2E1
C1
E2
C2E1
C1
E2
5C9 52 --ALOE
J2--24
40 MF for Single Phase Generator 53 --READY
5IGBT 2 J2--9
5IGBT 1 10 MF for Three Phase Generator
SPR--+5 REG OUT
SPR--+5 REG OUT

CPI--CONTROL
CPI--CONTROL
FPO--FAULT
FNO--FAULT
FPO--FAULT
FNO--FAULT
VNC--GND
VPC--GND
VNC--GND
VPC--GND
4TS3
VNI--VCC
VPI--VCC
VNI--VCC
VPI--VCC
1 --THERM. 1
SNR--
SNR--
J2--3
CNI--
10/11J7--5
CNI--
2 --THERM. 2
J2--20 10/11J7--6 ( S6,S7,S8--F1 )
J3 J4 J3 J4
2 3 4 1 5 2 3 4 1 5 2 3 4 1 5 2 3 4 1 5 3 THERM. COM
J2--5 10/11J7--7
115 VAC
IPM DRIVER 2
115 VAC
IPM DRIVER 1 7
to J2 connector of the --SFC
FAULT
J2--16
FAULT
0 VAC
5A2
0 VAC
5A1
GND
GND
DR1
DR2
+5V
18
DR1
DR2
+5V
ATP CONSOLE board
J2--11 ABC OUT
19 ( only required for DSI option)
3 J1 1 2 3 4 J2 1 2 3 4 J1 1 2 3 4 J2 1 2 3 4 3
J2--14 FL DSI
20
115 VAC SW J2--15 CAM SYNC
0 VAC
+5V OUT
GND
--KV DR1
( S3,S4--D3 ) For Three Phase Generator
--KV DR2
P2
--IGBT FAULT DC + + 2
5L2 DISCHARGE 1 RTN
200 uH ( S3,S4--D2 ) 5A3 1 ( S3,S4--B4 )
-- DISCHARGE 1
5C3 5C4 CHARGE /
BUS + DC + P1
3900 MF 3900 MF DISCHARGE
( S1, 2--A2 ) To Three Phase Generator MONITOR #1 2 --CHRG
remove 5L2 for Single Phase Generator BOARD 1 ( S3--F3 )
To Single Phase Generator
BUS -- DC -- P1
CHARGE /
( S1, 2--A1 ) DISCHARGE 2
5C1 5C2
COM 3900 MF 3900 MF MONITOR #2 1
2 BOARD 2
( S3,S4--B1 )
+ P2
5A4
2 DISCHARGE 2 RTN
DC -- -- ( S3,S4--B4 )
LOCKS BOARD 1 DISCHARGE 2
TB7 F1 TB7
T 6A
7A3
1 3 24 VAC
24 VAC TR To Lamp
2 4 (Collimator)
( S1, 2 -- D3) 0 VAC TR 0 VAC For Single Phase Generator
9 P2
20 VAC TR DC + + 2
10 DISCHARGE 1 RTN
F2 5A3 1 ( S3,S4--B4 )
-- DISCHARGE 1
T 10A 7 CHARGE /
5C1 5C2 5C3 5C4 P1
5 3900 MF 3900 MF 3900 MF 3900 MF DISCHARGE
+ 2 --CHRG
D1 +24 VDC MONITOR #1
R1 To Locks BOARD 1 ( S3,S4--F3 ) 1
1K5 6
0 VDC DC --
8
C1--C4
2200MF 11
1
DWG:
54302010
5/8
TS4 D CN 06/159 F. GARCIA 08/08/06 REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 D C B A REV
C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
+
+24V CN 03/46,55,58,60
FANS POWER SUPPLY --
GND
B
A CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
GENERATOR
F E D C B A
Ferrite Ferrite
INTERFASE DRAC--HF PCB
CONTROL DRAC PCB J3 Core Core J1 ( A3240--05 )
( A3243 -- 03 ) Ribbon Cable Connections ( ) for
1 1 only one FL tube
+5 VDC +5 VDC 11A2
2 2
11A1 +5 VDC
3 3
+5 VDC 11TS2
+5 VDC +5 VDC
+5 VDC 4 4 +5 VDC 1 (9)
4 MAIN T1 4
5 5
GND GND 2 (10)
6 6 AUX T1
GND GND
J4 7 7
GND GND COM T1 3 (11)
1 8 8
GND GND GND 4 (12)
ERROR DRAC 2 9 9 --THERM. 1
6J1--8 ERROR CODE +15 VDC +15 VDC
3 NC +15 VDC 10 10 +15 VDC THERM. COM 5 (13)
cable to High Speed Starter connection 6J1 ( S3,S4--A2 )
--RTR RDY 4 11 11
6J1--5 RDY1 +15 VDC +15 VDC 6 (14)
5
RDY1 OUT +15 VDC
12 12
+15 VDC See Note FAN 1
6 13 13 0 VAC 7 (15)
+15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC
GND 7 --15 VDC 14 14 --15 VDC
6J1--11 RDY1 RTN GND 8 (16)
8 VUNR 15 15
NC VUNR
9 16 16
SPARE2 VUNR VUNR
10 17 17
SPARE2 RTN PRECH IF PRECH IF
11 18 18 PRECH IF 115 VAC SW 17
SPARE1 PRECH IF
12 19 19 18
SPARE1 RTN +5 VDC +5 VDC 240 VAC SW
6J1--10 +24 VDC 13 +5 VDC 20 20
SF +5 VDC
--SF PREP 14 T3 IF 21 21
6J1--6 SF RTN T3 IF
15 T3 IF 22 22
3 FL T3 IF 3
--FL EXP 16 T2 IF 23 23
6J1--7 FL RTN T2 IF
17 24 24 Note:
HS T2 IF T2 IF Connect FAN to 11TS2--17
--HS SCL 18 T1 IF 25 25
6J1--4 HS RTN T1 IF or 11TS2--18 as required
19 T1 IF 26 26 T1 IF
ST
6J1--1 --RTR RUN 20 ST RTN
21 AUXILIARY CLAMPING
T3 J1
22 T3 RTN TRANSFORMER
23
T2 P
--TUBE 2 RTR 24 11K2 11K3
6J1--3 T2 RTN 4 1 12 R2 R1 R2 R1 +24 VDC
AUX
J5
10 2 1 2 1 1
11K2 A1 11K3 A1
2
7 8 4 J4
A2 A2
3 1
3 VR1 K1
COM V480LA20A COM T1 2
1 8 AUX T1 Note 3
K3
SHL 2 MAIN T1
2 10 11K2 2
4 3 Note :
11K3
1 7 12 R4 R3 Connections to 11TS2 of
PRIN
R4 R3 the Generator Cabinet J3
P
4 3
240 VAC SW 1
MAIN 2 to 11TS2
J2 Ferrite Ferrite 0 VAC
TRANSFORMER J2
Core Core
1 5
V-- --DC OUT
2 4
V+ +DC OUT
3
GND
2 +DC IN
from DC voltage Bus { 1 --DC IN
( S5--D2 )
Note.-- 11J7 is an aerial connector 11J7
+24 VDC 1
1
+24V DELAYED
3
THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO HIGH SPEED STARTER
GND FOR ONLY ONE X--RAY TUBE (OPTIONAL)
4
1 240 VAC SW
115 VAC SW
2
DWG:
54302010
--THERM. 1 5 to 11TS2 6/8
4TS3--1 D CN 06/159 F. GARCIA 08/08/06 REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 D C B A REV
( S5--B3 ) THERM. COM 7
4TS3--3 C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
8 CN 03/46,55,58,60
0 VAC B F. GARCIA 09/04/03
A CN 02/197 F. GARCIA 12/12/02 SEDECAL COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC
GENERATOR
F E D
F E D C B A
Ferrite Ferrite
INTERFASE DRAC--HF PCB 11TS2
CONTROL DRAC PCB J3 Core Core J1 ( A3240--05 )
MAIN T1 1
( A3243 -- 03 ) 1
Ribbon Cable 1
+5 VDC +5 VDC AUX T1 2
2 2 11A2
11A1 +5 VDC +5 VDC
COM T1 3
+5 VDC 3 3 +5 VDC
+5 VDC 4 4 +5 VDC --THERM. 1 4
4 5 5 4
GND GND THERM. COM 5
GND 6 6
J4 GND
7 7 FAN 1 6
GND GND
1 8 8
GND GND GND 0 VAC 7
ERROR DRAC 2 +15 VDC 9 9
6J1--8 ERROR CODE +15 VDC
3 NC +15 VDC 10 10 +15 VDC GND 8
11 11
cable to High Speed Starter connection 6J1 ( S3,S4--A2 )
--RTR RDY 4 9
6J1--5 RDY1 +15 VDC +15 VDC MAIN T2
5 12 12
RDY1 OUT +15 VDC +15 VDC 10
6 13 13 AUX T2
+15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC
GND 7 --15 VDC 14 14 --15 VDC 11
6J1--11 RDY1 RTN COM T2
8 VUNR 15 15
NC VUNR 12
9 16 16 --THERM. 2
SPARE2 VUNR VUNR
10 17 17 13
SPARE2 RTN PRECH IF PRECH IF THERM. COM
11 18 18 PRECH IF
SPARE1 PRECH IF FAN 2 14
12 19 19
SPARE1 RTN +5 VDC +5 VDC
6J1--10 +24 VDC 13 +5 VDC 20 20 0 VAC 15
SF +5 VDC
--SF PREP 14 T3 IF 21 21
6J1--6 SF RTN T3 IF GND 16
15 T3 IF 22 22
3 FL T3 IF 3
--FL EXP 16 T2 IF 23 23
6J1--7 FL RTN T2 IF
17 T2 IF 24 24 T2 IF
HS 25 25 +24 VDC
--HS SCL 18 T1 IF T1 IF
6J1--4 HS RTN
19 T1 IF 26 26 T1 IF
ST
--RTR RUN 20 11KT1 A1 11K3 A1
6J1--1 ST RTN
21 Note : 11K2 A1
T3 AUXILIARY CLAMPING J4
22 T3 RTN TRANSFORMER Connections to 11TS2 of A2 A2
J1 1
23 the Generator Cabinet K1
T2 P A2
--TUBE 2 RTR 24 11K2 11K3 11KT1 2
6J1--3 T2 RTN 4 1 12 R2 R1 R2 R1 R2 R1
AUX AUX T2 3
Note J5 K3
AUX T1
10 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
2
7 8 4
3
3 VR1
COM V480LA20A
1 8 COM T1
Note
2 COM T2
2 SHL 2
10 11K2
4 3 11K3 11KT1
1 7 12 R4 R3 R4 R3
PRIN MAIN T2 J3
P R4 R3 Note
MAIN T1
4 3 4 3 240 VAC SW 1
Ferrite MAIN Ferrite 2 to 11TS2
J2 TRANSFORMER J2 0 VAC
Core Core
V-- 1 5
--DC OUT
2 4
V+ +DC OUT
3
GND
2 +DC IN
from DC voltage Bus
( S5--D2 )
{ DC+
DC--
1 --DC IN
Note.-- 11J7 is an aerial connector 11J7
+24 VDC 11KT1 1
1 11TS2 11KT1 for TUBE 2 SCL 72 71
+24V DELAYED tube 2 62 61
4 18
FAN 2
to 11TS2
external TUBE 1 SCL THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO HIGH SPEED STARTER
240 VAC SW 54 53 interface 84 83
2
FAN 1 TUBE SCL COMM FOR ONE OR TWO X--RAY TUBES (STANDARD)
17
1 115 VAC SW tube 1
GND
3
DWG:
54302010
--THERM. 1 5 7/8
4TS3--1 D CN 06/159 F. GARCIA 08/08/06 REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 D C B A REV
--THERM. 2 6
( S5--B3 ) 4TS3--2 C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05
THERM. COM 7 to 11TS2
B CN 03/46,55,58,60 F. GARCIA 09/04/03
4TS3--3
8 A CN 02/197 F. GARCIA 12/12/02 SEDECAL COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC
0 VAC
GENERATOR
F E D
F E D C B A
NOTE.-- 10T3, 10C5--1 and 10C5--1 NOTE.-- Use tube 2

THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO LOW SPEED STARTER 10R4--1 for 330 VAC Stator 15uF connections for Fl tube
for external interface
10C5--2
TUBE SCL COM

30uF
240 VAC SW
115 VAC SW
TUBE 1 SCL
TUBE 2 SCL
10TS2
Note.-- Capacitor 10C5 could be 40 uF 10R4--1
4 depending on tube used. 1 Mohm, 2w 4
6
FAN 1
10R4--2 14
NOTE.-- 10J7 and 10J8 are FAN 2
aerial connectors 1 Mohm, 2w
30uF 15uF 3
COM T1
11 12 13 14 15 16 24 25 26 27 28 9 10 11 12 11
10J8 TB1 TB1 10 21 22 23
J1 T1/T2 COMM COM T2
1 7
1 0 VAC 0 VAC
230 VAC RTR KACC
K1--1 15
( S1, 2--D2 )
60 VAC RTR
2 TB3 KCT TB3 TB4 KCTRR TB4 0 VAC
3 2 T2 K2--3 T1 T2 K5--1 T1 5
0 VAC RTR KCTR THERM. COMM.
F1 KCTRR K4--2
T 6A 13
3 Tube 2 Tube 1 Tube 2 Tube 1 K5--3 THERM. COM THERM. COMM.
4
47 T2 --THERM 1 --THERM 1
KBR
10RC1 2w 10T3 330V 7 TB2 6 5 K3--2
TB1 12
7 --THERM 2 --THERM 2
8 T1 KCTR
100 nF IAUX CR6 17 2
KBU4J K4--1 AUX T1
+
1 KV 9 9
Tube 1 KCT 10 1 18 10
3 10LF2 10K1 AUX T2 3
220V K2--1
2 4 19 1
MAIN T1
2 1 T1
1 3 6 5 20 9
KBR MAIN T2
6
TB2 7 _ K3--1 KCTR
8
0V 5 T2 IMAIN K4--4 GND
9
10 1 16
4 +24V J1 GND
Tube 2 CR11 TP2
1N4007 +24V
T1/T2 COMM 1
+24V DELAYED
(to 10TS2) CR10 C4
CR12
+24V VM48 1N4007 100uF
Q2 35V
+
+24V DELAYED 2N4401
CR4 TP1
KCTR 1N4007 C3 R8
1K5 GND
3 10R5 K4 100nF 2
+24V _ GND
475
10K1 2w CR8
4 KCT CR5 1N4007
KCTRR 1N4007 LF--RAC BOARD
K2--2 K5 KCTRR
10A1 CR9 CR7 K5--2
VM48 1N4007 4
Q1
2 2
+
KCTR 2N4401
C2 R7
10J7 K4--3
100nF 1K5
_ 3
240 VAC SW 4 +24V KACC
240 VAC SW DS4
HLMP1700 K1--2
115 VAC SW 2 CR1 CR2 CR3
115 VAC SW R1
L R2 R3
4K75 1N4007 KACC 4K75 1N4007 KCT 4K75 1N4007 KBR TP3
+24V DELAYED 1 R4 R5 RTRI
+24V DELAYED K1 K2 K3 4K99 4K99
5
GND 3 DS1 DS2 DS3
GND HLMP1700 HLMP1700 HLMP1700 R6 C1
475 22uF
from HT CONTROL board
--START 9 J1 6 7 8
10
--ACC
11 1
--T2 SCL
12
--BRAKE
13
RTRI
14
1 --TUBE 2 SCL
0 VAC
8
0 VAC DRAWING F. GARCIA 30/09/02
DWG:
54302010
--THERM. 1 5 8/8
4TS3--1 --THERM. 1 D CN 06/159 F. GARCIA 08/08/06 REVISED A. DIAZ 11/11/02 D C B A REV
( S5--B3 )
to 10TS2 C CN 05/109 F. GARCIA 02/08/05

--THERM. 2 6
4TS3--2 --THERM. 2
CN 03/46,55,58,60
4TS3--3
THER. COM 7 THERM. COM
B
A CN 02/197
F. GARCIA
F. GARCIA
09/04/03
GENERATOR
F E D
CONTROL DRAC BOARD +15VDC +15VDC
J1 +15V
J4 C4
R10 TP3
100nF
6 +15 VDC 2 1K5 14
R1 R2 CR1
10K 1M 1N3595
5 RDY1 OUT 3 2
6 OFF OFF DLY
C1 K1 TP1
DLY
470uF 1 6
25V GND CR6 5
1 GND 4
TP5 1N3595 2
21 5
3 7
23 ADD JUMPER U1
CR5 C3 ICM7556
1N3595 3,3uF C2 DELAYED SWITCH--OFF BOARD
22 T3 RTN 6 100nF
( A3274--01 )
CR4 +15VDC
1N3595
24 T2 RTN 7
U1 CR8 R8
+15VDC ICM7556 1N4148 1M
C7
1uF R4 R3 10 CR2
CR3 10K 1M5 1N3595
R7 1N3595 4
C8 30K1 2 K2
8
10uF OFF OFF MANT
GENERATOR Q1
6 MANT TP2
2N4401 12
CABINET 9
CR9
PWR OFF 1N3595 13
R6 CR7
J2 TP6
10K 1N3595
4 PWR OFF 8 R9 C9
11 100nF
150K
C5 C6
OFF COND R5 3,3uF
TP4 100nF
J1 1K5
8 OFF COND 1 14 7--8 1 7--8
K1 K2
061109
DWG:
A3274--01
1/1
REVISED A. DIAZ 05/05/98 C B REV
C CN 00/183 F. GARCIA 06/09/00

B CN 99/003 F. GARCIA 13/01/99 SEDECAL DELAYED SWITCH--OFF
A B C D E
C5 +12V +5V C6 (*) Use jumpers only for A3000-34 and 35

C2 100nF 100nF
33pF
+5V (*)
+12V Q4 R2 +5V
2N4403 6K81 U5 RP15 U4 U10 U11 RP7
28
9
C3 XT1 87C51 1 10K AD7582 74HCT574 ULN2803 22 P5
R5 33pF 20MHz 18 39 AD0 AD0 17 mA AD0
AIN0 2 2 19 1 18 1 2
VDD
VCC
XTAL1 P0.0 2 DB0 D1 Q1 I1 Q1 9 -HS SCL
1K 19 38 AD1 AD1 16 AD1 3 18 2 17 3 4
XTAL2 P0.1 3 DB1 D2 Q2 I2 Q2 7 -ACC
R1 R3 37 AD2 AD2 15 3 KVP AD2 4 17 3 16 5 6
P0.2 4 DB2 AIN1 D3 Q3 I3 Q3 6 -BRAKE
1K 100K 36 AD3 AD3 14 AD3 5 16 4 15 7 8
P0.3 5 DB3 D4 Q4 I4 Q4 5 -RTR RUN
9 35 AD4 AD4 13 4 FIL I AD4 6 15 5 14
RESET P0.4 6
AD5 AD5 DB4 AIN2 AD5 D5 Q5 I5 Q5 RP8
4 P0.5 34 7 12 DB5 7 D6 Q6 14 6 I6 Q6 13 4
31 33 AD6 AD6 11 5 RTR I AD6 8 13 7 12 22
Q3 +5V EA/VP P0.6 8 DB6 AIN3 D7 Q7 I7 Q7
Z1 C1 32 AD7 AD7 10 AD7 9 12 8 11 1 2
2N4401 P0.7 9 DB7 D8 Q8 I8 Q8 10 HI mA
BZX55C8V2 1uF R77 4K99 24 A11 3 4
GND
C4 10 A0 A12 8 -BAT TEST
A1 25 11 CLK 5 6
100uF 29 1 7 8
-DESEQ PSEN A8 OC
16 P1.3 P2.0 21 21 BYSL CLK 23
A9
9
R6 P2.1 22 18 RD
R4 -KV SAFETY 5 23 A10 20 6
825 P1.4 P2.2 WR VREF (*)
DGND
AGND
D1 825 24 A11 19 1
VSS
1N4148 -mA SAFETY P2.3 A12 CS CAZ
6 P1.5 P2.4 25
26 A13 -12V
P2.5 A14
27
27
P2.6 A15
7
P2.7 28 Vref
R8
7 30 681
P1.6 ALE/P
8 P1.7
RP1 U1 10 C10 C72 U8 U9 RP5 P1
P1 470 2501 P3.0 C9 2n2 100nF 74HCT574 ULN2803 22
11 P3.1 P3.7 17 17 -TUBE3
2 16 12 4 100nF AD0 2 19 1 18 1 2
-KV UP 1 1 2 K1 C1 P3.2 P3.6 D1 Q1 I1 Q1 10 HT-C CLK
13 3 Z8 AD1 3 18 2 17 3 4
P3.3 P1.2 D2 Q2 I2 Q2 11 HT-C DAT
4 14 14 2 BZX55C5V1 AD2 4 17 3 16 5 6
-KV DWN 2 3 4 K2 C2 P3.4 P1.1 D3 Q3 I3 Q3 12 -TUBE2 SCL
15 1 AD3 5 16 4 15 7 8
P3.5 P1.0 D4 Q4 I4 Q4 13 -FIL 1 SCL
6 12 AD4 6 15 5 14
-PREP 3 5 6 K3 C3 AD5 D5 Q5 I5 Q5
7 D6 Q6 14 6 I6 Q6 13
8 10 -WR DAC AD6 8 13 7 12 RP6
C-HT DAT 4 7 8 K4 C4 AD7 D7 Q7 I7 Q7 22
9 D8 Q8 12 8 I8 Q8 11
RP2 U2 +5V 1 2
GND
14 -START
470 2501 -EXP 11 3 4 -PRE CHRG
3 CLK 15 3
C-HT CLK 5 1 2 2 K1 C1 16 1 OC 5 6 16 -CHRG DR
100nF R9 7 8
D7 D6 C8 C7 56K2
9
-EXP 6 3 4 4 K2 C2 14
1N4148 1N4148 510pF 3n3
6 12 +5V R12
-CHRG 7 5 6 K3 C3 R11 2.7
8 10
A4
-FIL 1 ACK 8 7 8 K4 C4
C19 DS1 475
R7 100nF LED
7
1K21
Q1
U3 IRLZ14 D23
+12V
R70 24C16 U14 1N4148
-CS DAC
+5V DS3 475 C57 1 6 74HCT138 R10
EXP 100nF +5V RP3 A0 SCL A8 475
2 A1 15 Y0 A 1
3K3 3 5 14 2 A9 R13 R14 D2
A2 SDA -L DAC Y1 B A10
1 2 13 3 1K5 1K5 1N4148
R64 C18 Y2 C
3 4 7 TEST 12 Y3 R82
1K 1nF 5 6 11 C81 Q2 C11
Y4 A13 100K 1uF 2N4403 100nF
7 8 10 Y5 G2A 4
9 Y6 G2B 5
R63 R71 C58 7 6
1K DS2 475 100nF Y7 G1 D3
PREP +5V 1N4148
P1 RP10 U15
2 2
470 2501 DATA BUS
BATST 1 18
BATST 2 19 1 2 2 K1 C1 16
BATST 3 20 +5V +5V
9 3 4 4 K2 C2 14
GND
6 12 RP12 U13 U12 RP9
P3 5 6 K3 C3 1 10K 74HCT541 74HCT541 1 10K SW2
8 10 2 18 AD0 AD0 18 2 1 16
ERROR DRAC 6 7 8 K4 C4 2 A1 Y1 Y1 A1 2
3 17 AD1 AD1 17 3 2 15
RP11 U16 3 A2 Y2 AD2 Y2 A2 3
4 16 AD2 16 4 3 14
P5 470 2501 4 A3 Y3 AD3 Y3 A3 4
5 15 AD3 15 5 4 13
5 A4 Y4 AD4 Y4 A4 5
2 16 6 14 AD4 14 6 5 12
-RTR RDY 4 1 2 K1 C1 6 A5 Y5 AD5 Y5 A5 6
R22 7 7 13 AD5 13 7 7 6 11
A6 Y6 AD6 Y6 A6
4 14 8 12 AD6 12 8 7 10
-IGBT FAULT 3 3 4 K2 C2 8 A7 Y7 AD7 Y7 A7 8
9 11 AD7 11 9 8 9
475 9 A8 Y8 Y8 A8 9
-BATT FAULT 2 5 6 6 K3 C3 12
10 10
G2 19 19 G2
8 10 C20 1 1
-AUTO OFF INH 1 7 8 K4 C4 G1 G1
R15 100pF
+5V 3K3
C27
100nF
L2 47uH -RD
FAULT
P2
-12V 1 L1 47uH
TP3 TP4
+12V 2
1 +12V -12V 1
+12V R65 -12V R45
+5V 3 1K 1K
TP2
GND 4 +5V R30 +5V
L3 47uH 1K A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44
GND 5 TP1 TP9 TP10
6-9 K NC 05/061 F. Díaz 01/04/05 DRAWING F. Díaz 26/05/05
C17 C15 GND GND GND 1/3
GND 6 K1 J NC 05/027 F. Díaz 08/02/05 REVISED A. Díaz 26/05/05 K J I H G REV
Z3 100uF C16 Z2 100uF C14
C13 C12 1N4744 100nF 2-13 1N4744 100nF I NC 04/202 F. Díaz 02/12/04
100uF 100nF H AC 01/04 F. Díaz 21/09/04
G NC 03/216 F. Díaz 18/12/03 SEDECAL HT CONTROLLER
A B C D E
A B C D E
HV TANK JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 R73 U3 +5V U5 +5V U8 +5V U10 +5V
16K5 24C16 80C32 74HCT574 74HCT574
Vcc 8 Vcc 40 Vcc 20 Vcc 20
COMPACT 2 1 2 2 1
JP6
VERTICAL 1 2 1 1 R20 (3) C29 C31 C30 C32

36K5 TP16 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF
GND 4 GND 20 GND 10 GND 10

C21 KVP
KV - 100pF
4 4
KV +
TP12 TP11 TP7 1V=33.3KVP
R16 (3) KV- KV+ R18 U18A KVP U12 +5V U13 +5V U14 +5V
P4 1K 100K TL084 D16 R66 1V=16.6 KVP for A3000-36 74HCT541 74HCT541 74HCT138 C36
2 1N4148 10K 20 20 16 +12V 100nF
-KV 1 - Vcc Vcc Vcc
1 KVP
2 3 +
+KV
R17 1 1 R19 1 C28 C33 C34 C35
1K 100K 10nF 100nF 100nF 100nF
JP3 JP4 JP5 GND 10 GND 10 GND 8
C76 C22
C75 C24 C23 R72 R21 (3)
RTR I1 4 1nF 10nF 100pF 16K5 36K5
RTR I2 1nF 10nF
3 Z4 Z5 +5V U1/U15/U16 +5V U2
2501 2501
1 1 -12V C37
1N4744 1N4744 A1 A1 100nF
E7 15 E7 15
3 A2 3 A2
E6 13 E6 13
C25 5 5
100nF A3 A3
E5 11 E5 11
7 A4
+12V D14 D15 -12V 9 9
1N4148 1N4148 E4 E4
3 R25 3
274K
BR1 R26
VM48 1M C79 100pF
4 3 6 - U20-A
AC1 - R24 ULN2803A
7
5 + 4K99 C80 100pF 14
6 1 C26 R81 U18B 5
AC2 + 100nF 1K TL084
R29 C39 +12V
10K 100nF RP14-A
FREQUENCY (7) U20-B 22 P3
ULN2803A 5 6 -KV DR 1
+12V R23 1
12 7 8 2 -KV DR 2
R74 U19
12
7
6K04 34K TL594
R80 D21 R27 6
V+
JP2 10K 1N4148 10K JP1 RT
1 1 5 CT C1 8
9
C2 11
C38 C78 RP13
4nF 1nF 1K
D22 R28 9 7 8
TP6 1N4148 (1) 49K9 16
E1
10 5 6
RTR KV DEM +2 E2
15 -2 REF 14 3 4
3 FB DC 13 1 2
RTR I 2 4
GND
C41 -1 DT C40
1 +1
R75 10nF 100nF
2 2
C63 +12V 49K9 C44
100nF 100nF
7
+12V C67 +12V
U7A 100nF +5V
8
LF353 D19
KV - 3 R53 U18C 1N4148 +5V
+
1 10K R54 TL084 (2)
U17B Vref
11
2 - 10 +
LM319J 4K75 8
C64 9 9
+ -
100nF R33 R32 R78
4
7
10 1K 3K3 1K
-
C66 C77 Z9 D18 D4
100nF 10nF R76
-KV SAFETY
-12V R52 C69 100K
6
10K 100nF 5V1 1N4148 1N4148 D5

-EXP
R55
R50 R51 1K65 1N4148 D20
10K 3K01 -12V
U7B TP15
LF353 R56 U17A 1N4148
KV + 5 10K LM319J Q5 R79
+
7 4 IRLZ14
+ FAULT
6 - 12
5 -DESEQ R31 22
-
100K
1 C65 1
100nF C68
3
100nF R59
R58 R57 10K
10K 3K01 (1) The value of R28 is 86K6 for A3000-35 NAME DATE SHEET / OF
A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44
-12V (2) (REV)1 - Remove D19 for three phase generators K NC 05/061 F. Díaz 01/04/05 DRAWING F. Díaz 26/05/05
2/3
J NC 05/027 F. Díaz 08/02/05 REVISED A. Díaz 26/05/05 K J I H G REV
(3) R16, R17 = 4K02, and R20, R21 = 69K8 for A3000-36 I NC 04/202 F. Díaz 02/12/04
H AC 01/04 F. Díaz
(7) Adjust R29 to have a period of 48 us at U19-5 21/09/04
SEDECAL HT CONTROLLER
G NC 03/216 F. Díaz 18/12/03
for A3000-43 REV DESCRIPTION ISSUED BY DATE
A B C D E
A B C D E
U24B +12V C73

(4) R38, R39 = 226K, and R60, R62 = 25K5 for A3000-36
9
DG300 100nF
+5V
(5) R36, R37 = 200K, and R40 = 2K21 for A3000-44 1V = 10mA (FROM 10mA UP TO 80 mA)
14
R61 R60 1V = 100mA (FROM 100mA UP TO maximum mA)
10K 12K7
(8) Remove Z6 and Z7 for A3000-44 11 13 1V = 20mA (FROM 10mA UP TO 80 mA)
TP5 A3000-44
A15 mA 1V = 200mA (FROM 100mA UP TO maximum mA)
U24
TP14 TP13
(4) DG300
4 4
mA + mA -
C48 R38
10nF 113K C52 C74
R67 10nF 100nF
8
R34 (5) R36 10K
P4 1K 100K D17 (5) R40
13 - 1N4148 10K
-mA 6 mA -12V
14
+mA 7 12 +
R35 (5) R37 U18D
1K 100K TL084
(8) (8) R39 R62 R41
C43 C42 113K C47 12K7 8K87
100nF 100nF C46 Z7 Z6 C45 10nF U24A (4)
250V 250V 100nF 1N4757A 1N4757A 100nF (4) DG300
4 2
6
+12V D8 D9 -12V
3 1N4148 1N4148 3
R42 U21 +12V C51

1K AD536 100nF
1 14 TP8
FIL I 8 VIN +VS FIL
+12V 8
GND 5 C50 ID
7 BI
1uF 6 FIL I U20-C
C49 VD ULN2803A
4 CAV
10nF -12V C70 16 K1
9 100nF 3 1-14 7-8
RL R44
10 G -VS 3
10K
RP14-B
U20-D 22 P3
R46 ULN2803A 3 4 4 -FIL DR 1
-12V 4K99 C60 +12V 18 1 2
C53 -12V +12V C54 100nF 5 -FIL DR 2
100nF 100nF
(6) 1
R43
1K54 R49 FREQUENCY
C55 20K U23
9
12
7
100nF C59 TL594

AD0 24 3 10nF 6
Vss
Vdd
V+
AD1 DB0 VrefA RT
23 DB1 VrefB 10 5 CT C1 8
AD2 22 11
AD3 DB2 C2 RP4
21 DB3
AD4 20 1K
2 DB4 2
AD5 19 V22 9 7 8
AD6 DB5 LM336AZ E1
18 DB6 RfbB 12 16 +2 E2 10 5 6
AD7 17 9 15 14 3 4
DB7 VoutB KV DEM -2 REF
A11 16 3 13 1 2
A12 A0 FB DC
15 1 4
GND
A1 +1 DT
RfbA 2 2 -1
4 R68
DATA BUS VoutA R48 R47 C56 10K
10K 49K9 100nF
7
14 LDAC
DGND
13 5 C62
WR AGDNA 100nF
1 CS AGNDB 8
-L DAC
U6 C71
11
AD7837 100nF C61 R69

-WR DAC 100nF 205
-CS DAC
-mA SAFETY
1 1
(6) Adjust R49 to have a period of 150 us at U23-5

K NC 05/061 F. Díaz DRAWING F. Díaz 26/05/05
A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44
01/04/05
3/3
J NC 05/027 F. Díaz 08/02/05 REVISED A. Díaz 26/05/05 K J I H G REV
I NC 04/202 F. Díaz 02/12/04

H AC 01/04 F. Díaz 21/09/04
G NC 03/216 F. Díaz 18/12/03 SEDECAL HT CONTROLLER
A B C D E
5 4 3 2 1
NOTE 1: W1-A for version A3004-10/11/12, W1-B for version A3004-09

NOTE 1: W1-A para versión A3004-10/11/12, W1-B para versión A3004-09
NOTE 2: R11= 2K68 ohms for A3004-09/10

NTC NTC R11= 1K4 ohms for A3004-11
R11= 1K ohms for A3004-12
NOTE 2: R11= 2K68 ohms para A3004-09/10

Tº Tº R11= 1K4 ohms para A3004-11
R13 R20 R11= 1K ohms para A3004-12
D D
R12
+15V
100K 3W
D2
1N4148
+5V
+24V
+5V R19 D7
TP1 TP2 33
R7 C1 Green
3K74 TP7 C4
100nF 100nF R2
R4 R3 D3 100
R16
P1 8 10K 10K Q2
9
R8 10K U1 UF4006 SGP23N60UFD + C7 + C8
GND 1 2K D5
GND 1 7
VDD
2 UF4006 HO 330uF/450V 330uF/450V
+5V 3 7 10 HIN
+5V +24V 2 6
4 VB C3
-FIL DR1 5 3
6 12 5 1uF C6 P3
-FIL DR2 6 R6 R5 D4 4
LIN VS 470nF/630Vdc
FIL I 7 3K74 2K UF4006
8 4 FIL SUP
DELAY 3
5 U2 VCC 3
+24V 11 SD 2 FIL PREHEAT
HCPL2232 1 FIL RTN
LO T1 1
VSS
C TP8 2 D1 1 C
R17 COM 1N4148 2
D8 1K IR2113 C2 Pulse. PE-67300. 1 : 300
13
5 1uF 4 3
2
BZX55C18V U5
R18 H11AA1 R1
10K 100
1 4
Q1
SGP23N60UFD
R10
2K43
W1
A
NOTE 1 1V=0.31 Arms
B
TP3
D6
TP4 1N4007
+24V +15V R11
R9 NOTE 2
10 +5V
U3 R14 U4 TP5
B B
10K LM7805
1 11 1 IN OUT 3
R15
+ GND + 10K
+ C13 C12 C14 C15
C9 C5 10uF/50V 100nF 2 100nF TP6
1.5uF/250V-X2 10uF/50V
P2 10uF/50V
13 10
2
+SUPPLY 4 EC4A13
3
2
1
-SUPPLY
1
L1
C11 C10
10nF/250V-Y2 10nF/250V-Y2
Ground stud
A A
PCB 90068-03

DRAWING F. Díaz 26/10/04 A3004-09/10/11/12
1/1
REVISED A. Díaz 26/10/04 Db1 Cb1 Bb1 Ab1 b2 b1 REV
Db1 NC 06/251 F. Díaz 01/12/06

Cb1 NC 05/112 SEDECAL Filament Driver HC
5 4 3 2 1
A B C D E
P6
GND 4
+11V PERM 3
-PWR ON 2
-PWR OFF 1 P3
DS1
3 LINE SYNC
T2 D4
P4 5
2 13 +24VDC
0 VAC 1 R15 R13 +24VDC
4 K1 4
K1 1 6 D16 15 D15 27 D3 1
9 6 1 4 +24 VDC
3 14
115 VAC 5W 3 5 R7 W2 2
1 15K C22
115 VAC 2 4 3 R14 U1 C2 C23 100nF
4 C4 1K5 D ULN2803A 3 10nF 470uF
470uF 11
DB104 Q1 1 GND
8
OFF G MTD3055
2 GND
P1 R12 R8
10 D14 S 3K3
8 K1
9
-PWR OFF 8 12
ON R11 4
-PWR ON 7 C3 3K3
100nF P4
8 K5
12
8 BUCKY 1 DR
P4 4
8 K4
BUCKY SPLY 9 12
7 BUCKY 2 DR
4
W1
AUX BUCKY SPLY 5
1 2 3
+24VDC
3 8 K3 3
L3 12
+24 VDC 4 6 -BUCKY EXP
500uH K6 1 4
D11 D10 9 K7 4 L1 L2
(4) 13 13 13 13 13 5 12 500uH 500uH
D9 K3 K6 8
K5 K4 K7
(4) 14 14 14 D12 14 D13 14 K7 1
FIL 2 RTN
9 16
-BUCKY 1 DR CMD 12 5
-BUCKY 2 DR CMD 13 15 FIL 1 RTN
K5 1 C6
9 4 1
-BUCKY 1 MOTION 11 22 -FIL 1 ACK
5
4
2.2nF 400V R17
K4 1 6 3 499
21 SPARE
9 D17 C5 R16 U2
-BUCKY 2 MOTION 10 5 K9 4 D18 1N4738 2.2uF 1K AQV210EH
12 DB104
+24VDC 8
-TUBE 2 SCL 18 20 SOL DR
6
-FIL 1 SCL 19
FIL PREHEAT 17 13
FIL RTN 14
K9
D19
14
P5
P5
K8 1
9
2 DISCHARGE 2 13 2
5
10 DISCHARGE 2 RTN
K8 4
12
DISCHARGE 1 12 8
14 DISCHARGE 1 RTN
+24 VDC 16
14
R9 K8
D7
13
47
GND 9
K2 1
9 3 SPARE
+24 VDC 5 5
2 DELAYED +24 VDC
+5 VDC OUT 4 4
K2 7 SPARE
+24VDC 12
+24 VDC 8 8
6 +5 VDC
-LINE CONT 1 NOTES:
14 1.- FILAMENT 1 IS SMALL FOR RAD AND LARGE FOR SF
VERSION USED FOR COMPONENTS ON SHEET 2 L1, L2, L3, K6
+24VDC R3 R4 U1 D8 2.- HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY ON AEC OR ABS UNITS ONLY
K2 A3009-09 RAD + HV REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED 3.- LI, L2, L3 AND K6 NOT USED ON RAD SYSTEM
3K3 U1 10K ULN2803A
D1 D2 R2 ULN2803A 12 13 A3009-10 R&F NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED 4.- K5 AND D11 NOT PRESENT IN A3009-15
C1 1N4733 10K 16 7
100uF A3009-11 ONLY RAD NOT REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED NOTAS:
3
1 A3009-12 R&F + HV REQUIRED REQUIRED 1.- FILAMENTO 1 ES FINO PARA RAD Y GRUESO PARA SF 1
D6 2.- LA FUENTE DE ALTA TENSION SOLO PARA UNIDADES CON AEC O ABS
A3009-15 MAMO NOT REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED 3.- L1, L2, L3 Y K6 NO SE USAN EN SISTEMAS RAD
U1
D5 R5 ULN2803A 4.- K5 Y D11 NO SE MONTAN EN A3009-15
BZX55C10V 10K 17 NAME DATE SHEET / OF
2
DRAWING F. Díaz 30/01/06
A3009-09/10/11/12/15
R6 R1 1/2
REVISED A. Díaz 30/01/06 Jb1 I b2 I b1 REV
100K 2M2
SEDECAL INTERFACE CONTROL

A B C D E
A B C D E
+24VDC
R10
56
5w W7
B A
U3 2 D22
4 T1 FR107 4
PE6189
Vs
5 In1 Out1 3 1
C10 7 C19 R35

2.2 uF C8 R33 10nF 1M
7 In2 Boot1 4
2 33K 1KV 1w
1 1w W6
Out2 2.2uF
9 Vref 8
C9 63V A B
11 8 2.2 uF 3
En Boot2 C18 R34
P1 R42
GND Sense
1KV 1M
22 D21 10nF 1w
L6203 FR107
+12 VDC 6 6 10
+12 VDC 5
W8 C21 C15 R28
100uF 100nF 6K8
PT CRL 4
B A U5 P2
TL594
C14 6 12
R41 RT V+ 1 PT SPLY
R39 2,2nF 8
6K04 10K C1 +Vref
5 CT C2 11
D23
E1 9
16 +2 E2 10
1N4148 15 14
3 -2 REF 3 3
R40
3 FB DC 13
1K C20 R24 R26
100nF R43 R29 C16 R30 R31 1 4 10K 10K
10K 22K1 100nF 2M2 100K +1 DT
2 -1 GND 7
R23
10K R18 R19
10K 10K 5
-ON 3
R32
R22 W4 47K5
GND 2 GND 10K
A B R25 R27
10K 332
C13
GND 1 100nF
7
C17
100pF
6 ROOM LIGHT SUP

R38 R37 R36
4M75 4M75 4M75 K10 4
A B 12
8
2 2
W5 +Vref
C12 K10 1
100nF +24VDC 9
5
4 ROOM LIGHT SW
A B
13
R21 W3 K10
10K 8 7 D20
14
2
6 SD
2 -ROOM LIGHT
3 R20
U4A 5K
TLV2460
4 C11
100nF
NOTE.- BE SURE THAT THE VALUE OF THE PHOTO TUBE SPLY OUTPUT IN P2-1
PHOTO TUBE SPLY OUTPUT ( P2-1) IS THE REQUIRED BEFORE CONECTING THE SYSTEM INTERFACE
+500 VDC OR +300 VDC : JUMPERS W3 TO W8 IN POS "A", AND ADJUSTING WITH R20 NOTA.- ASEGURESE DE QUE EL VALOR DE LA SALIDA PHOTO TUBE SPLY EN P2-1
VARIABLE NEGATIVE OUTPUT : JUMPERS W3 TO W10 IN POS "B" ES EL REQUERIDO ANTES DE HACER LA INTERCONEXION DEL SISTEMA
1 1
SALIDA PHOTO TUBE SPLY (P2-1)
+500 VDC O +300 VDC : PUENTES W3 A W8 EN POS "A",Y AJUSTAR CON R20
SALIDA NEGATIVA VARIABLE : PUENTES W3 A W10 EN POS "B" A3009-09/10/11/12/15
2/2
REVISED A. Díaz 30/01/06 Jb1 I b2 I b1 REV
SEDECAL INTERFACE CONTROL

A B C D E
A B C D E
P6
GND 4
+11V PERM 3
-PWR ON 2
-PWR OFF 1 P3
DS1
3 LINE SYNC
T2 D4
P4 5
2 13 +24VDC
0 VAC 1 R15 R13 +24VDC
4 K1 4
K1 1 6 D16 15 D15 27 D3 1
9 6 1 4 +24 VDC
3 14
115 VAC 5W 3 5 R7 W2 2
1 15K C22
115 VAC 2 4 3 R14 U1 C2 C23 100nF
4 C4 1K5 D ULN2803A 3 10nF 470uF
470uF 11
DB104 Q1 1 GND
8
OFF G MTD3055
R12 R8 2 GND
P1
10 D14 S 3K3
8 K1
9
-PWR OFF 8 12
ON R11 4
-PWR ON 7 C3 3K3
100nF P4
8 K5
12
8 BUCKY 1 DR
P4 4
8 K4
BUCKY SPLY 9 12
7 BUCKY 2 DR
4
W1
AUX BUCKY SPLY 5
1 2 3
+24VDC
3 8 K3 3
L3 12
+24 VDC 4 6 -BUCKY EXP
500uH K6 1 4
D11 D10 9 K7 4 L1 L2
(4) 13 13 13 13 13 5 12 500uH 500uH
D9 K3 K6 8
K5 K4 K7
(4) 14 14 14 D12 14 D13 14 K7 1
FIL 2 RTN
9 16
-BUCKY 1 DR CMD 12 5
-BUCKY 2 DR CMD 13 15 FIL 1 RTN
K5 1 C6
9 4 1
-BUCKY 1 MOTION 11 22 -FIL 1 ACK
5
4
2.2nF 400V R17
K4 1 6 3 499
21 SPARE
9 D17 C5 R16 U2
-BUCKY 2 MOTION 10 5 K9 4 D18 1N4738 2.2uF 1K AQV210EH
12 DB104
+24VDC 8
-TUBE 2 SCL 18 20 SOL DR
6
-FIL 1 SCL 19
FIL PREHEAT 17 13
FIL RTN 14
K9
D19
14
P5
P5
K8 1
9
2 DISCHARGE 2 13 2
5
10 DISCHARGE 2 RTN
K8 4
12
DISCHARGE 1 12 8
14 DISCHARGE 1 RTN
+24 VDC 16
14
R9 K8
D7
13
47
GND 9
K2 1
9 3 SPARE
+24 VDC 5 5
2 DELAYED +24 VDC
+5 VDC OUT 4 4
K2 7 SPARE
+24VDC 12
+24 VDC 8 8
6 +5 VDC
-LINE CONT 1 NOTES:
14 1.- FILAMENT 1 IS SMALL FOR RAD AND LARGE FOR SF
VERSION USED FOR COMPONENTS ON SHEET 2 L1, L2, L3, K6
+24VDC R3 R4 U1 D8 2.- HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY ON AEC OR ABS UNITS ONLY
K2 A3009-09 RAD + HV REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED 3.- LI, L2, L3 AND K6 NOT USED ON RAD SYSTEM
3K3 U1 10K ULN2803A
D1 D2 R2 ULN2803A 12 13 A3009-10 R&F NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED 4.- K5 AND D11 NOT PRESENT IN A3009-15
C1 1N4733 10K 16 7
100uF A3009-11 ONLY RAD NOT REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED NOTAS:
3
1 A3009-12 R&F + HV REQUIRED REQUIRED 1.- FILAMENTO 1 ES FINO PARA RAD Y GRUESO PARA SF 1
D6 2.- LA FUENTE DE ALTA TENSION SOLO PARA UNIDADES CON AEC O ABS
A3009-15 MAMO NOT REQUIRED NOT REQUIRED 3.- L1, L2, L3 Y K6 NO SE USAN EN SISTEMAS RAD
U1
D5 R5 ULN2803A 4.- K5 Y D11 NO SE MONTAN EN A3009-15
BZX55C10V 10K 17 NAME DATE SHEET / OF
2
A3009-09/10/11/12/15
R6 R1 1/2
REVISED A. Díaz 14/02/06 K Jb1 I b2 I b1 REV
100K 2M2
K NC 08/102 F. Díaz 23/04/08 SEDECAL INTERFACE CONTROL

A B C D E
A B C D E
+24VDC
R10
56
C7 5w W7
100 nF
B A
2 U3 D22
4 T1 RGP02-16E 4
PE6189
Vs
5 In1 Out1 3 1
C10 7 C19 R35

2.2 uF C8 R33 10nF 1M
7 In2 Boot1 4
2 33K 1KV 1w
1 1w W6
Out2 2.2uF
9 Vref 8
C9 63V A B
11 8 2.2 uF 3
En Boot2 C18 R34
P1 R42 1KV 1M
22 GND Sense D21 10nF 1w
L6203 RGP02-16E
+12 VDC 6 6 10
+12 VDC 5
W8 C21 C15 R28
100uF 100nF 6K8
PT CRL 4
B A U5 P2
TL594
C14 6 12
R41 RT V+ 1 PT SPLY
R39 2,2nF 8
6K04 10K C1 +Vref
5 CT C2 11
D23
E1 9
16 +2 E2 10
1N4148 15 14
3 -2 REF 3 3
R40
3 FB DC 13
1K C20 R24 R26
100nF R43 R29 C16 R30 R31 1 4 10K 10K
10K 22K1 100nF 2M2 100K +1 DT
2 -1 GND 7
R23
10K R18 R19
10K 10K 5
-ON 3
R32
R22 W4 47K5
GND 2 GND 10K
A B R25 R27
10K 332
C13
GND 1 100nF
7
C17
100pF
6 ROOM LIGHT SUP

R38 R37 R36
4M75 4M75 4M75 K10 4
A B 12
8
2 2
W5 +Vref
C12 K10 1
100nF +24VDC 9
5
4 ROOM LIGHT SW
A B
13
R21 W3 K10
10K 8 7 D20
14
2
6 SD
2 -ROOM LIGHT
3 R20
U4A 5K
TLV2460
4 C11
100nF
NOTE.- BE SURE THAT THE VALUE OF THE PHOTO TUBE SPLY OUTPUT IN P2-1
PHOTO TUBE SPLY OUTPUT ( P2-1) IS THE REQUIRED BEFORE CONECTING THE SYSTEM INTERFACE
+500 VDC OR +300 VDC : JUMPERS W3 TO W8 IN POS "A", AND ADJUSTING WITH R20 NOTA.- ASEGURESE DE QUE EL VALOR DE LA SALIDA PHOTO TUBE SPLY EN P2-1
VARIABLE NEGATIVE OUTPUT : JUMPERS W3 TO W10 IN POS "B" ES EL REQUERIDO ANTES DE HACER LA INTERCONEXION DEL SISTEMA
1 1
SALIDA PHOTO TUBE SPLY (P2-1)
+500 VDC O +300 VDC : PUENTES W3 A W8 EN POS "A",Y AJUSTAR CON R20
SALIDA NEGATIVA VARIABLE : PUENTES W3 A W10 EN POS "B" A3009-09/10/11/12/15
2/2
REVISED A. Díaz 14/02/06 K Jb1 I b2 I b1 REV
K NC 08/102 F. Díaz 23/04/08 SEDECAL INTERFACE CONTROL

A B C D E
A B C D E
NOTE.- TWO TRANSFORMER FORMATS CAN BE USED, USA AND ROW.

NOTA.- LOS TRANSFORMADORES PUEDEN TENER DOS FORMATOS, USA Y ROW.
U2
4 HCPL4503 4
REG1 2 8
7815
2 3 CR3 6
VI VO 1N4007 R2 J3/J5
BR1 3 5 6K81 C7
COM
VM48 100nF
C1 C3 C2 2 SPR (+5V INPUT 1)
4 1
470uF 470uF 100nF
3 CP1 (-KV DR1)
1
6 3 4 VPC (GND 1)
SEE NOTE
T1
1 VPI (+15V OUTPUT 1)
J2 5
115 VAC U1 5 FPD (-FAULT 1)
1 1
6 HCPL4503
8 2
7
115 VAC RTN 4 6
2
8 5 3
-FAULT
4
3 3
U4
HCPL4503
BR2 REG2 2 8
VM48 7815
4 1 2 3 CR4 6
VI VO
IPM 1N4007
3 5
R3
6K81 C8
J4/J6
COM
DRIVER 6 3
C6 C5 C4
100nF
2 SNR (+5V INPUT 2)
1 470uF 470uF 100nF

3 CN1 (-KV DR2)
1
4 VNC (GND 2)
1 VNI (+15V OUTPUT 2)
U3 5 FND (-FAULT 2)
HCPL4503
8 2
J1
C9 6
+5VDC 100nF R5 R6
4 332 332 5 3
-DR1
1
2 2
-DR2
2
GND
3
J1
+5VDC
4
-DR1
1
-DR2
2 IPM
GND
3 DRIVER
J2 2
115 VAC
1
115 VAC RTN
2
1 1
3
-FAULT
4

A3063-03
1/1
REVISED A. Díaz 26/11/04 B REV
B NC 04/195 F. Díaz 23/11/04 SEDECAL IPM DRIVER

A B C D E
A B C D E
4
+ 4
R2 R3 R4 R5 R1 R6
100K 3W 10K 15W 10K 15W 10K 15W 39K 15W 27K 4W
CR2
TO MAIN STORAGE BZX85C56V
CAPACITORS Q1
IRF840
DS1
CR3
BZX85C56V
CR1
3 1N4733A 3
U1 R7
H11B1 3M9
1 6 P1
5 2 CHRG
- 2 4 1 GND
P2
2 DISCHARGE RTN
1 DISCHARGE
2 2
1 1
E CN 98/114 F.GARCIA 10/10/98 ENG F. GARCIA
D CN 98/057 F.GARCIA 29/04/98 CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR CHK A. DIAZ
REV CN99/80 (22/07/99)

C CN 96/033 F.GARCIA 06/03/96
3212-01 REV. F
B CN 95/080 F.GARCIA 10/05/95 DWG
A CN 95/74 F.GARCIA 25/04/95 SEDECAL S.A. REV.
REV.
REV DESCRIPTION ISSUED BY DATE DATE 11/01/95
A B C D E
A B C D E
EXT SYNC K4
from J2-14 14 HT-C CLK AEC STOP
7, 8 +5V
LINE SYNC JP4 1
from J3-9 A B ABC IN U19F C55
K5 TPx FL-C CLK R34 R5 R6 R7 74HCT14 100nF
CAM SYNC +5V U33A 1K 10K 10K 2K55 13 12 U29
from J4-9 1, 14 7, 8 U32A 74HCT32 C59 8259A
+12V ISO 74HCT00 1 100nF 18 11 AD0
U19E IR0 D0 AD1
1 3 D1 10
3 2 RP16 U27 74HCT14 CLK 500 19 9 AD2
2 13 470 2501 IR1 D2 AD3
2 11 10 D3 8
CR15 K4 K5 U33B 2 16 -EXPT 20 7 AD4
1N4148 74HCT32 1 2 K1 C1 IR2 D4 AD5
4 D5 6 4
6 6 4 4 14 U19D 21 5 AD6
-DS PREP 3 4 K2 C2 74HCT14 IR3 D6 AD7
6 22 IR4 D7 4
5 5 6 6 K3 C3 12 9 8 23 IR5
U33C 8 10 TMR 1 24
-INTEN 74HCT32 7 8 K4 C4 C60 IR6
MASTER RESET 9 100nF UART RQ 25 12
+5V IR7 CAS0
8
C51 10 A9 1 13
1nF R14 -MWR CS CAS1
+5V U30 10K U33D -MRD A0 27 15
U28 8088 74HCT32 A0 CAS2
71084C 21 28 12 -IOWR 2
R9 RESET IO/M -IORD WR
4 RDY1 RDY 5 22 READY WR 29 11 3 RD EN 16
CR7 10K 6 8 R28 330 19 32 13
1N4148 RDY2 CLK CLK RD -IOWR -INTA 26 INTA INT 17
11 17 U32C
R X1 U32B 74HCT00 -IORD INTR
3 XT1 C42 74HCT00 9
C50 AEN1 10MHz 33pF DATA BUS -INTEN
7 AEN2 4 8
10uF 13 16 26 6 10 U20
16V F/C X2 DEN 74HCT245
15 ASYN 5
1 2 C43 19
CSYN PCLK 33pF G
DT/R 27 1 DIR
+5V 33 16 2 18 D0
MN/MX AD0 A0 B0 D1
23 T AD1 15 3 A1 B1 17
U34 14 4 16 D2
74HCT573 AD2 A2 B2 D3
AD3 13 5 A3 B3 15
3 A15 19 2 39 12 6 14 D4 3
A16 Q1 D1 A15 AD4 A4 B4 D5 U19 U20 U21
18 Q2 D2 3 38 A16 AD5 11 7 A5 B5 13
A17 17 4 37 10 8 12 D6 74HCT14 +5V 74HCT245 +5V 8253 +5V
A18 Q3 D3 A17 AD6 A6 B6 D7
16 Q4 D4 5 36 A18 AD7 9 9 A7 B7 11 Vcc 14 Vcc 20 Vcc 24
15 Q5 D5 6 31 HLD
14 7 17 DATA BUS
Q6 D6 NMI C17 C20 C18
13 Q7 D7 8 1 GND
12 9 8 100nF 100nF 100nF
Q8 D8 A8
A9 7 GND 7 GND 10 GND 12
C 11 25 ALE A10 6
1 5 A0..........A7
+5V OE A11 U23
A12 4
INTR 18 3 MK48T08 U22 U23 U24
INTR A13 A0 D0 74HCT573 +5V MK48T08 +5V 27C256 +5V
A14 2 10 A0 D0 11
R18 -INTA 24 35 AD0 A1 9 12 D1 20 28 32
10K INTA A19 AD1 A2 A1 D1 D2 Vcc Vcc Vcc
8 A2 D2 13
AD2 A3 7 15 D3
AD3 A4 A3 D3 D4 C22 C25 C26
6 A4 D4 16
1.665 MHz AD4 A5 5 17 D5 100nF 100nF 100nF
CLK AD5 A6 A5 D5 D6
4 A6 D6 18 GND 10 GND 14 GND 16
AD6 A7 3 19 D7
AD7 A8 A7 D7
25 A8
U26 A9 24
74HC4040 A10 A9 U26 U28 U29
21 A10
10 9 A11 23 74HC4040 +5V 71084C +5V 8259A +5V
CLK Q1 A12 A11
Q2 7 2 A12 Vcc 16 Vcc 18 Vcc 28
11 RST Q3 6
5 U22 20 +5V
Q4 74HCT573 CS C41 C44 C45
2 Q5 3 27 WR E2 26 2
2 2 19 A0 22 100nF 100nF 100nF
Q6 13KHz D1 Q1 A1 OE
Q7 4 3 D2 Q2 18 GND 8 GND 9 GND 14
13 6.5KHz 4 17 A2
Q8 D3 Q3 A3 U24
Q9 12 5 D4 Q4 16
14 6 15 A4 27C512/27C1001/27C4001
Q10 D5 Q5 A5 A0 D0 U30 U31 U32
Q11 15 7 D6 Q6 14 12 A0 D0 13
1 8 13 A6 A1 11 A1 D1 8088 +5V 74HCT573 +5V 74HCT00 +5V
Q12 U21 D7 Q7 A7 A2 D1 14 D2
9 D8 Q8 12 10 A2 D2 15 Vcc 40 Vcc 20 Vcc 14
8253 A3 9 A3 D3
CLK 500 500Hz A0 A4 D3 17 D4
19 A0 11 C 8 A4 D4 18
to U29-19 8 D0 1 A5 7 A5 D5 C46 C48 C27
A1 D0 D1 OE A6 D5 19 D6 100nF 100nF 100nF
20 A1 D1 7 6 A6 D6 20
U38 6 D2 A7 5 A7 D7
74HC4040 -IORD D2 D3 U31 A8 D7 21 GND 20 GND 10 GND 7
22 RD D3 5 27 A8
10 9 4 D4 74HCT573 A9 26 A9 to U34-17 (sheet 1)
CLK Q1 -IOWR D4 D5 A8 A10 A17
Q2 7 23 WR D5 3 2 D1 Q1 19 23 A10 NC 30
11 6 2 D6 3 18 A9 A11 25 A11 U33 U34 U38
RST Q3 A8 D6 D7 D2 Q2 A10 A12 A18 74HCT32 +5V 74HCT573 +5V 74HC4040 +5V
Q4 5 21 CS D7 1 4 D3 Q3 17 4 A12 PGM 31
3 5 16 A11 A13 28 A13 to U34-16 (sheet 1) 14 20 16
Q5 R21 D4 Q4 A12 A14 Vcc Vcc Vcc
Q6 2 18 CLK2 6 D5 Q5 15 29 A14
4 100 15 7 14 A13 3 A15
Q7 CLK1 D6 Q6 A14 A16 +5V C28 C47 C61
Q8 13 9 CLK0 8 D7 Q7 13 2 A16
12 11 10 9 12 24 OE 100nF 100nF 100nF
Q9 C36 G0 OUT0 D8 Q8 Vpp 1
Q10 14 14 G1 OUT1 13 22 CE GND 7 GND 10 GND 8
15 1nF 16 17 11
Q11 G2 OUT2 C
Q12 1 1 OE 12
11
CONNECTED TO PIN 14 TMR 1 13 PAGE 1 OF 4
1 FOR A3024-50/90 VERSION to U29-24 1
U32D
ENG F. GARCIA
-EXPT 74HCT00
ATP CONSOLE CHK A. DIAZ
+5V
D SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4
REV CN 07/103 (07/05/07)
R13
A1 + 22 G A3024-XX REV.
SPK CR6 S A15
DWG
1N4148 Q4 to J12A-16, J12B-16 and U34-19
NOT PRESENT IN A3024-121
VERSION. CONNECTOR
MTD3055 SEDECAL S.A. REV.
REV.
INSTEAD
DATE 10/10/00
A B C D E
A B C D E
J15
2 PREP V ON
3 EXP TP2
V ON 4 R1 CR1
1 COMM 475 1N4007
K3
K1 K2 +12V ISO R29
1, 14 7, 8 1, 14 7, 8 1, 14 7, 8 J14 1K V ON
+12V ISO R4 1 COMM Q1 Q2

330 2 PREP MTD3055 D MTD3055 D
3 EXP C3
13 13 13 4 POWER OFF ON G OFF G 100uF C4 CR2
4 K1 K3 S S 100nF 1N4733 4
K2 5 POWER ON
CR5 CR4 CR3
1N4148 1N4148 1N4148 R3 V ON 6 V ( ON )
6 6 6
330
R2 J1
100
-PWR OFF 4
-AUTO OFF C39
-PWR ON 5
JP1, JP2, AND JP3 ON to J2-21 (page 3) 100nF
GND 7
POSITION "A" FOR -12V 9
NOVEL CONSOLE C38
+12V 3
100nF
A B A B A B +12V UNREG 8 +12V UNREG +12V ISO +5V +12V -12V
+12V UNREG 2 TP9 TP10 TP3 TP7 TP8
GND UNREG 6
JP1 JP2 JP3 U25
GND UNREG 1
COMM PREP EXP 8279
D0 12 4 R33 R31 R32 R35 R36
D1 D0 IRQ 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K
13 D1 CN/ST 37
D2 14 36 +12V UNREG REG2 REG1
D3 D2 SHFT U17 DC-DC CONVERTER +12V ISO 78SR105 +5V +12V -12V
15 D3
D4 16 74HCT138
D5 D4 -COL0 +Vin +Vout +Vin +Vout
17 D5 SL0 32 1 A Y0 15
D6 18 33 2 14 -COL1
GND
D7 D6 SL1 B Y1 -COL2
19 D7 SL2 34 3 C Y2 13 -Vin -Vout
35 12 -COL3 C9 C54 C56 C2 C57 C1 C6 C5 C7 C8
V ON SL3 +5V Y3 -COL4 470uF 470uF 470uF 100nF 2200uF 10uF 10uF 100nF 10uF 100nF
Y4 11
-IOWR 11 6 10 -COL5 TP11
WR G1 Y5 GND UNREG
4 9
J9 -IORD 10 5
G2A Y6
7
RD G2B Y7 TP1 TP6
11-12 BD 23
3 V (ON) -COL0 A12 J11 GND PT CRL 3
1-2 22 CS
COL 0 -COL1
COL 1 3-4 -COL2 A0 8 SL2
J12A-J12B J1
AEC
21 SL1
COL 2
COL 3
5-6
7-8
-COL3 A0 7
5 SL0
PT CRL
1 PT CRL CONTROL
-COL4 CLK
COL 4 9-10 -COL5
3 CLK OA0 27
26
15 CS1
A0 BOARD
COL 5 13-14 OA1 16 CS2 3 A0
ROW 0 23-24 38 RL0 OA2 25 13 CS3 (A3012-01/02/05/06)
39 24 A1
ROW 1 27-28 RL1 OA3 14 CS4 DATA BUS 4 A1
ROW 2 29-30 1 RL2 OB0 31 11 CS5
2 30 -IOWR
ROW 3 25-26 RL3 OB1 12 CS6 5 -IDWR
ROW 4 15-16 5 RL4 OB2 29 9 CS7
6 28 -KV UP
ROW 5 17-18 RL5 OB3 10 CS8 6 -KV UP
ROW 6 19-20 7 RL6
ROW 7 21-22 8 RL7 RESET 9 2 GND
+5V
POWER OFF 39-40
6 +5V
2 9 D0
POWER ON 37-38 D1 8 D0
3 ON 10 OFF +12V ISO
33-34 D2 7 D1
1 13 4 +12V ISO 10 D2
4 11 D3
35-36 3 +12V ISO D4 9 D3
31-32 5 12 2 GND 12 D4
U1A U1B D5
1 GND D6 11 D5
U2E MC14072B MC14072B
D7 14 D6
RP1 MC14050B U11 PT INPUT
13 D7
10K 11 12 8255A (82C55 ) to J2-13 (page 3)
10 D0 34 DB0.....DB7 AEC STOP
D0 15 AEC STOP
9 D1 33 to J16 (page 4)
8 U2B D2 D1 A15
2 32 D2 16 A15 2
7 MC14050B D3 31 J10
6 D4 D3 DB0 DB0 -12V
5 4 30 D4 PA0 4 7 DB0
5 D5 29 3 DB1 DB1 +12V
D5 PA1 10 DB1 JP5 POSITION: 17 -12V
4 D6 28 2 DB2 DB2 +5V
D6 PA2 12 DB2 18 +12V
3 U2F D7 27 1 DB3 DB3 A.- VD SELECTION
+5V 2 MC14050B D7 PA3 DB4 DB4 11 DB3 B.- IC4 SELECTION
JP5 A B C 20 +5V
PA4 40 14 DB4
13 14 39 DB5 DB5 C.- PT INPUT SELECTION -KV DWN
PA5 13 DB5 19 -KV DWN
1 1 -IOWR 36 38 DB6 DB6
10
WR PA6 DB7 DB7 16 DB6
PA7 37 15 DB7 21 PT INPUT
9 to U37 -IORD 5 not supplied in
RP15 8
RD EN2 ABC OUT A3012-01/02/05
(sheet 3) 22 ABC OUT
10K 7 IN1 A11 6 to J16-7 (page 4) to JP19-A (page 3)
6 IN2 CS
PC0 14 6 RS
5 A0 8 15 J5 J6A J6B J2
4 U2A A1 PC1 8 EN1
PC2 16 9 EN2 1 1 1 1 IC1
MC14050B A1 IC1
3 9 A0 PC3 17 5 R/W IC2 6 2 2 2 IC2
2 3 2 13 -CSE2PROM
PC4 SI IC3 2 3 3 3 IC3
18 PB0 PC5 12 IC4/VD 7 4 4 4 IC4/PT INPUT
19 11 C/-D +5V
PB1 PC6 SCK -FLD1 3 5 5 5 -FLD1
U2C 20 10
PB2 PC7 4 +5V -FLD2 8 6 6 6 -FLD2
MC14050B 21 PB3 3 VD -FLD3 4 7 7 7 -FLD3
7 6 22 PB4 2 GND -STRT DR 9 8 8 8 -STRT DR
23 PB5 1 GND GND 5 9 9 9 GND
24 PB6 10 10 10 VD
SW1 25 35
PB7 RESET C / -D
1 8
2 7 to J16-8 (page 4)
3 6
+5V
PAGE 2 OF 4 RIBBON CABLE
1 4 5 1
ENG F. GARCIA
U1 V ON U2 +5V U11 +5V U17 +5V U25 +5V
U18
X25320 U19B DS2 ATP CONSOLE CHK A. DIAZ
MC14072B MC14050B 8255A (82C55) 74HCT138 8279 1 5 74HCT14 R8
CS SI 1K SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4
Vcc 14 Vcc 1 Vcc 26 Vcc 16 Vcc 40 REV CN 07/103 (07/05/07)
2 SD SCK 6 3 4
+5V A3024-XX REV.
C11 C12 C14 C13 C40 3 7 +5V
WP HLD DWG
100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF C49
GND 7 GND 8 GND 7 GND 8 GND 20 4 GND VCC 8 100nF SEDECAL S.A. REV.
REV.
DATE 10/10/00
A B C D E
A B C D E
NOTE.- ALL DIODES 1N4148 UNLESS SPECIFIED U5A

74HCT02
SET JP13 FOR DIGITAL MODE 2 +5V J3
CR17 CR9
JP13 1 10 -LINE CONT
+5V to U29-18 (page 1) AEC STOP 3 D
R41
2K7 CR8 G Q3 PT CRL
to U21-10 (page 1) -EXPT S MTD3055 to J8-1 and J7-1 (page 4) 7 PT CRL
U4 DS1 U5B -ACT EXP - KV UP
74HCT123 +5V CR18 R40 74HCT02 15 -KV UP
R11 1 10K 5 - KV DWN
CR16 330K 1A R17 R12 C52 8 -KV DWN
2 1B 4
4 3 10K PREP 6 150K 1uF +5V HT-C DAT 4
1CLR RP20 470 3 HT-C DAT
14 1CX
15 R10 +5V LINE SYNC
1RX/CX 1K U5C 1 2 9 LINE SYNC
R20 74HCT02 3 4 -BUCK EXP
9 2A 1Q 13 DATA BUS 5 6 12 -BUCK EXP
C21 10 4 10K 8
1.0 2B 1Q 7 8 HT-C CLK
11 2CLR 10 6 HT-C CLK
6 12 U6 9
2CX 2Q 8255A RP3 22 -HT INTLK
7 2RX/CX 2Q 5 13 -HT INTLK
D0 34 37 U7
D1 D0 PA7 ULN2803 7 8
33 D1 PA6 38 11 5 6 1 -EXP
D2 32 39 13 8 11
D3 D2 PA5 I8 Q8 3 4 4 -PREP
31 D3 PA4 40 12 7 I7 Q7 12 1 2
+5V U3/U12/U14/U27/U37 U35/U36 D4 30 U5D 6 13 -PREP
2501 2501 D5 D4 74HCT02 I6 Q6 to J13-9
29 D5 5 I5 Q5 14
1 D6
A1 E7 15 E7 15
D7
28 D6 PA3 1 1 I1 Q1 18 1 2 2 C-HT DAT
27 D7 PA2 2 2 I2 Q2 17 3 4 5 C-HT CLK
3 13 13 -IOWR 36 3 3 16
GND
A2 E6 E6 WR PA1 I3 Q3 5 6 11 -BUCKY2 DR CMD
PA0 4 4 I4 Q4 15 7 8 14 -BUCKY1 DR CMD
5 11 11 -IORD 5
A3 E5 E5 RD R19 RP4 22 -AUTO OFF
7 9 9 A13 6 2K74 -DS PREP (PAGE 2, R2) J2
9
A4 E4 E4 CS (PAGE 1, K4) RP11 22
A1 U13 25 -ACT EXP
8 A1 1 2 23 ALOE
ULN2803
A0 3 4 21 -AUTO OFF
9 A0 1 I1 Q1 18 5 6 10 EXP OK
PC7 10 2 I2 Q2 17 7 8 8 -ROOM LIGHT
HT-C DAT RP2 U3 +5V 11 3 16
470 2501 1
PC6 I3 Q3 -SPARE IN1
PC5 12 4 I4 Q4 15 22 -SPARE IN1
3 -BUCK EXP 2 16 25 13 5 14 3
1 2 K1 C1 8 PB7 PC4 I5 Q5 7 8
3 4 4 K2 C2 14 6 24 PB6 PC3 17 8 I8 Q8 11 5 6 9 -READY
FL-C DAT 6 12 23 16 7 12
GND
5 6 K3 C3 4 PB5 PC2 I7 Q7 3 4 24 -ALOE
7 8 8 K4 C4 10 2 22 PB4 PC0 14 6 I6 Q6 13 1 2
-THERMOSTAT 1 21 -DOOR
9 PB3 19 -DOOR
20 15 -DRD RP13 22
7 PB2 PC1
-DOOR RP10 U12 19 to J16-6 (page 4) -COL
9
5 PB1 6 -COL
470 2501 18 35 JP19
-COL 3 PB0 RESET MASTER RESET ABC OUT ABC OUT -LEFT -COMP
7 8 8 K4 C4 10 7 -COMP
6 12 RP9 C10 to J12-22 (page 2) A B
-COMP 5 6 K3 C3 10K 1nF
3 4 4 K2 C2 14 11 ABC OUT/ -LEFT
2 16 -DWR
1 2 K1 C1 DATA BUS
-THERMOSTAT 2 to J16-5 (page 4) -THERMOSTAT 2
RP6 22 20 -THERMOSTAT 2
U15 FS U8
8255A to J16-19 (page 4) ULN2803 7 8 2 -SFD SEL
5 6 1 -GEN OK
JUMPER NORMAL MOBILE D0
D1
34 D0 PA7 37 4 I4 Q4 15 3 4 -THERMOSTAT 1
33 D1 PA6 38 3 I3 Q3 16 1 2 3 -THERMOSTAT 1
JP14 set removed D2 32 D2 PA5 39 2 I2 Q2 17
D3 31 40 1 18
D3 PA4 I1 Q1
JP15 removed set D4 30 D4 PA3 1 5 I5 Q5 14 3 4 12 -DIRECT SEL
D5 29 2 6 13
D5 PA2 I6 Q6 5 6 CR12
JP16 removed set D6 28 3 7 12 -SF PREP
GND
D7 D6 PA1 I7 Q7 1 2 4 -SF PREP
27 D7 PA0 4 8 I8 Q8 11 7 8
JP17 removed set -IDWR 36 WR
CR13
+5V RP7 22 -FL EXP
1 17 -FL EXP
JP18 removed set -IDRD 5 SW3
9
RD -PT SEL
PC0 14 2 1 16 16 -PT SEL/ -SFC
A14 6 15 2 15
2 CS PC1 3 2
16 3 14 PT INPUT
+5V A1 PC2 4 13 PT INPUT
8 A1 PC3 17 5
4 13
13 5 12 EXT SYNC
A0 PC4 6 14 EXT SYNC
9 A0 PC5 12 7 6 11
100nF 11 7 10 -SPARE IN2
1K RP12 U14 +5V PC6 8 15 -SPARE IN2
PC7 10 9
8 9
470 2501 1
-HT INTLK RP5 5 GND
1 2 2 K1 C1 16 6 25 PB7 18
10K GND
3 4 4 K2 C2 14 7 24 PB6
-PT SEL 6 12 23 CR20
5 6 K3 C3 8 PB5
8 10 22 1N4148
-FL EXP 7 8 K4 C4 9 PB4 -PREP J4 (to J4 - FLUORO CPU)
3 18 PB0
19
-SF PREP SW2
4
20
PB1 J13 2 -CAM FL EXP
5 PB2 1 C-FL DAT
1 8 10 21 PB3 RESET 35 15 -FS 7 C-FL CLK
2 7 U36 2501 RP18
2 10 -TOMO EXP
3 6 1 470 FL-C DAT
RP14 A1 11 TOMO ON 3 FL-C DAT
4 5 16 C1 K1 2 2 1 9 -TOMO PREP
10K 3 FL-C CLK
A2 1 TIME 1 4 FL-C CLK
14 C2 K2 4 4 3 2 TIME 2
RP19 U37 5 CAM SYNC
470 2501 to RP15 A3 3 TIME 3 9 CAM SYNC
12 C3 K3 6 6 5 4 TIME 4
to J2-15 2 16 (sheet 2) 7 +12V ISO
-SPARE IN2 1 2 K1 C1 IN2 A4 5 -PS (DSI) SEL 5 +12V ISO
3 4 4 K2 C2 14 10 C4 K4 8 8 7 6 -CINE (DSA) SEL 6 GND
5 6 6 K3 C3 12 7 -HCF SEL 8 GND
-SPARE IN1 8 10 IN1 +5V
to J2-22 7 8 K4 C4 8 SPARE IN
12 EXT REF
14 EXP STOP PAGE 3 OF 4
1 1
U4 +5V U5 +5V U6 +5V U15 +5V U35 2501 RP17 13 GND
JP14 JP15 JP16 JP17 JP18 ENG F. GARCIA
74HCT123
Vcc 16
74HCT02
Vcc 14
8255A
Vcc 26
8255A
Vcc 26 16
A1
C1 K1
1
2
470
2 1
ATP CONSOLE CHK A. DIAZ
3 J20
A2 SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4
14 C2 K2 4 4 3 2 EXP STOP REV CN 07/103 (07/05/07)
C19 C23 C24 C15 5
A3 1 EXT REF
100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF 12 C3 K3 6 6 5 A3024-XX REV.
GND 8 GND 7 GND 7 GND 7 A4 7 DWG
10 8
C4 K4 8 7
CR19
JP23
EXT SYNC
to J2-14
SEDECAL S.A. REV.
REV.
1N4148
DATE 10/10/00
A B C D E
A B C D E
VERSION HYBRID REV NOTE.- SOME COMPONENTS COULD

NOT BE REQUIRED ACCORDING TO
11 55 I
THE VERSION USED
21 61 O
SERIAL COMMUNICATION REQUIRES THE
25 70 O
COMPONENTS SHOWN IN THIS BOX -ACT EXP
31 62 O
+5V (PAGE 3, J2-25)
32 63 O
40 80 O
4 R15 4
50 90 O 4K7 RS485
92 132 O JP8 RS485
JP22 JP21 +5V C34 JP7
93 133 O
485 422 485 422 100nF A B
94 134 O A B A B A B
121 O
R16
U10 75
14
MAX489
+5V J8
Vcc
1 NC NC 13 4 +5V
2 R A 12 1 -ACT EXP
3 REB B 11 8 RXD-
4 DE Z 10 7 TXD-
5 D Y 9
+5V C35 6 8 RS232/422
GND
100nF GND NC RS232/422 JP9 9
JP10 232 422
DATA BUS 232 422 6
A B
U16 A B
7
2681 2 RXD+ (RXD)
40
+5V 3 TXD+ (TXD)
D0 5 GND
25 15
Vcc
RS232/422 D1 DO DP7 C31
16 D1 DP6 26
JP11 D2 24 14 10uF
232 422 D3 D2 DP5 16V U9 +5V
17 D3 DP4 27
A B D4 23 13 C33 C32 C30 MAX232
D5 18
D4 DP3
28 10uF 10uF 10uF 2 16 +5V J7
3 D6 D5 DP2 16V 16V 16V V+ Vcc 3
22 D6 DP1 12 1 C1+ 4 DTR
D7 19 29 3 C29 SET JP12 FOR
D7 DP0 C1- 10uF FLUOROSCAN 1 -ACT EXP
4 C2+ 8
-IOWR 8 5 16V
WR C2- +12V UNREG JP12 7
6 V- GND 15
-IORD 9 RD 9
TXDA 30
A10 35 11 11 14
CS TXDB 3 TXD
A0 1 12 13
RS1 2 RXD
A1 6
3 SW4 10 7 GND
RS2 CR24 CR23 5
IP6 37 1 8
A2 5 38 2 7 9 8 1.5KE15CA 1.5KE15CA
RS3 IP5
IP4 39 3 6
A3 6 2 4 5
RS4 IP3 CR22 CR21
IP2 36
31 4 1.5KE15CA 1.5KE15CA
RXDA IP1
10 RXDB IP0 7
32 +5V
X1
21
C37 XT2 IRQ 1 RP8 J16
GND
33pF 3.6864MHz 33 34 10K

X2 D0 2 1 FGND
3
+5V 2 GND
4
20
5
C62 6 3 VDD
7 4 VEE
33pF R38
2 8 2
10K -DWR
UART RQ 9 Q7 R39 (PAGE 3, U15-3) 5 -WR
2 1
(PAGE 1, U29-25) 10 2N4401 1K -DRD
U19A R37 (PAGE 3, U6-15) 6 -RD
74HCT14 1K EN2
(PAGE 2, J10-9) 7 -CE
C/ -D
(PAGE 2, U11-11) 8 C/ -D
-12V R30 FS
+5V 10K (PAGE 3, U15-2) 19 FS
9
10 -RESET
DB0
C58 DB1 11 DB0
+5V 1nF DB2 12 DB1
13 DB2
J2 +12V ISO Q5 CR14 DB3
14 DB3
INTEGRATED 2N4403 1N4148
R24
DB4
DB5 15 DB4
16 DB5
KEYBOARD J4 FLUORO CPU 1K DB6
17 DB6
R22 R23 DB7
18 DB7
J3 BOARD 1K 100K
MASTER RESET TP12
(PAGE 3, U6-35) DB0......DB7 GND
and (PAGE 2, J10) 20 RV
C53 CR10 R27 (PAGE 1, U30-21)
100uF BZX55C C16 6K81
6V2 1uF
PAGE 4 OF 4
1 J9 Q6 1
2N4401
ENG F. GARCIA
ATP J4
CR11
1N4148
R25
825 R26 ATP CONSOLE CHK A. DIAZ
CONSOLE DISPLAY 681
SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4
BOARD J10 BOARD
REV CN 07/103 (07/05/07)
A3024-XX REV.
DWG
J11
SEDECAL S.A. REV.
REV.
DATE 10/10/00
A B C D E
A B C D E
AEC/ABC SW
J1 U6
U3 +12V U2 U4 ULN2803 J2
D0 MAX501 AD7590 74HCT574
D0 8 D1 D0 13 20 D0 3 D0 2 19 1 18
D1 7 D0/D8 VDD A1 D1 Q1 I1 Q1 5 -FLD 1
D2 D1 11 D1 4 D1 3 18 2 17
D2 10 D1/D9 A2 D2 Q2 I2 Q2 6 -FLD 2
D3 +5V U7 D2 10 D2 5 D2 4 17 3 16
D3 9 D2/D10 A3 D3 Q3 I3 Q3 7 -FLD 3
D4 74HCT138 D3 9 1 D3 6 D3 5 16 4 15
D4 12 D3/D11 VOUT A4 D4 Q4 I4 Q4 8 -STRT DR
D5 6 D4 8 D4 6 15 5 14
D5 11 G1 D4 D5 Q5 I5 Q5 9 GND
D6 D5 7 24 D5 7 14 6 13
D6 14 D5 RFB D6 Q6 I6 Q6 10 VD
D7 5 D6 6 D6 8 13 7 12
D7 13 G2B D6 D7 Q7 I7 Q7
D7 5 D7 9 12 8 11
GND
D7 D8 Q8 I8 Q8
4 VREF 17 7 W 4
-IOWR 5 4 G2A Y3 12 14 CSLSB AGND 18 11 CLK OC 1
9
A15 16 3 C Y2 13 16 CSMSB DGND 12
2 14 +12V 15 SCL 2
A1 4 B Y1 WR
A0 3 1 A Y0 15 3 SET VSS 19 SCL 1

REFERENCE (as calibration number)
4 CLR LDAC 2
+12V
R22 CR4
TP4 3K32
RP2 U5 RAMP IN4148
J2 R21 6 -
1K 5108 4K99 1
IC 1 1 1 2 4 S1 D 8 7 +
3 4 5 U8A
IC 2 2 S2 R16 LM339
IC 3 3 5 6 6 S3 A0 1 SCL 1
7 8 1M C12 R20
PT INPUT 4 -12V 100nF
A1 16 SCL 2 100K
C8 C9 C10 12 S5 J1
100nF 100nF 100nF 11 2
S6 VC R8
10 S7 S4 7 15 AEC STOP
9 15 +5V 2K2
S8 A2 U2C R4
3 AD7590 7K32 R15 3
12 11 4 - 100
S D
2 1
R6 PT CRL
5 +
JP4 200 K C7 C13 +5V
B A R10 R7 3.3 uF U8B 100nF
10K 10K LM339
U2D R13 R12

JP3 AD7590 10K 10K
R3 U2A 10 9
1K AD7590 B A +12V S D
FL RAD
16 15 See Note
S D
TP2 TP1 R9
INTEGRATION RESET UP PT DWN PT U8C 100K
LM339 J1
8 -
R1 U2B R14 R11 14 19 -KV DWN
604K AD7590 10K 10K 9 +
13 14 RP1 +12V
D S 1K
C25 8 7
100 nF 6 5 +5V
FLUORO ABC TP3 U8D 4 3
ABC IN LM339 2 1
C24 C6 R2 R5 10 -
100nF 1nF 1K 10K 13
2 6 -KV UP 2
11 +
JP1 INTEGRATION CR3
C11 R18 IN3595 R17
R19 C U1 1nF +12V 1K 1K +5V C26
1K CA3140 100 nF
2 - JP2
B 6 B A
3 +
CR1 CR2 BOARD VERSION JP1 JP2 JP4
A 1N4148 1N4148
C1
1
100pF +12V C14 A3604-01 PHOTOMULTIPLIER B B A

+12V C22 100nF
1uF A3604-02 FOR TV CAMERA A A A
7
U1 A3604-05 4 ION CHAMBERS C A B
3
- CA3140
4 -
2 + NOTE.- JUMPER JP3 IN POSITION A FOR ION CHAMBERS
J1 5 +
C15 WITH HIGH SENSIBILITY (GAIN 2V / mR )
U8B 100nF
LM339
4
+5V 20
12
+12V 18 -12V
-12V +12V +5V U2 +12V C16 U5 +12V C20
AD7590 100nF U3 +12V U4 +5V 5108 100nF
1 8 MAX501 74HCT574 13 U7 +5V 1
-12V 17 +V +V
20 20 74HCT138
Vcc Vcc ENG F. GARCIA
16
C3 C2 C4
C5
100nF TP5 TP6
Vcc
HR AEC CONTROL CHK A. DIAZ
10uF 10uF 10uF GND GND C17 C18 C19 C21 CN 07/130 15/06/07
REV
100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF C23
GND
GND
GND 2 -V 1 -V 3 100nF A3604-01/02 REV. B

DGND 12 GND 10 DWG
8 A3604-05 B
GND
SEDECAL S.A. REV.
14
-12V -12V
2
REV.
DATE 15/06/07
A B C D E
A B C D E
AEC/ABC SW
J1 U6
U3 +12V U2 U4 ULN2803 J2
D0 MAX501 AD7590 74HCT574
D0 8 D1 D0 13 20 D0 3 D0 2 19 1 18
D1 7 D0/D8 VDD A1 D1 Q1 I1 Q1 5 -FLD 1
D2 D1 11 D1 4 D1 3 18 2 17
D2 10 D1/D9 A2 D2 Q2 I2 Q2 6 -FLD 2
D3 +5V U7 D2 10 D2 5 D2 4 17 3 16
D3 9 D2/D10 A3 D3 Q3 I3 Q3 7 -FLD 3
D4 74HCT138 D3 9 1 D3 6 D3 5 16 4 15
D4 12 D3/D11 VOUT A4 D4 Q4 I4 Q4 8 -STRT DR
D5 6 D4 8 D4 6 15 5 14
D5 11 G1 D4 D5 Q5 I5 Q5 9 GND
D6 D5 7 24 D5 7 14 6 13
D6 14 D5 RFB D6 Q6 I6 Q6 10 VD
D7 5 D6 6 D6 8 13 7 12
D7 13 G2B D6 D7 Q7 I7 Q7
D7 5 D7 9 12 8 11
GND
D7 D8 Q8 I8 Q8
4 VREF 17 7 W 4
-IOWR 5 4 G2A Y3 12 14 CSLSB AGND 18 11 CLK OC 1
9
A15 16 3 C Y2 13 16 CSMSB DGND 12
2 14 +12V 15 SCL 2
A1 4 B Y1 WR
A0 3 1 A Y0 15 3 SET VSS 19 SCL 1

REFERENCE (as calibration number)
4 CLR LDAC 2
+12V
R22 CR4
TP4 3K32
RP2 U5 RAMP IN4148
J2 R21 6 -
1K DG501 4K99 1
IC 1 1 1 2 4 S1 D 8 7 +
3 4 5 U8A
IC 2 2 S2 R16 LM339
IC 3 3 5 6 6 S3 A0 1 SCL 1
7 8 1M C12 R20 C27
PT INPUT 4 -12V 100nF 22nF
A1 16 SCL 2 49K9
C8 C9 C10 12 S5 J1
100nF 100nF 100nF 11 2
S6 VC R8
10 S7 S4 7 15 AEC STOP
9 15 +5V 2K2
S8 A2 U2C R4
3 AD7590 7K32 R15 3
12 11 4 - 100
S D
2 1
R6 PT CRL
5 +
JP4 200 K C7 C13 +5V
B A R10 R7 3.3 uF U8B 100nF
10K 10K LM339
U2D R13 R12

JP3 AD7590 10K 10K
R3 U2A 10 9
1K AD7590 B A +12V S D
FL RAD
16 15 See Note
S D
TP2 TP1 R9
INTEGRATION RESET UP PT DWN PT U8C 100K
LM339 J1
8 -
R1 U2B R14 R11 14 19 -KV DWN
604K AD7590 10K 10K 9 +
13 14 RP1 +12V
D S 1K
C25 8 7
100 nF 6 5 +5V
FLUORO ABC TP3 U8D 4 3
ABC IN LM339 2 1
C24 C6 R2 R5 10 -
100nF 1nF 1K 10K 13
2 6 -KV UP 2
11 +
JP1 INTEGRATION CR3
C11 R18 IN3595 R17
R19 C U1 1nF +12V 1K 1K +5V C26
1K CA3140 100 nF
2 - JP2
B 6 B A
3 +
CR1 CR2 BOARD VERSION JP1 JP2 JP4
A 1N4148 1N4148
C1
1
100pF +12V C14 A3604-01 PHOTOMULTIPLIER B B A

+12V C22 100nF
1uF A3604-02 FOR TV CAMERA A A A
7
U1 A3604-05 4 ION CHAMBERS C A B
3
- CA3140
4 -
2 + NOTE.- JUMPER JP3 IN POSITION A FOR ION CHAMBERS
J1 5 +
C15 WITH HIGH SENSIBILITY (GAIN 2V / mR )
U8B 100nF
LM339
4
+5V 20
12
+12V 18 -12V
-12V +12V +5V U2 +12V C16 U5 +12V C20
AD7590 100nF U3 +12V U4 +5V 5108 100nF
1 8 MAX501 74HCT574 13 U7 +5V 1
-12V 17 +V +V
20 20 74HCT138
Vcc Vcc ENG F. GARCIA
16
C3 C2 C4
C5
100nF TP5 TP6
Vcc
HR AEC CONTROL CHK A. DIAZ
10uF 10uF 10uF GND GND C17 C18 C19 C21 CN 08/137 14/05/08
REV
100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF C23
GND
GND
GND 2 -V 1 -V 3 100nF A3604-01/02 REV. C

DGND 12 GND 10 DWG
8 A3604-05 C
GND
SEDECAL S.A. REV.
14
-12V -12V
2
REV.
DATE 14/05/08
A B C D E
--FIELD SEL 3
F E D C B A
TB1 J1
1 1
COMM COMM
2 7
--12 VDC --12 VDC
3 8
+12 VDC +12 VDC
4 9
+24 VDC GND
8 5
4 RELAY 4 IC1 OUT IC1 OUTPUT 4
5 +12 VDC 3
RELAY 3 -- 4 FLD2--IC1 CENTER AREA
6 U1 C1 C3 2
RELAY 2 LF347 100uF FLD1--IC1 LEFT AREA
0.1 uF
7 + 35V 6
RELAY 1 TP1 +12 VDC 11 FLD3--IC1 RIGHT AREA
RP1 +12 VDC RP4
9 TP6 IC1 10K C2 C4 4
IC4 10K R12 TP2 --12 VDC STRT--IC1 --RESET
R6 RP4 +12 VDC 0.1 uF 100uF
10 RP2 3K01 5 6 RP3 3K01 IC2 35V
5 6 10K 10K
GND 6 10K -- 9 R11
R7
+12 VDC TP5
R4 --
6 5
R5
1K
R10
1K U1 56 1K
1 2 RP3
10K
3K01
IC3
TP4 RP1
10K GND J2
1K U1 R1
LF347 RP3 R9 -- 13 R8 1
J4 7
LF347 RP2
10K C10
8
10 10K 1K U1 2 1 1K 1 2 RP2
10K
3K01
COMM
5 +
5 C8 +
0.1 uF 7 7 8 14
LF347 RP3 R3 -- 2 R2 --12 VDC
7
7 7 8
GND 0.1 uF
RP4 C9 12 10K 1K U1 2 1 1K --12 VDC
RP1 + RP2 +12 VDC
7 8 10K 0.1 uF 3 3 4 LF347 8
8 10K JP9 1 10K
IC4 INPUT JP12 IC1 OUT RP4 C7 +
3 +12 VDC
IC4 OUT 4 10K
1 B A B A
JP10 0.1 uF 3 3 4 9
IC1 INPUT IC2 OUT RP1 GND
6 B A 4 10K 5
IC2 INPUT JP11 IC2 OUT IC2 OUTPUT
IC3 OUT
2 B A 3
IC3 INPUT FLD2--IC2 CENTER AREA
8 2
3 --FLD 2 DR FLD1--IC2 LEFT AREA 3
3 6
--FLD 1 DR FLD3--IC2 RIGHT AREA
4 4
--FLD 3 DR STRT--IC2 --RESET
9
--STRT DR
J3
K10 JP8 K6 JP6 K2 JP14 K15 1
COMM
A A A
6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 7
B B B --12 VDC
CR2
1N4148
8
C6 13 8
FLD2--IC1
13 8
FLD2--IC2
13 8 13 8 +12 VDC
C5 FLD2--IC3
0.1 uF 100uF 9
35V GND
5
K11 JP4 K7 JP2 K3 JP16 K14 IC3 OUT IC3 OUTPUT
A A A 3
6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 FLD2--IC3 CENTER AREA
B B B 2
CR3 FLD1--IC3 LEFT AREA
1N4148 13 8
13 8
FLD1--IC1 FLD1--IC2
13 8
FLD1--IC3 13 8 6
FLD3--IC3 RIGHT AREA
4
STRT--IC3 --RESET
2 K12 JP7 K8 JP5 K4 JP15 K13 2
6 1
A
6 1
A
6 1 A
6 1 J5
B B B
CR4 1
1N4148 COMM
13 8 13 8 13 8 13 8
FLD3--IC1 FLD3--IC2 FLD3--IC3 7
--12 VDC
8
+12 VDC
TP3 K9 JP3 K5 JP1 K1 JP13 K16 9
ST GND
A A 6 1 A
6 1 6 1 6 1 5
R13 B B B IC4 OUT IC4 OUTPUT
10K CR1
1N4148
3
13 8 STRT--IC1 13 8
STRT--IC2
13 8 STRT--IC3 13 8 CENTER AREA
2
LEFT AREA
6
RIGHT AREA
JUMPERS JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12 4 1
--RESET
POS. A -- NO OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
POS. B -- OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
Note.-- Version 03 as CN 99/45
1
Ion Chamber Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers NAME DATE SHEET / OF
Type JP3,JP4,JP7,JP8 JP1,JP2,JP5,JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16
DWG:
A3263--03
IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4 B B B 1/1
REVISED A. DIAZ 07/07/99 REV
IC1=IC2=IC3 B B A
IC1=IC2 B A A AEC ADAPTATION
/ / /
IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4 A A A SEDECAL
ADAPTACION AEC
F E D C B A
+5 VDC PTR1
AR1 8 X 10K PD ( 0......7 ) C15 Q12 D19 D20
C29 100nF BC640 1N5819 BAT49 3
+5 VDC VS1
U13 D40 D45
100nF 6 R117 Q5
20 HCT244 2 7 1 6 BAT49 1K 1N4148
SW1 C11 BC640 R29
8 9 2 VCC 18 PD7 U9A D42 33.2
1A1 1Y1 5 BAT49 D44
7 10 4 16 PD6 +5 VDC TC4426
1A2 1Y2 TP9 1N4148 R116 R30 D21
6 11 6 14 PD5 D41 1K 2K21
1A3 1Y3 BAT49 4
4 5 12 8 12 PD4 4 5 3 4 BAT49 4
1A4 1Y4 C12
4 13 11 9 PD3 PD0 D43 C59
3 2A1 2Y1 3 U9B C65 TF5
14 13 7 PD2 PD1 TC4426 BAT49 10uF
2A2 2Y2 220nF
2 15 15 5 PD1 PD2
2A3 2Y3 C12 Q15 D10 D11
1 16 17 3 PD0 PD3 9
2A4 2Y4 PD4 100nF BC640 1N5819 BAT49
1 PD5 VS2
1G D58 R123 D63
19 PD6 6 BAT49 1K 1N4148 Q2
CS3 2G 2 7 1 6
GND PD7 C21 BC640 R23
U6A D60 33.2
10 TC4426 5 BAT49 D62
AR6 TP6 R122 R24
8 X 4K7 1N4148 D12
D59 1K 2K21 10
+5 VDC BAT49 BAT49
+5 VDC 4 5 3 4
AR2 8 X 10K C22
C30 3 U6B TF2 D61 C62
+5 VDC C47 C68 BAT49 10uF
TC4426
U14 220nF
100nF HCT244 C16 Q11 D22 D23
SW2 20 U17 10 uF 1
87C54 100nF BC640 1N5819 BAT49
8 9 2 VCC 18 PD7 40 VS1
1A1 1Y1 D34
7 10 4 16 PD6 +5 VDC R115 D39
1A2 1Y2 VCC 39 PD0 6 BAT49 1K 1N4148 Q6
6 11 6 14 PD5 P0.0 2 7 1 6
1A3 1Y3 38 PD1 P11 BC640 R31
5 12 8 12 PD4 31 P0.1 U10A D36 33.2
3 1A4 1Y4 EA/VP 37 PD2 3
4 13 11 9 PD3 C43 P0.2 TC4426 5 BAT49 D38
2A1 2Y1 36 PD3 TP10 1N4148 R114 R32 D24
3 14 13 7 PD2 33 pF P0.3 D35
2A2 2Y2 19 35 PD4 1K 2K21 BAT49 2
2 15 15 5 PD1 X1 P0.4 4 5 3 4 BAT49
2A3 2Y3 34 PD5 P12
1 16 17 3 PD0 P0.5
2A4 2Y4 X1 33 PD6 3 U10B TF6 D37 C58
12MHz P0.6 C64 10uF
1 18 32 PD7 TC4426 BAT49
1G X2 P0.7 220nF
19
CS2 2G C44 C13 Q14 D13 D14
GND 33 pF P2.0 21 100nF BC640 1N5819 BAT49 7
PWM
10 P2.1 22 VS2
9 RESET PWMC D52 D57
RSTuP P2.2 23 6 R121 Q3
29 PSEN C1 2 7 1 6 BAT49 1K 1N4148
24 P21 BC640 R25
+5 VDC P2.3 C2
ALE 30 ALE/P 25 U7A D54 33.2
AR3 8 X 10K P2.4 MODP1 D56
C39 26 TC4426 5 BAT49
+5 VDC P2.5 MODP2 TP7 1N4148 R120 R26
27 D53 D15
U18 P2.6 MODA1 1K 2K21 BAT49 8
28 4 5 3 4 BAT49
100nF HCT244 A0 1 P1.0 P2.7 MODA2 P22
SW3 20 C61
A1 2 P1.1 3 U7B TF3 D55
8 9 2 VCC 18 PD7 10 C67 BAT49 10uF
1A1 1Y1 A2 3 P1.2 P3.0 T2 TC4426
7 10 4 16 PD6 11 220nF
1A2 1Y2 RAW 4 P3.1 T3
6 P1.3 C14 Q13 D16 D17
11 6 1Y3 14 PD5 5 12 5
1A3 ENuP P1.4 P3.2 ST 100nF BC640 1N5819 BAT49
5 12 8 12 PD4 6 13 VS1
1A4 1Y4 AUTO P1.5 P3.3 HS
2 4 13 11 9 PD3 7 14 D46 R119 D51 2
2A1 2Y1 RD P1.6 P3.4 FL 6 Q4
3 14 13 7 PD2 8 15 2 7 1 6 BAT49 1K 1N4148
2A2 2Y2 WR P1.7 P3.5 SF A11 BC640 R27
2 15 15 5 PD1 16 D48
2A3 2Y3 P3.6 SPARE 1 U8A 33.2
1 16 17 3 PD0 R86 17 TC4426 5 BAT49 D50
2A4 2Y4 P3.7 SPARE 2 TP8 R118 R28
+5 VDC VSS 1N4148 D18
1 10K2 D47 1K 2K21 6
1G 20 BAT49 BAT49
19 4 5 3 4
CS1 2G A12
GND 3 U8B TF4 D49 C60
C66 BAT49 10uF
10 +15 VDC +15 VDC TC4426
Q10 Q9 220nF
2N4403 2N4403 C11 Q16 D7 D8
VS1 VS2 11
+5 VDC 100nF BC640 1N5819 BAT49
VS2
AR4 8 X 10K
D64 D69
C40 R113 R2 6 R125
+5 VDC 1 6 BAT49 1K 1N4148 Q1
A21 2 7
U19 2K21 2K21 BC640 R21
100nF R111 R112 R68 R17 U5A D66 33.2
20 HCT244 475 1K5 BAT49 D68
SW4 475 1K5 TC4426 5
TP5 1N4148 R124 R22 D9
8 9 2 VCC 18 PD7 D65 1K 2K21 1
1A1 1Y1 DZ3 DZ2 BAT49 12
7 10 4 16 PD6 4 5 3 4 BAT49
1A2 1Y2 12V 12V A22
6 11 6 14 PD5 D67 C63
1A3 1Y3 3 U5B C69 TF1
5 12 8 12 PD4 TC4426 BAT49 10uF
1A4 1Y4 220nF
4 13 11 9 PD3
1 3 2A1 2Y1
14 13 7 PD2
2Y2 NAME DATE SHEET / OF
2
1
15
16
15
17
2A2
2A3 2Y3
5
3
PD1
PD0 DRAWING F. GARCIA 10/10/97
DWG:
A3243--04
2A4 2Y4 1/3
REVISED A. DIAZ 10/10/97 C B A REV
1 1G
19 C CN 04/135 F. GARCIA 07/04/05
CS0 2G
GND B CN 04/135 F. GARCIA 16/07/04
10 A CN 02/174 F. GARCIA 07/11/02 SEDECAL CONTROL DRAC
F E D C B A
VBUS (4V<>724VDC)
V P+ N -- TP18
PTR1 +15 VDC
R63
604K +5 VDC
J1 +5 VDC
C18 R66 C37
3 4 X 1N4148
4 COM 22K1 U12D D29 4
D28 D27 U15
470 nF--1000V LF347 1N4148 PD ( 0......7 )
2 R34 R35 R36 R75 R65 U12C 13 ADC0844 20 10 uF
SHL LF347 --
9 14 R74 3 VCC 17 PD0
R37 R33 1M 1M 1M 1M 604K -- CH1 DB0
8 R67 12 + 1K5 4 16 PD1
D31 DB1
J2 150K--2w CH2 15 PD2
150K--2w 10 + 604K C36 5 DB2
1N4148 R73 14 PD3
2 R40 R39 R38 R76 R64 100nF CH3 DB3
V+ DL7 DL8 C31 10K2 6 13 PD4
HLMP1700 HLMP1700 CH4 DB4
1M 1M 1M 1M 604K 100nF 12 PD5
D26 D25 DB5
C19 C17 11 PD6
1 R72 DB6
8 9 PD7
V-- 100nF 22K1 VREF DB7
2
100 uF 100 uF CS CS4
450V 450V 1
RD RD
--15 VDC WR 19
WR
I. PRINC 18
+15 VDC GND INT
PTR1 TP17
C5 10 7
U R88 R60
1V<>8.26A 221K
U2 221K
TP1 +5 VDC +5 VDC
CSNH151 100nF
3 1--7 V+ C27 +5 VDC 3
R8 R7 R10 R4 U1A D1
J1 OP 100nF
LF347 1N4148 TP36 D73
8--14 V-- 12K1 12K1 12K1 12K1 2
1 -- R61 1N4148 6
PRIN R9 9 13 -- 1 R1 --
C4 100 -- D3 1K5
R3 7
8 1N4148 14 3 + 1K5
D32 5
100nF 10 + 12 + 221K 1N4148 R5 C35 D72 +
100nF C25 R62 1N4148
U1C D2 U1D 10K2 U1B
--15 VDC C1 100nF 10K2
LF347 1N4148 LF347 1uF
R6
R55 R57 R58
12K1 12K1 12K1 12K1
I. AUX
PTR1 +15 VDC TP16
W C6 R89 2 D70 6 R59
-- 1N4148 -- 221K
U3 1 7
TP3 221K +5 VDC
CSNH151 100nF 3 5
+ + C24
8--14 V+ U12A D71 U12B
R12 R14 R15 R19 U4B D6 R53 1uF
J1 OP LF347 1N4148 LF347
LF347 1N4148 12K1
4 1--7 V-- 12K1 12K1 12K1 12K1 6
2 -- 2
AUX R11 13 D5 9 7 R18 R54 R56
C7 100 -- -- 12K1
14 1N4148 8 R16 12K1
5 + 1K5
D33
100nF 12 + 10 + 221K 1N4148 R20 C34
D4 U4C 10K2 100nF
--15 VDC U4D C10
LF347 1N4148 LF347 C8
1uF
R13 C28 C3 +15 VDC
+15 VDC +15 VDC 100nF
12K1
100nF 100nF
4 4 2 4
--
U12 U1 U4 1
LF347 LF347 3 + LF347
I. PRINC LIMIT 11 11 11
PTR1 I. AUX LIMIT C26 C2 C9 1
P+ SKM 40GD 123D --15 VDC --15 VCD --15 VDC
100nF 100nF 100nF
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
U V W
DWG:
A3243--04
2/3
7 8 9 10 11 12
C CN 04/135 F. GARCIA 07/04/05
B CN 04/135 F. GARCIA 16/07/04
N -- A CN 02/174 F. GARCIA 07/11/02 SEDECAL CONTROL DRAC
F E D C B A
V UNR
+5 VDC
U11A PD ( 0......7 )
+5 VDC C38 C45
LM339
R50 4
I. PRINC -- DZ1
2 15V C57 100nF 100nF U16
Limit 1K5 C22 R71
100nF 18 52 EP1810 AR5 8 X 4K7
1 nF 5 1K5 RSTuP
+ R69 20 +5 VDC
12 PD0
R90 1K5 J4
+15 VDC 21 PD1
4 U11D Q8 OP1A 4
23K7 C32 22 PD2 R94 9
R126 LM339 2N4401 +5 VDC TLP621--4 SPARE2
100nF R70 48 PD3 16 1
10K2 10 2K2
-- 1K 49 PD4 R93
13 50 PD5 15 2 2K2 10
R127 R83 SPARE2 RTN
--15 VDC 11 D30 51 PD6
23K7 + +5 VDC 1N4148 221K OP1B
R45 C33 54 PD7
56 TLP621--4 R92 11
10K2 100nF 5 14 3 SPARE1
U11B R82 C11 2K2
C46 10K2 32 R91
LM339 R49 I. LIM C12 13 4
R47 6 1 uF 2K2 12
I. AUX -- 1K TP11 44 SPARE1 RTN
1 R52 C21
Limit 1K5 C21 45 OP1C
R51 33 R98 13
1 nF 7 2K21 Q7 C22 TLP621--4 SF
+ 6 12 5
2N4403 221 C52 P11 R97 2K2
R48 10 nF 7 11 6
U11C 221 P12 2K2 14
8 SF RTN
LM339 24 P21
8 ENuP OP1D
-- 23 9 TLP621--4 R96 15
NOTE : 14 AUTO P22 FL
TP29 TP25 TP21 TP20 10 10 7
68 A11 R95 2K2
4.5 V < > 37 Amp. pick for I.PRINC or I.AUX 9 N.U.
+ TP24 TP26 TP22 TP23 11 9 8 2K2 16
53 A12
ALE FL RTN
3 34 2 3
PWM A21 OP2A
3 TLP621--4 R102 17
26 A22 16 1 HS
PWMC 30
J3 TP14 17 CS4 R101 2K2
C1 29 15 2 2K2
19 CS3 18
1 +5 VDC C2 HS RTN
+5 VDC 28
2 47 CS2 OP2B
+5 VDC MODP1 R100 19
3 TP2 27 TLP621--4
+5 VDC 59 CS1 14 3 ST
TP4 MODP2 4
4 C51 25 CS0 R99 2K2
+5 VDC TP12 MODA1 13 4
5 470 uF 2K2 20
GND TP13 46 SPARE2 ST RTN
MODA2
6 +5 VDC R110
GND TP19 SPARE1 OP2C
7 TLP621--4 R106 21
GND 2K21 55 SF 12 5 T3
8 RAW 2K2
GND R107 C56 FL R105
9 C50 1nF 11 6 2K2
+15 VDC HS 22
470 uF 2K21 14 T3 RTN
10
+15 VDC TP15 A0 ST OP2D
11 C49 R108 C53
+15 VDC 1nF T3 TLP621--4 R104 23
12 470 uF 10 7 T2
+15 VDC +15 VDC 2K21 15 T2
A1 R103 2K2
13 +15 VDC R109 C54 9 8
--15 VDC --15 VDC 2K2 24
14 4 X HLMP1700 1nF TP27 TP28 TP33 TP35 T2 RTN
2 --15 VDC 2K21 16 2
V UNR 15 TP37 A2
C55 TP30 TP31 TP32 TP34
16 DL6 DL5 DL4 C48 +15 VDC 6
V UNR V UNR 1nF +15 VDC
22 uF U20
17 +15 VDC RL2
PRECH IF DL3
18 R87 10 ULN2803 PRME15002 4
PRECH IF R85 R81 R79 +5 VDC R43 RDY1
19 22 3K3 3K3 3K3 11 COM 8 ERROR CODE 40
+5 VDC OUT8 IN8
20 12 7 RDY1 39 HLMP1700 3K3 R44 7
+5 VDC +5 VDC OUT7 IN7 ERROR RDY1 RTN
21 13 6 DISCH 57 DL1
T3 IF OUT6 IN6 82 R46 5
22 R84 14 5 PRECH 38 HLMP1700 RDY1 OUT
T3 IF OUT5 IN5
23 15 4 BRAKE 36 10 8
T2 IF 22 OUT4 IN4 DL2
24 R80 16 3 T3 43 R41
T2 IF OUT3 IN3 R77 3
25 22 17 2 T2 42 750 +5 VDC
T1 IF OUT2 IN2 37 HLMP1700 750
26 R78 18 1 T1 41 R42
T1 IF OUT1 IN1 2
GND ERROR DRAC
22
9 10 1
1 35 1
T1 IF: T1 to T2 Commutation GND
T2 IF: Not Used C23
T3 IF: Break Control +15 VDC
100nF
1
U11
3
DWG:
A3243--04
LM339 3/3
12
C20 C CN 04/135 F. GARCIA 07/04/05
B CN 04/135 F. GARCIA 16/07/04
--15 VDC
100nF A CN 02/174 F. GARCIA 07/11/02 SEDECAL CONTROL DRAC
F E D C B A
J1
VUNR +15 VDC
1
+5 VDC
CR5 CR6 2
1N4007 1N4007 +5 VDC
3
+5 VDC
REG1 REG2 4
7815 7805 +5 VDC +5 VDC
4 4
5
IN OUT IN OUT +5 VDC GND
TR1 COM COM
J3 CR1 CR2 6
F1 GND
T 0.5 A 1N4007 1N4007
1 7
220 VAC SW GND
+ + 8
C1 C3 C4 GND
2200 uF 10 uF 10 uF 9
15 VAC 35 V 35 V 35 V +15 VDC
10
220 VAC +15 VDC
11
+15 VDC
15 VAC C2
2200 uF 12
+ +15 VDC +15 VDC
F2 35 V C5
T 0.5 A 13
2 10 uF --15 VDC
0 VAC 35 V 14
--15 VDC --15 VDC
CR3 CR4 15
1N4007 1N4007 VUNR VUNR
COM
IN OUT --15 VDC 16
3 VUNR 3
R2 REG3 17
150K, 2w 7915
18
R1
150K, 2w 19
CR7 +5 VDC +5 VDC
DS1 1N4007 20
HLMP1700 +5 VDC
J2
F3 FILT1 21
T 15 A T3 IF
1
--DC IN 5 9 22
T3 IF
6 CAR--DRAC 10
F4 23
T 15 A 2 BUS 12 T2 IF T1 IF: T1 to T2 Commutation
2
+DC IN 3 T2 IF: Not Used
1 7 8 14 13 24
T2 IF T3 IF: Break Control
3
GND 25
T1 IF
4 26
+DC OUT CR12 T1 IF
1N4007
2 5 CR13 2
--DC OUT 1N4007
CR14
1N4007
J4
J5 1
K1
1
2
CR8 KT2
STTA1212DI
2 3
K3
C6 CR10
220 nF STTA1212DI
1000V
1
3
CR9
VR1 STTA1212DI
1 V480LA20A
CR11 DRAWING F. GARCIA 27/09/97
DWG:
A3240--05
1/1
4 STTA1212DI E CN 01/075 F. GARCIA 03/05/01 REVISED A. DIAZ 27/09/97 E D C B A REV
C, D CN 98/090, 99/94 F. GARCIA 15/02/00
B CN 98/025 F. GARCIA 09/02/98
A CN 98/018 F. GARCIA 05/02/98 SEDECAL INTERFASE DRAC--HF
F E D C B A
4 4
R1
680 ALL DIODES CL03--15
15w
IN--1
CR1 CR2 CR3 CR4 CR5 CR6
3 3
C1 C2
R2 R3
10 nF 10 nF
150K 150K
12.5KV 12.5KV
15w 15w
IN--2
2 2
1
DWG:
A3109--01
1/1
REVISED A. DIAZ 16/03/99 REV
SEDECAL CLAMPING
A B C D E
1 1
CR1
K1 C1 J1
K2
5
9
1N4007 2200uF
ON 4
35V 8
K2 3
+ 7
CR2 2
1N4007 K3
J2 6
1
K1 - DS2E-DC12V
1 + OFF
2
2 2
3
4
- DS2E-DC12V
J3
K3 K2
- 5
CR3 9
1N4007 ON 4
8
+ DS2E-DC12V 3
7
2
K3
6
1
OFF
3 3
4 NAME DATE SHEET / OF 4
DRAWING F. Díaz 14/12/01 A3179-02

1/1
REVISED F. Díaz 14/12/01 REV
SEDECAL AUTO ON/OFF

A B C D E
A B C D E
+23V
P1
5
1 9 1
4
8
3
7
2 P3
6
1 9 5
13 9
4
11 8
3
7
2
8 6
4 1
6
+24V
+24V K1 J1
2 2
1 16
+23V 1
2
P2 3
5
9
4
8 D1 1N4007
3
7
2
6 U1
1 LM317HV
+23V
VOUT VIN
R1 ADJ
3 C1 221 C2 3
10uF R2 10uF
35V 35V
3K83
4 NAME DATE SHEET / OF 4

A3170-01
1/1
REVISED F. Díaz 05/04/00 A REV
A NC 00/166 F. Díaz 18/07/00 SEDECAL RADIATION METER

A B C D E

Definium-5000 Generator Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Definium-5000 Generator Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical

This page intentionally left blank.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

--- MEDICAL EQUIPMENT ---

WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRIC SHOCK,

FIRE AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS

ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH

UL 60601 ---1, CAN/CSA C22.2 NO.601.1 <14NN>

REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

1 AUG 14, 2007 Initial Release.

4 AUG 13, 2008 General Update

The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual.

DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT,

WARNINGS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT,

Cautions advise of conditions or situations that, if not heeded

Note . Notes alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes

The following safety symbols will be used in the equipment.

Attention, consult accompanying documents.

This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and

CHAPTER 1 -- SAFETY AND SERVICE

1 LOCK-OUT / TAG-OUT (LOTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.1 System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.2 LOTO Procedure for System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

2 CONTROL SWITCHES AND BUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

2.1 Power ON / OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

2.2 System Movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

3 APPLYING SYSTEM POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

3.1 System Preparation for Energizing Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

3.2 Energizing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

4 DE-ENERGIZING THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

5 EQUIPMENT SAFETY -- ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

5.1 Generating Static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

5.2 Personal Grounding Methods and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

5.3 Grounding the Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

5.4 Recommended Materials and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

CHAPTER 2 -- PLANNED MAINTENANCE

2 PLANNED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.1 Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.2 General Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2.3 General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.4 Cable Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2.5 HV Transformer Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2.6 X-ray Tube Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2.7 Radiographic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

1.1 Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

1.2 General Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

2 GENERAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

2.1 Low DC Voltage Power Supply Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

2.2 Microprocessors and General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

3 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

4 DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143

CHAPTER 4 -- CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

1.1 Tools And Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

1.2 Generator Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

2 CONFIGURATION AND TEST SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

2.1 3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

2.2 3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

2.3 3024SW3 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

2.4 3024SW4 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

2.5 3000SW2 - HT Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

2.6 Basic Configuration of Generator Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

3 GENERATOR SERVICE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

3.1 Starting the Generator Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11